&855,&8/80  

&

',3/20$,1
'$1,0$7,21$1'
*5$3+,&6

STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION &

TRAINING ANDHRA PRADESH
1
 DIPLOMA IN 3 D ANIMATION AND GRAPHICS
CURRICULUM- 2023 (C-23)
INDEX

S.No Contents Page No.

1. Preamble 3

2. High lights of Curriculum (C-23) 4

3. Acknowledgements 5

4. Rules and Regulations 5

5. Vision and Mission 20

6. Scheme of Instructions and Examinations – 1 Year 21

7. Scheme of Instructions and Examinations -III Sem 22

8. Scheme of Instructions and Examinations- IV Sem 23

9. Scheme of Instructions and Examinations -V Sem 25

10. Scheme of Instructions and Examinations -VI Sem 26

11. I Year Syllabus 27

12. III Sem Syllabus 106

13. IV Sem Syllabus 153

14. V Sem Syllabus 200

15 VI Sem Syllabus 250

2
 PREAMBLE

Technical Education is a key driver of economic development and plays a crucial role in
providing individuals with the skills and knowledge necessary to thrive in the workplace.
As technological advancements continue to reshape industries and create new
opportunities, it is critical that technical education curricula remain relevant and up-to-date.

The curriculum has been designed with this in mind, with a focus on practical skills,
critical thinking, and problem-solving. We believe that these skills are essential for success in
both academic and professional spheres. The revamping of the technical education
curriculum is made with collaborative effort from educators, industry experts, policymakers,
and students.

At the heart of the curriculum, is the belief that the technical education should be
student-centered, empowering learners to take ownership of their learning and pursue their
passions. We aim to create a learning environment that is safe, supportive, and nurturing,
where every student has the opportunity to reach their fullest potential. We acknowledge
that learning is a lifelong journey, and our curriculum is designed to provide a solid
foundation for continued growth and development. We hope that our students will not only
leave with a diploma but with employability and passion for learning.

The State Board of Technical Education and Training, (SBTET) AP, has been offering
Diploma programmes to meet the above said aspirations of the stake holders: industries,
students, academia, parents and the society at large. The Curriculum should be flexible,
adaptable, and responsive to the changing needs of the industry and society. As such, it
has been the practice of SBTET, A.P., to keep the curriculum abreast with the advances in
technology through systematic and scientific analysis of current curriculum and bring out an
updated revised version at regular intervals.

The design of Curriculum C-23 was started in the month of January - 2023. Feedback
was collected from all stake holders: Students, Lecturers, Senior Lecturers, Head of Sections
and Principals for all programmes for this purpose. Accordingly, a workshop was convened
on 15th February 2023 by Smt. C. Naga Rani, I.A.S, Director of Technical Education &
Chairperson, SBTET, AP to discuss on revamping of C-20 curriculum to meet the needs of
industries and for improvement of placements.

The meeting was attended by Sri. Saurab Gaur, I.A.S, Principal Secretary, Skill
Development & Training, Smt. Lavanya Veni, I.A.S, Director, Employment & Training.
Thirteen Representatives from Industries and Fourteen Academicians from Higher Level
Institutions and officials of ITI, Skill Development, CTE & SBTET attended the workshop.

Smt. C Naga Rani, I.A.S., Commissioner of Technical Education while addressing in

the workshop, emphasized the necessity of industrial training and on-hand experience, that
the students need to undergo to support the industries and the Gaps in the Curriculum need
to be fixed to make the students passionate to work in the industry in order to support
economy of the country.

The committees of each branch consisting of experts from Industries, Higher Level
Institutions and Faculty of Polytechnics are informed to study the possibility of

3
incorporating the following aspects while preparation of the curriculum so as to improve
employability.
x To bring out industry oriented Diploma Engineers.
x Internet of Things ( IoT) for all branches
x Theoretical & Practical subjects 50: 50 Ratio
x Industry 4.0 concepts.
x 5G Technology.
x Critical Thinking (Quantitative Aptitude, Data Interpretation, Quantitative
reasoning etc) to face the written tests conducted by the industries during
placements.
x '\QDPLF6WXGHQWFHQWULFWRVXLWWKHQHHGVRIWKHLQGXVWU\

In continuation, series of workshops with subject experts followed in the subsequent

weeks for thorough perusal for preparation of draft curriculum. Also, the suggestions
received from representatives from various industries, academic experts from higher level
institutions, subject experts from Polytechnics, have been recorded, validated for
incorporation into the Curriculum C-23. Finally, the draft curriculum was sent to
academicians of higher-level institutions, industrial experts for Vetting.

The design of new Curricula C-23 for different diploma programmes has thus been
finalised with the active participation of the members of the faculty teaching in the
Polytechnics of Andhra Pradesh, and duly reviewed by Expert Committee constituted of
academicians and representatives from industries. Thus, the primary objective of the
curriculum change is to produce employable diploma holders in the country by correlating
the growing needs of the industries with relevant academic input.

The outcome-based approach as given by NBA guidelines has been followed

throughout the design of this curriculum and designed to meet the requirements of NBA
Accreditation, too.

The Revised Curriculum i.e., Curriculum–2023 (C-23) is approved by 45th

Academic Committee of SBTET, A.P for its implementation with effect from Academic
Year 2023-24. Also, the SBTET, A.P under the aegis of the Department of Technical
Education, Andhra Pradesh in it’s 62nd Board Meeting held on 13-07-2023 (vide item no:
17) Approved to update the Polytechnic Curriculum C-23 with effect from the academic
year 2023-2024 onwards after revamping the present C-20 curriculum, to meet the latest
industrial technological developments including Industry 4.0 concepts.

2. HIGHLIGHTS OF CURRICULUM C-23

The following Courses/ Topics are incorporated in this curriculum C-23 as per the
suggestions received from Industrial Experts, Faculty of Higher Level Institutions and
Polytechnics to improve the Employability Skills of the Polytechnic Students.
1) The Weightage of Theory & Practical in 50:50.
2) A new subject Big Data & Cloud Computing incorporated to meet the
requirements of Industry.

4
 3) Industrial Training (CISCO) is replaced with training in Industry or two
online certificate courses.

3. ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS

The Members of the working group are grateful to Smt C. Naga Rani I.A.S.,
Commissioner of Technical Education & Chairman of SBTET, for continuous guidance and
valuable inputs during process of revising, modifying and updating the Curriculum C-20 to
Curriculum C-23.

We are grateful to Sri. S. Suresh Kumar, I.A.S, Principal Secretary, Skills

Development & Training for his valuable suggestions to bring the revamped curriculum C-
23 in to a final form to meet latest Industry 4.0 concepts.

We are grateful to Sri. Saurab Gaur, I.A.S, former Principal Secretary, Skills
Development & Training who actively participated in the Industry-Academia workshop
conducted on 15th February, 2023 and offered valuable suggestions and insights into the
learning needs and preferences so that the curriculum is engaging, inclusive, and effective.

It is pertinent to acknowledge the support of the following in the making of

Curriculum C-23. A series of workshops in different phases were conducted by SBTET, AP,
Guntur involving faculty from Polytechnics, Premier Engineering Colleges &
representatives from various Industries and Dr. C. R. Nagendra Rao, Professor & Head,
NITTTR-ECV to analyse the Previous C-20 Curriculum and in designing of C-23
Curriculum, is highly appreciated and gratefully acknowledged.

We also extend our sincere thanks to Sri. V. Padma Rao, Joint Director of Technical
Education, Sri K.V. Ramana Babu, Secretary, SBTE&T, Andhra Pradesh, Sri K. Vijaya
Bhaskar, Deputy Director (Academic) , Andhra Pradesh, officials of Directorate of Technical
Education and the State Board of Technical Education, Andhra Pradesh and all teaching
fraternity from the Polytechnics who are directly or indirectly involved in preparation of the
curricula.

4. RULES AND REGULATIONS OF C-23 CURRICULUM

4.1 Duration and pattern of the courses

All the Diploma programs run at various institutions are of AICTE approved 3 years
or 3½ years duration of academic instruction. All the Diploma courses are run on year wise
pattern in the first year, and the remaining two or two & half years are run in the semester
pattern. In respect of few courses like Diploma in Bio-Medical course, the training will be in
the seventh semester. Run-through system is adopted for all the Diploma Courses, subject
to eligibility conditions.

5
4.2 Procedure for Admission into the Diploma Courses:

Selection of candidates is governed by the Rules and Regulations laid down in this
regard from time to time.

a) Candidates who wish to seek admission in any of the Diploma courses will have to
appear for the Common Entrance Test for admissions into Polytechnics (POLYCET)
conducted by the State Board of Technical Education and Training, Andhra Pradesh,
Vijayawada. Only the candidates satisfying the following requirements will be eligible to
appear for the Common Entrance Test for admissions into Polytechnics (POLYCET).
a. The candidates seeking admission should have appeared for S.S.C examination,
conducted by the Board of Secondary Education, Andhra Pradesh or equivalent
examination thereto, at the time of applying for the Common Entrance Test for
admissions into Polytechnics (POLYCET). In case of candidates whose results of
their Qualifying Examinations is pending, their selection shall be subject to
production of proof of their passing the qualifying examination in one attempt or
compartmentally at the time of admission.
b. Admissions are made based on the merit obtained in the Common Entrance Test
(POLYCET) and the reservation rules stipulated by the Government of Andhra
Pradesh from time to time.
c. For admission into the following Diploma Courses for which entry qualification
is 10+2, candidates need not appear for POLYCET. A separate notification will be
issued for admission into these courses.
i). D.HMCT ii).D. Pharmacy

4.3 Medium of Instruction

The medium of instruction and examination shall be English.

4.4 Permanent Identification Number (PIN)

A cumulative / academic record is to be maintained of the Marks secured in

sessional work and end examination of each year for determining the eligibility for
promotion etc., A Permanent Identification Number (PIN) will be allotted to each
admitted candidate to maintain academic records.

4.5 Number of Working Days Per Semester / Year:

a) The Academic year for all the Courses shall be in accordance with the Academic
Calendar.
b) The Working days in a week shall be from Monday to Saturday
c) There shall be 7 periods of 50 minutes duration each on all working days.
d) The minimum number of working days for each semester / year shall be 90 / 180
days excluding examination days. If this prescribed minimum is not achieved
due to any reason, special arrangements shall be made to conduct classes to
complete the syllabus.

6
4.6 Eligibility (Attendance to Appear for the End Examination)

a) A candidate shall be permitted to appear for the end examination in all

subjects, if he or she has attended a minimum of 75% of working days during the
year/Semester.
b) Condonation of shortage of attendance in aggregate up to 10% (65% and
above and below 75%) in each semester or 1st year may be granted on medical
grounds.
c) A stipulated fee shall be payable towards condonation for shortage of
attendance.
d) Candidates having less than 65% attendance shall be detained.
e) Students whose shortage of attendance is not condoned in any semester / 1 st
year and not paid the condonation fee in time are not eligible to take their end
examination of that class and their admissions shall stand cancelled. They may seek
re-admission for that semester / 1st year when offered in the next subsequent
academic semester/year.

For INDUSTRIAL TRAINING:

i) During Industrial Training the candidate shall put in a minimum of 90%
attendance.
ii) If the student fails to secure 90% attendance during industrial training, the student
shall reappear for 6 months industrial training at his own expenses.

4.7 Readmission

Readmission shall be granted to eligible candidates by the respective

Principal/ Regional Joint Director.
a) (i) Within 15 days after commencement of class work in any semester (Except
Industrial Training).
(ii) For Industrial Training: before commencement of the Industrial training.
b) Within 30 days after commencement of class work in any year (including D.
Pharmacy course or first year course in Engineering and Non-Engineering
Diploma streams). Otherwise, such cases shall not be considered for readmission
for that semester / year and are advised to seek readmission in the next
subsequent eligible academic year.
c) The percentage of attendance of the readmitted candidates shall be calculated
from the first day of beginning of the regular class work for that year / Semester,
as officially announced by CTE/SBTET but not from the day on which he/she
has actually reported to the class work.

4.8 Scheme of Evaluation

a) First Year
Theory Courses: Each Course carries Maximum marks of 80 with an end
examination of 3 hours duration, along with internal assessment for Maximum
of 20 marks. (Sessional marks). However, there are no minimum marks
prescribed for sessionals.

Laboratory Courses: There shall be 40/20 Marks for internal assessment i.e.
sessional marks for each practical Course with an end examination of 3 hours

7
 duration carrying 60/30 marks. However, there are no minimum marks
prescribed for sessional.

b) III, IV, V, VI and VII Semesters:

Theory Courses: End semester evaluation shall be of 3 hours duration and for a
maximum of 80 marks.
Laboratory Courses: Each Course carry 60/30 marks of 3 hours duration 40/20
sessional marks.

4.9 Internal Assessment Scheme

a) Theory Courses: Internal assessment shall be conducted for awarding Sessional
marks on the dates specified. Three-unit tests shall be conducted for I year
students and two Unit Tests for semesters. The details are presented below.

Type of Assessment Weightage

S. Assigned
No.
(i) Testing of knowledge through mid-examination for 40
year/sem as (Mid-1+Mid-2+Mid3) or (Mid-1 + Mid-2)
(ii) Assignments 5
(iii) Dynamic Learning activities : Project Work/ Seminar/Tech-
fest/Group Discussion, Quizzes etc./Extra-curricular 5
activities/NSS/NCC/ IPSGM/Cleaning & Greening of Campus
etc.
TOTAL 50

Internal Assessment shall be of 90 minutes duration and for a maximum of 40

marks for each test.

At least one assignment should be completed for each unit which carries 10 marks.
The total assignment marks should be reduced to 5.

The dynamic learning activity is to be conducted which carries 10 marks. The total
marks should be reduced to 5.

The total 50 marks assigned to internal assignment is to be scaled down to 20

marks.

b) Practical Courses:
(i) Drawing Courses:
The award of Sessional marks for internal Assessment shall be as given in the
following table:

Distribution of Marks for the Internal Assessment Marks

First Year (Total:40 Marks) Semesters (Total:40 Marks)
Max:20 Marks Max:20 Marks Max:20 Marks Max:20 Marks
From the From the Average of From the Average of From the Average of
Average of Assessment of Regular TWO Unit Tests. Assessment of Regular
THREE Unit Class work Exercises. Class work Exercises.
Tests.

8
 ¾ For first year engineering drawing each unit test will be conducted for a duration
of 2 hours with maximum marks of 40.

¾ (Part - A: 4 questions x 5 marks = 20 Marks; Part –B: 2 questions x 10 marks = 20

marks).

¾ For the semester drawing examinations, Two Unit tests shall be conducted as per
the Board End Examination Question Paper Pattern.

¾ All Drawing exercises are to be filed in serial order and secured for further
scrutiny by a competent authority

(ii) Laboratory Courses:

(a) Student’s performance in Laboratories / Workshop shall be assessed during

the year/ semester of study for 40 marks in each practical Course.
(b) Evaluation for Laboratory Courses, other than Drawing courses:
i. Instruction (teaching) in laboratory courses (except for the course on
Drawing) here after shall be task/competency based as delineated in the
Laboratory sheets, prepared by SBTET, AP & NITTTR- ECV and posted in
SBTET website.
ii. Internal assessment for Laboratory shall be done on the basis of task/s
performed by the student as delineated in the laboratory sheets, prepared by
SBTET, AP & NITTTR- ECV and posted in AP, SBTET website.
iii. Question paper for End semester Evaluation shall also be task/s based and
shall be prepared and distributed by SBTET as done in case of theory courses
be prepared as per SBTET rules in vogue.
c) Internal assessment in Labs / workshops / Survey field work etc., during the
course of study shall be done and sessional marks shall be awarded by the
concerned Teacher.
d) For practical examinations, except in drawing, there shall be two examiners.
External examiner shall be appointed by the Principal in consultation with
respective Head of Section preferably choosing a qualified person from in the
order of preference.
i) Nearby Industry
ii) Govt / Semi Govt organization like R & B, PWD, PR, Railways, BSNL,
APSRTC, APSEB etc.
iii) Govt / University Engg College.
iv) HoD/Senior Lecture ( Selection Grade-II) from the Govt. Polytechnic
Internal examiner shall be the person concerned with internal assessment as in
(c) above. The end examination shall be held along with all theory papers in
respect of drawing.
e) Question Paper for Practicals: Question paper should cover ( the experiments /
exercise prescribed to test various) skills like handling, manipulating, testing,
trouble shooting, repair, assembling and dismantling etc., from more than one
experiment / exercise
f) Records pertaining to internal assessment marks of both theory and practical
Courses are to be maintained for official inspection.

9
 g) In case of Diploma programs having Industrial Training, Internal Assessment and
Summative Evaluation, shall be done as illustrated in the following table:

Upon
Assessment Max
completion By Based on
no Marks
of
1.The faculty
concerned (Guide) Learning outcomes as
1 12 weeks 120
and given in the scheme of
2. Training in assessment ,for
charge (Mentor) of Industrial Training
22 weeks 120
2 the industry
1.Demonstration of any
1.The faculty one of the skills listed in
member learning outcomes 30
3. Final
concerned, 2.Training Report 20
summative 24 week
2.HoD concerned
Evaluation
and
3.Viva Voce
3.An external
examiner 10

TOTAL 300

h) Each staff member including Head of Section shall be assigned a batch of students
10 to 15 for making assessment during industrial training.

4.10 Minimum Pass Marks

a) Theory Examination:
For passing a theory Course, a candidate has to secure a minimum of 35% in end
examination and a combined minimum of 35% of both Sessional and end
examination marks put together.

b) Practical Examination:

For passing a practical Course, a candidate has to secure a minimum of 50% in end
examination and a combined minimum of 50% of both sessional and practical end
examination marks put together. In case of D.C.C.P., the pass mark for typewriting
and short hand is 45% in the end examination. There are no sessional marks for
typewriting and Shorthand Courses of D.C.C.P course.

C) Industrial Training:
I. Monitoring: Similar to project work each teacher may be assigned a batch of
10-15 students irrespective of the placement of the students to facilitate
effective monitoring of students learning during industrial training.
II. Assessment: The Industrial training shall carry 300 marks and pass marks is
50% in assessments at industry (first and second assessment) and final
summative assessment at institution level put together i.e. 150 marks out of

10
 300 marks. And also student has to secure 50% marks in final summative
assessment at institution level.
III. In-Plant Industrial Training for 3-Year Diploma (C-23) Courses is
scheduled as per the Academic Calendar of the SBTET every year.

4.11. Provision for Improvement

Improvement is allowed only after he / she has completed all the Courses from First
Year to Final semester of the Diploma.
a) Improvement is allowed in any 4 (Four) Courses of the Diploma.
b) The student can avail of this improvement chance ONLY ONCE, that too within the
succeeding two examinations after the completion of Diploma. However, the
duration including Improvement examination shall not exceed FIVE years from the
year of first admission.
c) No improvement is allowed in Practical / Lab Courses or Project work or Industrial
Training assessment. However, improvement in drawing Course(s) is allowed.
d) If improvement is not achieved, the marks obtained in previous Examinations hold
good.
e) Improvement is not allowed in respect of the candidates who are punished under
Mal-practice in any Examination.
f) Examination fee for improvement shall be paid as per the notification issued by State
Board of Technical Education and Training from time to time.
g) All the candidates who wish to appear for improvement of performance shall
deposit the original Marks Memos of all the years / Semesters and also original
Diploma Certificate to the Board. If there is improvement in performance of the
current examination, the revised Memorandum of marks and Original Diploma
Certificate will be issued, else the submitted originals will be returned.

4.12. Rules of Promotion From 1ST YEAR TO 3rd, 4th, 5th, 6th and 7th Semesters:

A) For Diploma Courses of 3 Years duration

i). A candidate shall be permitted to appear for first year examination provided he
/ she puts in 75% attendance (which can be condoned on Medical grounds up to
10%) and pay the examination fee.

ii) A candidate shall be promoted to 3rd semester if he/she puts the required
percentage of attendance in the first year and pays the examination fee. A
candidate who could not pay the first year examination fee has to pay the
promotion fee as prescribed by State Board of Technical Education and Training,
AP from time to time before commencement of 3rd semester.

A candidate is eligible to appear for the 3rd semester examination if he/she puts
the required percentage of attendance in the 3rd semester and pays the
examination fee.

iii) A candidate shall be promoted to 4th semester provided he/she puts the
required percentage of attendance in the 3rd semester and pay the examination
fee. A candidate, who could not pay the 3rd semester exam fee, has to pay the
promotion fee as prescribed by State Board of Technical Education and Training
AP from time to time before commencement of 4th semester. A candidate is

11
 eligible to appear for the 4th semester examination if he/she puts the required
percentage of attendance in the 4th semester and pays the examination fee.

iv) A candidate shall be promoted to 5th semester provided he / she puts the
required percentage of attendance in the 4th semester and pays the examination
fee. A candidate, who could not pay the 4th semester examination fee, has to pay
the promotion fee as prescribed by State Board of Technical Education and
Training from time to time before commencement of 5th semester.

A candidate is eligible to appear for the 5th semester examination if he/she puts
the required percentage of attendance in the 5th semester and pays the
examination fee.

v) A candidate shall be sent to Industrial training / VI semester provided he/she

puts in the required percentage of attendance in the 5th semester and pay the
examination fee/ promotion fee as prescribed by SBTET.
A candidate is eligible to appear for Industrial Training assessment
(Seminar/Viva-voce) puts the required percentage of attendance, i.e., 90% in 6th
semester Industrial Training.

For IVC & ITI Lateral Entry students:

i.) A candidate shall be permitted to appear for Third Semester examination

provided he / she puts in 75% attendance (which can be condoned on Medical
grounds up to 10%) and pay the examination fee for Third semester.

ii) A candidate shall be promoted to 4th semester provided he/she puts the
required percentage of attendance in the 3rd semester and pay the examination
fee. A candidate, who could not pay the 3rd semester exam fee, has to pay the
promotion fee as prescribed by State Board of Technical Education and Training
AP from time to time before commencement of 4th semester.

A candidate is eligible to appear for the 4th semester examination if he/she puts
the required percentage of attendance in the 4th semester and pays the
examination fee.

ii) A candidate shall be promoted to 5th semester provided he / she puts the
required percentage of attendance in the 4th semester and pays the examination
fee. A candidate, who could not pay the 4th semester examination fee, has to pay
the promotion fee as prescribed by State Board of Technical Education and
Training from time to time before commencement of 5th semester.

A candidate is eligible to appear for the 5th semester examination if he/she puts
the required percentage of attendance in the 5th semester and pays the
examination fee.

iii) A candidate shall be sent to Industrial training / VI semester provided he/she

puts in the required percentage of attendance in the 5 th semester and pay the
examination fee/ promotion fee as prescribed by SBTET.

12
 A candidate is eligible to appear for Industrial Training assessment
(Seminar/Viva-voce) puts the required percentage of attendance, i.e., 90% in 6th
semester Industrial Training and pays the examination fee.

B) For Diploma Courses of 3 ½ Years duration (MET/ CH/ CHPP/ CHPC/ CHOT/ TT ):
i. A candidate shall be permitted to appear for 1st year examination provided he /
she puts in 75% attendance (which can be condoned on Medical grounds upto
10%) i.e. attendance after condonation on Medical grounds should not be less
than 65% and pay the examination fee.
ii. A candidate shall be promoted to 3rd semester if he/she puts the required
percentage of attendance in the 1st year and pays the examination fee. A
candidate who could not pay the 1st year examination fee has to pay the
promotion fee as prescribed by State Board of Technical Education and Training
from time to time before commencement of 3rd semester.
iii. A candidate shall be promoted to 4th semester provided he/she puts the required
percentage of attendance in the 3rd semester and pay the examination fee. A
candidate, who could not pay the 3rd semester exam fee, has to pay the
promotion fee as prescribed by State Board of Technical Education and Training
from time to time before commencement of 4th semester.
A candidate is eligible to appear for the 4th semester exam if he/she puts the
required percentage of attendance in the 4th semester

For IVC & ITI Lateral Entry students:

a) Puts the required percentage of attendance in the 4th semester

iv. A candidate shall be promoted to 5th semester industrial training provided he /
she puts the required percentage of attendance in the 4th semester and pays the
examination fee. A candidate, who could not pay the 4th semester examination
fee, has to pay the promotion fee as prescribed by State Board of Technical
Education and Training from time to time before commencement of 5th semester.
v. Promotion from 5th to 6th semester is automatic (i.e., from 1st spell of Industrial
Training to 2nd spell) provided he/she puts the required percentage of
attendance, which in this case ie.,90 % of attendance and attends for the VIVA-
VOCE examination at the end of training.
vi. A candidate shall be promoted to 7th semester provided he / she puts the
required percentage of attendance in the 6th semester and pays the examination
fee. A candidate, who could not pay the 6th semester examination fee, has to pay
the promotion fee as prescribed by State Board of Technical Education and
Training from time to time before commencement of 7th semester.
vii. A candidate shall be promoted to 7th semester of the course provided he/she has
successfully completed both the spells of Industrial Training.
A candidate is eligible to appear for 7th semester examination if he/she
a) Puts in the required percentage of attendance in the 7th semester
For IVC & ITI Lateral Entry students:

a) Puts in the required percentage of attendance in the 7 th semester .

C) For Diploma Courses of 3 ½ Years duration (BM):

13
 The same rules which are applicable for conventional courses also apply for this
course. The industrial training in respect of this course is restricted to one semester (6
months) after the 6th semester (3 years) of the course.
i. A candidate shall be permitted to appear for first year examination provided
he / she puts in 75% attendance (which can be condoned on Medical grounds
upto 10%) i.e. attendance after condonation on Medical grounds should not
be less than 65% and pay the examination fee.
ii. A candidate shall be promoted to 3rd semester if he/she puts the required
percentage of attendance in the first year and pays the examination fee. A
candidate who could not pay the first year examination fee has to pay the
promotion fee as prescribed by State Board of Technical Education and
Training from time to time before commencement of 3rd semester.
iii. A candidate shall be promoted to 4th semester provided he/she puts the
required percentage of attendance in the 3rd semester and pay the
examination fee. A candidate who could not pay the 3 rd semester
examination fee, has to pay the promotion fee as prescribed by State Board of
Technical Education and Training from time to time before commencement of
4th semester.
A candidate is eligible to appear for the 4th semester examination if he/she
a) Puts in the required percentage of attendance in the 4 th semester

For IVC & ITI Lateral Entry Students:

A candidate is eligible to appear for the 4th semester examination if he/she

puts the required percentage of attendance in the 4th semester
iv. A candidate shall be promoted to 5th semester provided he / she puts the
required percentage of attendance in the 4th semester and pays the
examination fee. A candidate, who could not pay the 4th semester
examination fee, has to pay the promotion fee as prescribed by State Board of
Technical Education and Training from time to time before commencement of
5th semester.
A candidate is eligible to appear for the 5th semester exam if he/she
a) Puts in the required percentage of attendance in the 5 th semester.

For IVC & ITI Lateral Entry students:

a) Puts in the required percentage of attendance in the 5 th semester.

v. A candidate shall be promoted to 6th semester provided he/she puts in the
required percentage of attendance in the 5th semester and pays the
examination fee.
A candidate who could not pay the 5th semester examination fee, has to pay
the promotion fee as prescribed by State Board of Technical Education and
Training from time to time before commencement of 6th semester.
A candidate is eligible to appear for 6th semester examination
a) Puts in the required percentage of attendance in 6 th semester

IVC & ITI Lateral Entry students:

a) Puts in the required percentage of attendance in 6 th semester.

14
 vi. A candidate shall be promoted to 7th semester provided he/she puts in the
required percentage of attendance in 6th semester and pay the examination
fee. A candidate, who could not pay the 6th semester examination fee, has to
pay the promotion fee prescribed by SBTET from time to time before
commencement of the 7th semester (Industrial Training).
A candidate is eligible to appear for 7th semester Industrial Training assessment
(Seminar/Viva-voce) if he/she
a) Puts in the required percentage of attendance, ie., 90% in 7th semester
Industrial Training.

For IVC & ITI Lateral Entry students:

a) Puts in the required percentage of attendance, i.e., 90% in 7th semester

Industrial Training.

4.13. Students Performance Evaluation

Successful candidates shall be awarded the Diploma under the following divisions of
pass.
a) First Class with Distinction shall be awarded to the candidates who secure an overall
aggregate of 75% marks and above.
b) First Class shall be awarded to candidates who secure overall aggregate of 60%
marks and above and below 75% marks.
c) Second Class shall be awarded to candidates who secure a pass with an overall
aggregate of below 60%.
i. The Weightage of marks for various year/Semesters which are taken for
computing overall aggregate shall be 25% of I year marks + 100% of 3rd and
subsequent Semesters.
ii. In respect IVC & ITI Lateral Entry candidates who are admitted directly into
diploma course at the 3rd semester (i.e., second year) level the aggregate of
(100%) marks secured at the 3rd and subsequent semesters of study shall be
taken into consideration for determining the overall percentage of marks
secured by the candidates for award of class/division.
d) Second Class shall be awarded to all students, who fail to complete the Diploma in
the regular 3 years/ 3 ½ years and four subsequent examinations from the year of
first admission.

4.14. EXAMINATION FEE SCHEDULE:

The examination fee should be as per the notification issued by State Board of
Technical Education and Training, AP from time to time.

4.15. Structure of Examination Question Paper:

I. Formative assessment (Internal examination)
a) For theory Courses:
Three-unit tests for first year and two-unit tests for semesters shall be conducted
with a duration of 90 minutes for each test for maximum marks of 40. It consists of
part A and Part B.
Part A contains five questions and carries 16 marks. Among these five questions
first question consists of four objective items like one word or phrase
answer/filling-in the blanks/true or false etc with one mark for each question.
The other four questions are short answer questions and carry three marks each.

15
 Part B carries 24 marks and consists of three questions with internal choice ie.,
Either/Or type , and each question carries 8 marks.

The sum of marks of 3 tests for I year and 2 tests for semesters including
assignments and Dynamic learning activities (50 marks) shall be reduced to 20
marks in each Course for arriving at final sessional marks.

b) For drawing Courses:

For I year:
Three-unit tests with duration of 90 minutes and for maximum marks of 40 marks
shall be conducted for first year. It consists of part A and Part B.

Part A consists four questions for maximum marks of 16 and each question carries
four marks (4×4 marks=16 marks).

Part B carries maximum marks of 24 and consists of five questions while the
student shall answer any three questions out of these five questions. Each
question in this part carries a maximum mark of 8, (3×8 marks=24 marks).

The sum of marks obtained in 3-unit test marks shall be reduced to 20 marks for
arriving at final sessional marks. Remaining 20 marks are awarded by the Course
teacher based on the student’s performance during regular class exercise.

For semester: Two-unit tests with duration of 90 minutes and for maximum marks
of 40 marks shall be conducted. The sum of marks obtained in 2-unit test marks
shall be reduced to 20 marks for arriving at final sessional marks. Remaining 20
marks are awarded by the Course teacher based on the student’s performance
during regular class exercise.

c) For Laboratory /workshop: 50% of total marks for the Course shall be awarded
based on continuous assessment of the student in laboratory/workshop classes and
the remaining 50% shall be based on the sum of the marks obtained by the students
in two tests.

II. Summative assessment (End examination)

The question paper for theory examination is patterned in such a manner that the
Weightage of periods/marks allotted for each of the topics for a particular Course be
considered. End Examination paper is of 3 hours duration.

a) Each theory paper consists of Section ‘A’ and ‘B’

Section ‘A’ with Max marks of 30, contains 10 short answer questions. All
questions are to be answered and each carry 3 marks, i.e., 10 x 3 = 30.

16
 Section ‘B’ with Max marks of 50 contains 8 essay type questions. Only 5
questions are to be answered and each carry 10 marks, i.e., Max. Marks: 5 x 10 =
50.
Thus, the total marks for theory examination shall be: 80.

b) For Engineering Drawing Course (107) consist of section ‘A’ and section ‘B’.

Section ‘A’ with max marks of 20, contains four (4) questions. All questions in
section ‘A’ are to be answered to the scale and each carries 5 marks, ie. 4 x 5=20.

Section ‘B’ with max marks of 40, contains six (6) questions. The student shall
answer any four (4) questions out of the above six questions and each question
carries 10 Marks, i.e., 4 x 10 = 40.

c) Practical Examinations
For Workshop practice and Laboratory Examinations, Each student has to pick
up a question paper distributed by Lottery System.
Max. Marks for an experiment / exercise : 50
Max. Marks for VIVA-VOCE : 10
Total Max. Marks : 60
In case of practical examinations with 50 marks, the marks shall be distributed as
Max. Marks for an experiment / exercise : 25
Max. Marks for VIVA-VOCE : 05
Total Max. Marks : 30

In case of any change in the pattern of question paper, the same shall be informed
sufficiently in advance to the candidates.

d) Note: Evaluation for Laboratory Courses, other than Drawing courses:

I. Instruction (teaching) in laboratory courses (except for the course on

Drawing) hereafter shall be task/competency based as delineated in the
Laboratory sheets, prepared by SBTET, AP and posted in its website.
II. Internal assessment for Laboratory shall be done on basis of task/s
performed by the student as delineated in the laboratory sheets,
prepared by SBTET, AP and posted in its website.
III. Question paper for End semester Evaluation shall be prepared as per
SBTET rules in vogue.

4.16. ISSUE OF MEMORONDUM OF MARKS

All candidates who appear for the end examination will be issued memorandum of
marks without any payment of fee. However candidates who lose the original
memorandum of marks have to pay the prescribed fee to the Secretary, State Board
of Technical Education and Training, A.P. for each duplicate memo from time to
time.

4.17. MAXIMUM PERIOD FOR COMPLETION OF DIPLOMA PROGRAMMES:

17
 Maximum period for completion of the diploma courses is twice the duration of the
course from the date of First admission (includes the period of detention and
discontinuation of studies by student etc) failing which they will have to forfeit the
claim for qualifying for the award of Diploma (They will not be permitted to appear
for examinations after that date). This rule applies for all Diploma courses of 3 years
and 3 ½ years of engineering and non-engineering courses.

4.18. ELIGIBILITY FOR AWARD OF DIPLOMA

A candidate is eligible for award of Diploma Certificate if he / she fulfil the

following academic regulations.
i. He / She pursued a course of study for not less than 3 / 3 ½ academic years &
not more than 6 / 7 academic years.
ii. He / she have completed all the Courses.
Students who fail to fulfil all the academic requirements for the award of the
Diploma within 6 / 7 academic years from the year of admission shall forfeit
their seat in the course & their seat shall stand cancelled.

For IVC & ITI Lateral Entry students:

i. He / She pursued a course of study for not less than 2 / 2 ½ academic years &
not more than 4 / 5 academic years.
ii. He / she has completed all the Courses.
Students who fail to fulfil all the academic requirements for the award of the
Diploma within 4 / 5 academic years from the year of admission shall forfeit
their seat in the course & their seat shall stand cancelled.

4.19. ISSUE OF PHOTO COPY OF VALUED ANSWER SCRIPT, RECOUNTING&

REVERIFICATION:

A) FOR ISSUE OF PHOTO COPIES OF VALUED ANSWER SCRIPTS

I. A candidate desirous of applying for Photo copy of valued answer script/s
should apply within prescribed date from the date of the declaration of the
result.
II. Photo copies of valued answer scripts will be issued to all theory Courses and
Drawing Course (s).
III. The Photo copy of valued answer script will be dispatched to the concerned
candidate’s address as mentioned in the application form by post.
IV. No application can be entertained from third parties.

B) FOR RE-COUNTING (RC) and RE-VERIFICATION(RV) OF THE VALUED

ANSWER SCRIPT
i. A candidate desirous of applying for Re-verification of valued answer script
should apply within prescribed date from the date of the declaration of the
result.
ii. Re-verification of valued answer script shall be done for all theory Courses’
and Drawing Course(s).
iii. The Re-verification committee constituted by the Secretary, SBTETAP with
Course experts shall re-verify the answer scripts.
I. RE-COUNTING

18
 The Officer of SBTET will verify the marks posted and recount them
in the already valued answer script. The variations if any will be recorded
separately, without making any changes on the already valued answer script.
The marks awarded in the original answer script are maintained (hidden).

II. RE-VERIFICATION
(i) The Committee has to verify the intactness and genuineness of the
answer script(s) placed for Re-verification.
(ii) Initially single member shall carry out the re-verification.
(iii) On re-verification by single member, if the variation is less than 12%
of maximum marks, and if there is no change in the STATUS in the
result of the candidate, such cases will not be referred to the next level
ie., for 2-Tier evaluation.
(iv) On re-verification by a single member, if the variation is more than
12% of maximum marks, it will be referred to 2-Tier evaluation.
(v) If the 2-Tier evaluation confirms variation in marks as more than 12%
of maximum marks, the variation is considered as follows:
a) If the candidate has already passed and obtains more than 12% of
the maximum marks on Re-verification, then the variation is
considered.
b) If the candidate is failed and obtains more than 12% of the
maximum marks on Re-verification and secured pass marks on re-
verification, then the status of the candidate changes to PASS.
c) If a candidate is failed and obtains more than 12% of the maximum
marks on Re-verification and if the marks secured on re-verification
are still less than the minimum pass marks, the status of the candidate
remain FAIL only.
(vii) After Re-verification of valued answer script the same or change if
any therein on Re-verification, will be communicated to the candidate.
(viii) On Re-verification of Valued Answer Script if the candidate’s marks
are revised, the fee paid by the candidate will be refunded or else the
candidate has to forfeit the fee amount.
Note: No request for Photo copies/ Recounting /Re-verification of valued answer script
would be entertained from a candidate who is reported to have resorted to Malpractice in
that examination.

4.20. Mal Practice Cases:

If any candidate resorts to Mal Practice during examinations, he / she shall be
booked and the Punishment shall be awarded as per SBTETAP rules and regulations
in vogue.

4.21. Discrepancies/ Pleas:

Any Discrepancy /Pleas regarding results etc., shall be represented to the SBTETAP
within one month from the date of issue of results. Thereafter, no such cases shall be
entertained in any manner.

4.22. Issue of Duplicate Diploma

If a candidate loses his/her original Diploma Certificate and desires a duplicate to be

issued he/she should produce written evidence to this effect. He / she may obtain a

19
 duplicate from the Secretary, State Board of Technical Education and Training, A.P.,
on payment of prescribed fee and on production of an affidavit signed before a First
Class Magistrate (Judicial) and non-traceable certificate from the Department of
Police. In case of damage of original Diploma Certificate, he / she may obtain a
duplicate certificate by surrendering the original damaged certificate on payment of
prescribed fee to the State Board of Technical Education and Training, A.P.

In case the candidate cannot collect the original Diploma within 1 year from the date
of issue of the certificate, the candidate has to pay the penalty prescribed by the
SBTET AP from time to time.

4.23. Issue of Migration Certificate and Transcripts:

The Board on payment of prescribed fee will issue these certificates for the
candidates who intend to prosecute Higher Studies in India or Abroad.

4.24. General
i. The Board may change or amend the academic rules and regulations or syllabi at
any time and the changes or amendments made shall be applicable to all the
students, for whom it is intended, with effect from the dates notified by the
competent authority.
ii. All legal matters pertaining to the State Board of Technical Education and
Training, AP are within the jurisdiction of Mangalagiri.
iii. In case of any ambiguity in the interpretation of the above rules, the decision of
the Secretary, SBTET, A.P is final.

20
 DIPLOMAIN3DANIMATIONANDGRAPHICSENGINEERING
SCHEME OF INSTRUCTIONSAND EXAMINATION
CURRICULUM-2023
FIRST YEAR

Instruction Total
Scheme Of Examinations
Periods/Week Periods
Sub Code Name of the Per
Theory Practicals End
Subject Year Duration Sessional
Exam Total
(hrs) Marks Marks Marks
THEORY SUBJECTS
AMG-101 English-I 3 - 20 80 100
90 3

AMG-102 Engineering 5 - 20 80 100

150 3
Mathematics-I

AMG-103 Engineering Physics 3 - 20 80 100

90 3
Engineering
AMG-104 3 - 20 80
Chemistry and 100
Environmental 90 3
studies
Basics Of Computers
AMG-105 3 - 20 80 100
with
Animation and 90 3
Graphics
C and Graphics
AMG-106 4 - 120 3 20 80 100
Programming
PRACTICAL SUBJECTS
Fundamentals of Art
AMG-107 6 180 3 40 60 100
and Drawing
C and Graphics
AMG-108 6 180 3 40 60 100
Programming Lab
Physics Lab 1.5 20 30 50
AMG-109
3
AMG-110 90 1.5 20 30
Chemistry Lab 50

Computer
AMG-111 3 90 3 40 60 100
Fundamentals Lab

STUDENT CENTRIC 3 90
ACTIVITIES

Total 21 21 - 1000

AMG-101,102,103,104,109,110,111 common with all branches

AMG-106,107,108 Common with DAME

21
 DIPLOMA IN 3D ANIMATION AND GRAPHICS ENGINEERING
SCHEME OF INSTRUCTIONS AND EXAMINATION, CURRICULUM-2023
(III Semester)

Total
Instruction Periods Per
Periods/Week Semester Scheme Of Examinations

Sub Code Name of theSubject

End
Duration Sessional Exam Total
Theory Practicals
(hrs) Marks Marks Marks

THEORYSUBJECTS

AMG- Mathematics–II 4 60 3 20 80 100

301

AMG- Multimedia 4 - 60 3 20 80 100

302

AMG- Graphics
5 - 75 3 20 80 100
303 Designing

AMG- 2D Digital 4 - 60 3 20 80 100

304 Animation
Graphics
AMG- 4 -
programming 60 3 20 80 100
305
Through Java
PRACTICALSUBJECTS
Graphics
AMG-306 Designing Lab 3 45 3 40 60 100
-
2D Digital
AMG-307 - 4 60 3 40 60 100
Animation Lab
Graphics
AMG-308 programming -
4 60 3 40 60 100
Through Java
Lab
AMG-309 2D Graphics Lab 4 60 3 40 60 100

AMG-310 Mini Project 3 45 3 40 60 100

STUDENT
CENTRIC 3 45
ACTIVITIES
Total 21 21 630 300 700 1000
AMG-301 common with all branches
AMG-302,304,307,309,310 common with DAME

22
 DIPLOMA IN 3D ANIMATION AND GRAPHICS ENGINEERING
SCHEME OF INSTRUCTIONS AND EXAMINATION, CURRICULUM-2023
(IV Semester)

Instruction Periods/
Week Scheme Of Examinations

Total Periods
Name of the
Sub Code Theory Practicals Per Semester Duration Sessional End Exam Total
Subject (hrs) Marks Marks Marks

THEORY SUBJECTS
Elements of Film
AMG-401 5 - 75 3 20 80 100
Technology
AMG-402 Digital Photography 4 - 60 3 20 80 100
3D Animation and
AMG-403 4 - 60 3 20 80 100
Graphics

AMG-404 Web Designing 4 - 60 3 20 80 100

3DModeling,
AMG-405 Texturing and lighting 4 - 60 3 20 80 100
Techniques
PRACTICAL
SUBJECTS
3D Animation and
- 3 45 3 40 60 100
AMG-406 Graphics Lab

Digital Photography
- 4 60 3 40 60 100
AMG-407 Lab

Communication Skills - 3 45 3 40 60 100

AMG-408

3D Modeling,Texturing
and lighting 4 60 3 40 60 100
AMG-409
Techniques lab
Networking and Web
Designing Lab
*Note: Develop aMini - 4 60 3 40 60 100
project withWeb
AMG-410
Designing
STUDENT CENTRIC
3 45
ACTIVITIES
Total 21 21 630 - 300 700 1000

AMG-401 Common with AMT-303; AMG-408 Common with all branchesAMG-402;

Common with AMT-305; AMG-404 , 410 Common with DAME;
AMG-407 Common with AMT-308

23
 DIPLOMA IN 3D ANIMATION AND GRAPHICS ENGINEERING
SCHEME OF INSTRUCTIONS AND EXAMINATION, CURRICULUM-2023
(V Semester)

Instruction
Periods /Week Total Scheme Of Examinations
Periods
Name of the Per Sessiona End Exam Total
Sub Code Duration
Subject Theory Practicals Semester l Marks Marks Marks
(hrs)
THEORY SUBJECTS
Industrial
Management
AMG-501 and 4 - 60 3 20 80 100
Entrepreneurship
3D rendering,
rigging AND
AMG-502 5 - 75 3 20 80 100
Character
animation
Cinema
AMG-503 autography 4 - 60 3 20 80 100

Advanced 3D
AMG-504 dynamics 4 - 60 3 20 80 100

Visual EFX and

AMG-505 Compositing 5 - 75 3 20 80 100
Techniques

PRACTICALSUBJECTS
3D rendering,
rigging and
- 4 60 3 40 60 100
AMG-506 Character
animation lab
AMG-507 Compositing Lab - 3 45 3 40 60 100
AMG-508 Life Skills - 3 45 3 40 60 100
AMG-509 Editing Lab 3 45 3 40 60 100
AMG-510 Project work - 4 60 3 40 60 100
STUDENT CENTRIC
ACTIVITIES
3 45

Total 22 20 630 - 300 700 1000

AMG-501,508 common with all

AMG-503,505,507,509,510 Common with DAME

24
 DIPLOMA IN 3D ANIMATION AND GRAPHICS ENGINEERING
SCHEME OF INSTRUCTIONSAND EXAMINATION, CURRICULUM-2023

(VI Semester)

No of Marks Marks
Course Code Course title Duration
periods/week for FA for SA
INDUSTRIAL TRAINING
CM-601 (Online Certificate 42 6 months 240 60
courses /Industry)

25
FIRST YEAR

26
 DIPLOMAIN3DANIMATIONANDGRAPHICSENGINEERING
SCHEME OF INSTRUCTIONSAND EXAMINATION
CURRICULUM-2023
FIRST YEAR

Instruction
Total Scheme Of Examinations
Periods/Week
Sub Name of the Periods
End
Code Subject Duration Sessional Total
Theory Practicals Per Year Exam
(hrs) Marks Marks
Marks
THEORY SUBJECTS

AMG-101 English-I 3 - 20 80 100

90 3

AMG-102 Engineering 5 - 20 80 100

150 3
Mathematics-I

AMG-103 Engineering 3 - 20 80 100

90 3
Physics
Engineering
AMG-104 3 - 20 80
Chemistry and 100
Environmental 90 3
studies
Basics Of
AMG-105 3 - 20 80 100
Computers with
Animation and 90 3
Graphics
C and Graphics
AMG-106 4 - 120 3 20 80 100
Programming
PRACTICAL SUBJECTS
Fundamentals of
AMG-107 Art and 6 180 3 40 60 100
Drawing
C and Graphics
AMG-108 Programming Lab 6 180 3 40 60 100

AMG-109 Physics Lab 1.5 20 30 50

AMG-110 90
Chemistry Lab 3 1.5 20 30 50
Computer
AMG-111 Fundamentals 3 90 3 40 60 100
Lab
STUDENT CENTRIC 90
ACTIVITIES
3

Total
21 21 - 1000
AMG-101,102,103,104,109,110,111 common with all branches
AMG-106,107,108 Common with DAME

27
 ENGLISH - 101

Course Title Course Code Periods/Week Periods per year

ENGLISH AMG-101 3 90

Course Course No. of Total No. of Marks Marks for

Code Title Periods/Week Periods for FA SA

M-101 English 3 90 20 80

TIME SCHEDULE

Weightage Table & Time Schedule: C23- AMG-101: English

S. Name of the Periods Weightage Weightage Marks Wise CO's

N Unit Allocate of Marks Distribution of Mapped
o. d Allocated (Long Weightage ( Short
answer answer
(Total ( Short + questions) questions)
90 Long
periods) Answer @10 @3 Marks
Marks
question)
R U Ap An

1 English for 2 CO1,CO2,

Employability 8 CO3, CO4,
3+ 3 CO5
3
2 Living in CO1, CO2,
Harmony CO3, CO4,
8
CO5

3 Connect with 20+9 3 CO1, CO2,

Care 8 CO3, CO4,
CO5

4 Humour for 2 CO1, CO2,

Happiness 8 CO3, CO4,
CO5

28
5 Never Ever CO1, CO2,
Give Up! 8 CO3, CO4,
3 CO5

6 Preserve or CO1, CO2,

Perish 9 20+9 CO3, CO4,
CO5

7 The Rainbow CO1, CO2,

of Diversity 8 3 CO3, CO4,
CO5

8 New CO1, CO2,

Challenges - 3 CO3, CO4,
Newer Ideas 8 10+3 1 CO5

9 The End Point 3 CO1, CO2,

First! 8 1 CO3, CO4,
10+3 CO5

10 The Equal 3 CO1, CO2,

Halves 8 10+3 1 CO3, CO4,
CO5

11 Dealing with 3 CO1, CO2,

Disasters 9 10+3 1 CO3, CO4,
CO5

Short Answer Questions 30 6 6 15 3

Long Answer Questions 80 8

(Integratio
Total 110 n of the
cognitive
skills of
Understan
ding,
Applying
&Analysing
)

29
S. No. Title of the Unit No of Periods COs Mapped

1 English for Employability 8 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4,CO5

2 Living in Harmony 8 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4,CO5

3 Connect with Care 8 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4,CO5

4 Humour for Happiness 8 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4, CO5

5 Never Ever Give Up! 8 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4, CO5

6 Preserve or Perish 9 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4, CO5

7 The Rainbow of Diversity 8 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4, CO5

8 New Challenges- Newer Ideas 8 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4, CO5

9 The End Point First! 8 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4, CO5

10 The Equal Halves 8 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4, CO5

11 Dealing with Disaster 9 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4, CO5

Total Periods 90

30
 - To improve grammatical knowledge and enrich vocabulary.
Course Objectives
- To develop effective reading, writing and speaking skills.
- To comprehend themes related to Personality, Society, Environment to
exhibit Universal Human Values.

CO No. Course Outcomes

Apply and use various grammatical rules and concepts to communicate in academic,
CO1
professional and everyday situations

CO2 Use appropriate vocabulary in various contexts.

CO3 Read and comprehend different forms of academic, professional and everyday texts.

Communicate effectively in speaking and writing in academic, professional and

CO4
everyday situations.

Display human values by applying the knowledge of themes related to Self, Society,
CO5
Science and Environment for holistic and harmonious living through communication.

CO-PO Matrix

Course Code Course Title: English No. of Periods: 90

Common-101 Number of Course Outcomes: 5
POs Mapped CO Periods Addressing PO in Level of Remarks
with CO No. Column 1 Mapping
Number Percentage (1,2,3)
PO1 Not directly Applicable for English course, however activities that use
PO2 content from science and technology relevant to the Programme taken
PO3 up by the student shall be exploited for communication in the Course.
PO4
PO5 CO5 16 18% >50%: Level 3

PO6 CO1, CO2, 52 58% 21-50%: Level 2

CO3, CO4,
PO7 CO1, CO2, 22 24% Up to 20%: Level 1
CO3, CO4,
CO5

Level 3 – Strongly Mapped, Level 2- Moderately Mapped; Level 1- Slightly Mapped

31
Learning Outcomes

1. English for Employability

1.1. Perceive the need for improving communication in English for employability
1.2. Use adjectives and articles effectively while speaking and in writing
1.3. Write simple sentences
2. Living in Harmony
2.1. Develop positive self-esteem for harmonious relationships
2.2. Use affixation to form new words
2.3. Use prepositions and use a few phrasal verbs contextually
3. Connect with Care
3.1. Use social media with discretion
3.2. Speak about abilities and possibilities
3.3. Make requests and express obligations
3.4. Use modal verbs and main verbs in appropriate form
3.5. Write short dialogues about everyday situations
4. Humour for Happiness
4.1. Realize the importance of humour for a healthy living
4.2. Improve vocabulary related to the theme
4.3. Inculcate reading and speaking skills
4.4. Frame sentences with proper Subject – Verb agreement
4.5. Understand the features of a good paragraph and learn how to gather ideas as a preliminary
step for writing a good paragraph.
5. Never Ever Give Up!
5.1. Learn to deal with failures in life
5.2. Use the present tense form for various every day communicative functions such as speaking and
writing about routines, professions, scientific descriptions and sports commentary
5.3. Write paragraphs with coherence and other necessary skills
6. Preserve or Perish
6.1. Understand the ecological challenges that we face today and act to save the environment.
6.2. Narrate / Report past events
6.3. Develop vocabulary related to environment
6.4. Write e-mails
7. The Rainbow of Diversity
7.1. Appraise and value other cultures for a happy living in multi-cultural workspace
7.2. Understand the usage of different types of sentences
7.3. Ask for or give directions, information, instructions
7.4. Use language to express emotions in various situations
7.5. Write letters in various real life situations
8. New Challenges – Newer Ideas
8.1. Understand the functional difference between Active Voice and Passive Voice
8.2. Use Passive Voice to speak and write in various contexts
8.3. Understand the major parts and salient features of an essay
8.4. Learn about latest innovations and get motivated

32
9. The End Point First!
9.1. Understand the importance of setting a goals in life
9.2. Report about what others have said both in speaking and writing
9.3. Write an essay following the structure in a cohesive and comprehensive manner
9.4. Apply the words related to Goal Setting in conversations and in life
10. The Equal Halves
10.1. Value the other genders and develop a gender-balanced view towards life
10.2. Identify the use of different conjunctions in synthesising sentences
10.3. Write various types of sentences to compare and contrast the ideas
10.4. Apply the knowledge of sentence synthesis in revising and rewriting short essays
10.5. Develop discourses in speech and writing
11. Dealing with Disasters
11.1. Speak and write about different kinds of disasters and the concept of disaster management
11.2. Generate vocabulary relevant to disaster management and use it in sentences
11.3. Analyze an error in a sentence and correct it
11.4. Learn and write different kinds of reports

Textbook: ‘INTERACT’ (A Textbook of English for I Year Engineering Diploma Courses) - by SBTET, AP

Reference Books:

Martin Hewings : Advanced Grammar in Use, Cambridge University Press

Murphy, Raymond : English Grammar in Use,Cambridge University Press

Sidney Greenbaum : Oxford English Grammar, Oxford University Press

Wren and Martin (Revised byN.D.V. Prasad Rao) : English Grammar and Composition, Blackie ELT
Books, S. Chand and Co.

Sarah Freeman : Strengthen Your Writing, Macmillan

___________________

End Exam = 80 Marks

PART-A: 10 Questions 3 marks each =30 Marks

PART-B: 5 out of 8 are to be answered : 10 marks each =50 Marks

Unit Tests 1,2,3 @ 40 Marks each

Part A: 16 marks: One question for 4 marks + 4 questions for 3 marks each ( 4+12 Marks=16 Marks)

Part B: 24 marks: 3 questions for 8 marks each with internal choice. ( 3X8 Marks= 24 Marks)

33
 C23- AMG-101: ENGLISH: END EXAM ( 80 Marks )
Question Paper Pattern (Division of Topics: Question wise)
S.No. Language Skill /
Weightage of
of the grammatical Concept of Sub aspects & Description
Marks
Question the question
PART-A ; 10 questions X3 marks = 30 Marks
1 3 Articles & a) Definite, indefinite articles
( 6 Questions X Prepositions b) prepositions of place, time,
½ Mark) directions
2 3 Vocabulary Synonyms, Antonyms, affixes,
( 6 Questions X words& phrases, Phrasal Verbs,
½ Mark) words matching with meanings, one
word substitutions,

3 3 Helping Verbs a) Primary helping verbs

( 6 Questions X ( be/do/have)
½ Mark) b) Modal verbs
4 3 Tenses Using appropriate Verb forms
( 3 questions 1
mark each )
5 3 Voice Conversion : Active & Passive voice
( 3 questions 1
mark each )
6 3 Adjectives Using appropriate adjective form/
( 3 questions 1 conversion : Degrees of comparison
mark each )
7 3 Types of sentences & Conversion from one type of
( 3 questions 1 positive, negative sentence to the other , making
mark each ) sentences negative sentence

8 3 Syntheses of Sentences / Transformation of sentences : Simple,

( 3 questions 1 Conjunctions / linkers complex & compound sentences /
mark each ) use of linkers/ conjunctions
9 3 Direct& Indirect Speech Conversion from Direct to Indirect &
( 3 questions 1 Vice versa
mark each )

10 3 Correction of Sentences Remaining grammar aspects

( 3 questions 1 ( concord & usage based…etc)
mark each )
PART –B ; 5 QX10 M = 50 Marks
11 10 Marks Paragraph Writing From Units 1,2,3
(theme based- focus on importance
of learning and using English)
12 10 Giving instructions or From Units 4,5,6,7
directions Theme based / Situation based /role
13 10 Dialogue writing play/ general topic
14 10 Essay writing From Units 8,9,10,11
(theme based )
15 10 Letter writing Formal / informal letters

34
 16 10 Report Writing Report on Mini projects/ industrial
visits / camps/ events / celebrations
17 10 a) E-Mail writing a) E mail etiquette
( 2 questions X 5 b) Framing questions b) Wh& Yes-No questions
Marks)
18 10 (Ten Reading Comprehension An unseen piece of prose with 10
questions 1 questions for reading comprehension
mark each ) check

C23- AMG-101 :English : Bifurcation of Syllabus for UNIT TESTS 1,2,3

Unit Test Lessons / Grammar / Language aspects Writing Skills
Chapters ( Topics or Short Answer ( Topics for Long answer/ Essay Questions)
questions)
U.T 1 Chapters 1,2,3 a)articles & prepositions, a) Theme based Paragraph
b)Vocabulary: Affixes, synonyms, ( focus on LSRW skills, importance of
Antonyms, matching meanings, English, Self-esteem, SWOC analysis,
words & phrases, one word Social media )
substitutes) b) Dialogue on themes of lessons 2&3
c)Adjectives ( degrees of / Dialogue on General topic / a situation
comparison) c) Reading comprehension
d) Main& Auxiliary Verbs
e) phrasal verbs/ word order

U.T 2 Chapters 4,5,6,7 a) concord a) Theme based paragraph

b) Tenses ( Humour for happy living, learning from
c) Types of sentences failures, Environmental protection, multi-
d) Framing questions culture /global culture )
e) words &phrases, linkers b) Letter writing ( formal& informal),
c) instructions/ directions, E-mail writing

U.T 3 Chapters a) Voice (active &passive) a) Theme based paragraph/ Essay writing
8,9,10,11 b) Speech( direct& indirect) ( Technical innovations, Goal setting,
c) Synthesis of sentences gender sensitivity, dealing with disaster)
( simple, complex, compound b) Essay writing, Report writing
sentences) c) Reading Comprehension
d) Error analysis
e) words &phrases, linkers
Unit Test Total 40 Marks Short Answer questions Long Answer Questions: ( Part-B)
Question ( Part A=16 ( Part-A) Q. 6,7,8 @ 8 marks each ;
Paper Part B =24) Q. 1 = 4 marks Each question with Internal choice
pattern Q. 2 to 5 = 3 Marks each Total: 8X3 = 24 Marks
(40 Marks Total=16 Marks
)

35
 C23- AMG-101: ENGLISH:UNIT TEST Exams 1,2,3 ( 40 Marks each )
Question Paper Pattern (Division of Topics: Question wise)
S.No. Weightage of Language Skill / Sub aspects & Description
of the Marks grammatical Concept
Question of the question
UNIT TEST-1 Marks : 40 ; Time 90 Mnts. ( Lessons 1,2,3 ) :
PART-A : 16 Marks
S.No. Marks Grammatical Sub topics / concepts
allotted concept/ aspect/ skill
1 4 Marks Vocabulary a) Affixes, b) Synonyms
( 8 Questions c) antonyms
X ½ Mark) d)one word substitutes
2 3(6 Questions Articles &Prepositions a) Definite, indefinite articles
X ½ Mark) b) Prepositions of place, time direction
3 3 ( 3 Adjectives a) Using appropriate forms of
questions 1 adjectives
mark each ) b) Conversion of Degrees of
comparison
4 3 Helping Verbs a) Primary helping verbs ( be/do/have)
( 6 questions b)Modal verbs
½
mark each )
5 3 Marks Phrasal verbs Using phrasal verbs in sentences of
( 3 questions one’s own
1 mark each )
Part – B : 8X3 = 24 Marks
6 8 Marks Paragraph question Theme based questions : Lesson 1 :
A or B ( internal Focus on LSRW skills, problems and
choice) solutions in using English, Importance
of English, English for employability,
SWOC analysis
7 8 Dialogue making Conversation / Role play between two
A or B ( internal people :
choice ) a) Dialogue on themes of lessons 2&3
b) Dialogue on General topic / a
situation
8 8 Reading Unseen prose passages with 8 different
Comprehension questions ( FIVE model questions+
A or B Others)
( internal choice )
Unit Test -2: Marks : 40 ; Time 90 Mnts. ( Lessons 4,5,6,7)
Part – A: 16 Marks
1 4Marks Tenses Present, Past, Future tenses : Filling in
with proper verb forms using the given
base form
2 3 Concord Concord: agreement between subject
and verb

36
3 3 Framing questions Framing Wh& Yes-No questions

4 3 Types of sentences Conversion of sentences ( except

questions) , Using of proper linkers /
discourse markers
5 3 Marks Words& Phrases , linkers Using words& phrases, linkers in
sentences of one’s own
Part – B : 8X3 = 24 Marks
6 8 Marks Paragraph writing a) Themes on lessons 4/5
A or B ( internal choice ) b) Themes based on lessons 6/7
7 8 Letter Writing a) Letter writing : formal
( internal choice : A or B ) b) Letter writing: Informal
8 8 a) Paragraph: Tenses a) Paragraph on Routines/ past
Reinforcement narration / Future plans
b) Email & Instructions/ b) i) E- Mail writing ( formal or
directions informal)
ii ) Giving instructions/ directions
Unit Test -3: Marks : 40 ; Time 90 Mnts. ( Lessons 8,9,10,11)
Part – A ; 16 Marks

1 4 Marks Error Analysis Find errors and make corrections

2 3 Voice Conversion: Active & Passive voice
3 3 Synthesis of sentence Conversion: Simple, complex &
compound sentences
4 3 Reported speech Conversion: Direct & Indirect speech
5 3 Words & phrases, linkers Matching words with their meanings/
Using words& phrases, linkers in
sentences of one’s own
Part- B : 8X3 = 24 Marks
6 8 Marks Essay writing a) Theme based ( lessons 8 / 9 )
A or B ( internal choice ) b) Theme based ( Lessons 10/11)
7 8 Report writing a) Report on Mini projects/ industrial
A or B ( internal choice ) visits / camps/ events /exhibitions /
celebrations
b) themes from lessons 8 to 11 …like
disaster management / technical
inventions / gender equality/ goal
setting
8 8 Reading Comprehension Reading passages with 8 different
A or B ( internal choice ) questions ( FIVE model+ others)

37
 C-23 - ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS-I (Common for all Branches)

Course No. of Total No. of

Course Title Marks for FA Marks for SA
Code Periods/week periods

Common- Engineering
5 150 20 80
102 Mathematics-I

TIME SCHEDULE

S.No. Chapter No. of Marks Short Essay type COs

Periods Allotted type mapped
Unit - I: Algebra
1 Functions 6 3 1 0 CO1
2 Partial Fractions 5 3 1 0 CO1
3 Matrices and Determinants 20 16 2 1 CO1
Unit - II: Trigonometry
4 Trigonometric Ratios 2 0 0 0 CO2
5 Compound Angles 5 3 1 0 CO2
6 Multiple and Submultiple 1 0 CO2
8 3
angles
7 Transformations 6 5 0 1/2 CO2
8 Inverse Trigonometric 0 1/2 CO2
6 5
Functions
9 Trigonometric Equations 6 5 0 1/2 CO2
10 Properties of triangles 5 5 0 1/2 CO2
11 Complex Numbers 6 3 1 0 CO2
Unit III: Co-ordinate Geometry
12 Straight Lines 5 3 1 0 CO3
13 Circles 6 5 0 1/2 CO3
14 Conic Sections 12 5 0 1/2 CO3
Unit – IV: Differential Calculus
15 Limits and Continuity 6 3 1 0 CO4
16 Differentiation 28 23 1 2 CO4
Unit – V: Applications of Derivatives
17 Geometrical Applications 4 5 0 1/2 CO5
18 Physical Applications 6 5 0 1/2 CO5
19 Maxima and Minima 4 5 0 1/2 CO5
20 Errors and Approximations 4 5 0 1/2 CO5
Total 150 110 10 8
Marks 30 80

(i) To apply the principles of Algebra, Trigonometry and Co-Ordinate

Geometry to real-time problems in engineering.
Course Objectives
(ii) To comprehend and apply the concept of Differential Calculus in
engineering applications.

38
 CO1 Identify functions as special relations, resolve partial fractions and
solve problems on matrices and determinants.

CO2 Solve problems using the concept of trigonometric functions, their

inverses and complex numbers.

CO3 Find the equations and properties of straight lines, circles and conic
Course Outcomes
sections in coordinate system.

CO4 Evaluate the limits and derivatives of various functions

CO5 Find solutions for engineering problems using differentiation.

39
 C-23 - ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS – I
(COMMON TO ALL BRANCHES)
Learning Outcomes
UNIT - I
C.O. 1 Identify functions, resolve partial fractions and solve problems on matrices and
determinants.
L.O. 1.1 Define Set, ordered pair and Cartesian product of two sets - examples.
1.2 Explain Relations and Functions – examples
1.3 Find Domain & Range of functions on finite sets – simple examples.
1.4 Define rational, proper and improper fractions of polynomials.
1.5 Explain the procedure of resolving proper fractions of the types mentioned
below into partial fractions
f ( x) f ( x)
i) ii )
(ax  b)(cx  d ) (ax  b)2 (cx  d )
1.6 Define a matrix and order of a matrix.
1.7 State various types of matrices with examples (emphasis on 3 rd order square
matrices).
1.8 Compute sum, difference, scalar multiplication and product of matrices. Illustrate the
properties of these operations such as commutative, associative, distributive properties
with examples and counter examples.
1.9 Define the transpose of a matrix and state its properties – examples.
1.10 Define symmetric and skew-symmetric matrices with examples. Resolve a
square matrix into a sum of symmetric and skew-symmetric matrices and
provide examples.
1.11 Define determinant of a square matrix; minor, co-factor of an element of a
3x3 square matrix with examples. Expand the determinant of a 3 x 3 matrix
using Laplace expansion formula. State and apply the properties of
determinants to solve problems.
1.12 Distinguish singular and non-singular matrices. Define multiplicative inverse
of a matrix and list properties of adjoint and inverse. Compute adjoint and
multiplicative inverse of a square matrix.
1.13 Solve system of 3 linear equations in 3 unknowns using Cramer’s rule and
matrix inversion method.

UNIT - II
C.O. 2 Solve problems using the concept of trigonometric functions, their inverses and complex
numbers.
L.O. 2.1 Define trigonometric ratios of any angle - List the values of trigonometric ratios at
specified values.
2.2 Draw graphs of trigonometric functions - Explain periodicity of trigonometric functions.
2.3 Define compound angles and state the formulae of sin(A±B), cos(A±B),
tan(A±B) and cot(A±B).

40
 2.4 Give simple examples on compound angles to derive the values of sin15 0,
cos150 , sin750 , cos750 , tan 150 , tan750 etc.
2.5 Derive identities like sin(A+B) sin(A-B) = sin 2 A –sin2 B, etc.
2.6 Solve simple problems on compound angles.
2.7 Derive the formulae of multiple angles 2A, 3A etc and sub multiple angles
A/2 in terms of angle A of trigonometric functions.
2.8 Derive useful allied formulae like sin2A= (1- cos2A)/2, etc.
2.9 Solve simple problems using the above formulae
Syllabus for Unit test-I completed
2.10 Derive the formulae on transforming sum or difference of two trigonometric ratios into
a product and vice versa - examples on these formulae.
2.11 Solve problems by applying these formulae to sum or difference or product of two terms.
2.12 Explain the concept of the inverse of a trigonometric function by selecting an
appropriate domain and range.
2.13 Define inverses of six trigonometric functions along with their domains and ranges.
2.14 Derive relations between inverse trigonometric functions so that the given inverse
trigonometric function can be expressed in terms of other inverse trigonometric
functions with examples.
2.15 State various properties of inverse trigonometric functions and identities like
S
sin-1x+cos-1 x = , etc.
2
1 1 1 § x y ·
2.16 Apply formulae like tan x  tan y tan ¨ ¸ , where x t 0, y t 0, xy  1 , etc.,
© 1  xy ¹
to solve Simple problems.
2.17 Explain what is meant by solution of trigonometric equations and find the general
solutions of sin x=k, cos x =k and tan x=k with appropriate examples.
2.18 Solve models of the type a sin2 x + b sin x +c=0 and a cos x + b sin x=c.
2.19 State sine rule, cosine rule, tangent rule and projection rule and solve a triangle using
these formulae.
2.20 List various formulae for the area of a triangle with examples.
2.21 Define a complex number, its modulus, conjugate, amplitude and list their properties.
2.22 Define arithmetic operations on complex numbers with examples.
2.23 Represent the complex number in various forms like modulus-amplitude
(polar) form, Exponential (Euler) form with examples.

UNIT - III
Coordinate Geometry

C.O. 3 Find the equations and properties of straight lines, circles and conic sections in coordinate
system.
L.O. 3.1 Write the different forms of a straight line – general form, point-slope form, slope-
intercept form, two-point form, intercept form and normal form (or perpendicular
form) with examples.
3.2 Find distance of a point from a line, acute angle between two lines, intersection of two
non-parallel lines and distance between two parallel lines.

41
 3.3 Define locus of a point and circle.
3.4 Write the general equation of a circle, and find its centre and radius.
3.5 Find the equation of a circle, given (i) centre and radius, (ii) two ends of the diameter, (iii)
three non-collinear points of type (0,0) (a,0), (0,b).
3.6 Define a conic section - Explain the terms focus, directrix, eccentricity, axes and latus-
rectum of a conic with illustrations.
3.7 Find the equation of a conic when focus, directrix and eccentricity are given.
3.8 Describe the properties of Parabola, Ellipse and Hyperbola in standard forms
whose axes are along the co-ordinate axes and solve simple examples on these conics.

Syllabus for Unit test-II completed

C.O.4 Evaluate the limits and derivatives of various
functions.
L.O. 4.1 Explain the concept of limit and meaning of lim f ( x) l and state the
xoa
properties of limits.
f ( x) f ( x)
4.2 Evaluate the limits of the type lim and lim
x ol g ( x) x of g ( x)

xn  an sin x tan x a x 1
4.3 State the Standard limits lim , lim , lim , lim ,
x oa x  a x o0 x x o0 x x o0 x
1
ex 1 § 1·
x
lim , lim (1  x) , lim ¨1  ¸ (without proof) and solve simple problems
x
x o0 x xo0 x of © x¹
using these standard limits.
4.4 Explain the concept of continuity of a function at a point and on an interval.
4.5 State the concept of derivative of a function y = f(x) – definition, first principle
as lim f ( x  h)  f ( x) and also provide standard notations to denote the
h o0 h
derivative of a function.
4.6 Explain the significance of derivative in scientific and engineering applications.
4.7 Find the derivatives of the elementary functions xn, ax, ex, log x, sin x, cos x using the first
principles.
4.8 Find the derivatives of standard algebraic, logarithmic and exponential functions.
4.9 Find the derivatives of trigonometric, inverse trigonometric and hyperbolic functions.
4.10 State the rules of differentiation of sum, difference, scalar multiplication,
product and quotient of functions with simple illustrative examples.
4.11 Explain the method of differentiation of a function of a function (Chain rule)
with illustrative examples.
4.12 Explain the method of differentiation of parametric functions with examples.
4.13 Explain the procedure for finding the derivatives of implicit functions with examples.
4.14 Explain the need of taking logarithms for differentiating some functions of [f(x)] g(x) type –
examples on logarithmic differentiation.
4.15 Explain the concept of finding the second order derivatives with examples.
4.16 Explain the concept of functions of several variables, finding partial derivatives and
difference between the ordinary and partial derivatives with simple examples.
4.17 Explain the concept of finding second order partial derivatives with simple problems.

42
C.O. 5 Evaluate solutions for engineering problems using differentiation

L.O. 5.1 State the geometrical meaning of the derivative - Explain the concept of derivative to find
the slopes of tangent and normal to the curve y=f(x) at any point on it.
5.2 Find the equations of tangent and normal to the curve y=f(x) at any point on it –
examples.
5.3 Explain the derivative as a rate of change in distance-time relations to find the velocity
and acceleration of a moving particle with examples.
5.4 Explain the derivative as a rate measurer in the problems where the quantities like
volumes, areas vary with respect to time- illustrative examples.
5.5 Define the concept of increasing and decreasing functions - Explain the conditions to find
points where the given function is increasing or decreasing with illustrative examples.
5.6 Explain the procedure to find the extreme values (maxima or minima) of a function of
single variable- simple problems for quadratic and cubic polynomials.
5.7 Apply the concept of derivatives to find the errors and approximations in simple
problems.
Syllabus for Unit test-III completed

C-23 - ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS – I

CO/PO – Mapping

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3

CO1 3 2 2 3 3 2 2

CO2 3 3 2 2 3 2 2

CO3 3 3 2 2 3 2 2

CO4 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

CO5 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Avg. 3 2.8 2.4 2.6 3 2.4 2.4

3 = Strongly mapped (High), 2 =moderately mapped (Medium), 1 =slightly mapped (Low)

43
Note:

PO5: Appropriate quiz programme may be conducted at intervals and duration as decided by
concerned teacher.
PO6: Seminars on applications of mathematics in various engineering disciplines are to be planned
and conducted.
PO7: Plan activities in such a way that students can visit the library to refer to standard books on
Mathematics and access the latest updates in reputed national and international journals.
Additionally, encourage them to attend seminars and learn mathematical software tools.
PSO1: An ability to understand the basic mathematical concepts and to apply them in various areas
like computer programming, civil constructions, fluid dynamics, electrical and electronic
systems and all concerned engineering disciplines.
PSO2: An ability to solve the Engineering problems using latest software tool, along with analytical
skills to arrive at faster and appropriate solutions.
PSO3: Wisdom of social and environmental awareness along with ethical responsibility to have a
successful career as an engineer and to sustain passion and zeal for real world technological
applications.

C-23 - ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS – I

PO- CO – Mapping strength

Mapped with CO periods addressing PO in column I Level

PO no Remarks
CO no No % (1,2 or 3)

CO1, CO2, 150

1 100% 3 >40% Level 3
CO3,CO4,CO5 (31+44+23+34+18)
Highly
CO1, CO2, 80 addressed
2 53.3% 3
CO3,CO4,CO5 (8+23+12+22+15)
CO1, CO2, 61 25% to 40%
3 40.6% 3
CO3,CO4,CO5 (9+14+9+14+15) Level 2
CO1, CO2, 61 Moderately
4 40.6% 3
CO3,CO4,CO5 (14+9+9+14+15) addressed
CO1, CO2, 150
PSO 1 100% 3
CO3,CO4,CO5 (31+44+23+34+18) 5% to 25%
CO1, CO2, 62 Level 1 Low
PSO 2 41.3% 3
CO3,CO4,CO5 (10+14+9+14+15) addressed

CO1, CO2, 62
PSO 3 41.3% 3 <5% Not
O3,CO4,CO5 (10+14+9+14+15)
addressed

44
 C-23 - ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS – I
(COMMON TO ALL BRANCHES)
COURSE CONTENT
Unit-I
Algebra
1. Functions:
Definitions of Set, Ordered pair, Cartesian product of two sets, Relations, Functions, Domain &
Range of functions on finite sets.
2. Partial Fractions:
Definitions of rational, proper and improper fractions of polynomials. Resolve rational fractions
(proper fractions) in to their partial fractions covering the types mentioned below.
f ( x) f ( x)
i) ii )
(ax  b)(cx  d ) (ax  b)2 (cx  d )
3. Matrices:
Definition of a matrix, types of matrices-examples, algebra of matrices-equality of two matrices,
sum, difference, scalar multiplication and product of matrices. Transpose of a matrix-Symmetric,
skew symmetric matrices - Minor, cofactor of an element-Determinant of a square matrix-
Laplace’s expansion, Properties of determinants. Singular and non-singular matrices - Adjoint and
multiplicative inverse of a square matrix with examples - System of linear equations in 3 variables
- Solutions by Cramer’s rule and Matrix inversion method with examples.

Unit-II
Trigonometry
4. Trigonometric ratios:
Definition of trigonometric ratios of any angle, values of trigonometric ratios at specified values,
draw graphs of trigonometric functions, periodicity of trigonometric functions.
5. Compound angles:
Formulas of sin(A±B), cos(A±B), tan(A±B),cot(A±B), and related identities with problems.
6. Multiple and sub multiple angles:
Formulae for trigonometric ratios of multiple angles 2A, 3A and sub multipleangles A/2
with problems.
7. Transformations: Transformations of products into sums or differences and vice versa - simple
problems.
8. Inverse trigonometric functions:
Definition, domains and ranges - basic properties - problems.
9. Trigonometric equations:
Concept of a solution, principal value and general solution of trigonometric equations:
Sin x = k , cos x = k, tan x = k, where k is a constant. Solutions of simple quadratic equations and
equations of type a cos x + b sin x = c.
10. Properties of triangles:
Relation between sides and angles of a triangle- sine rule, cosine rule, tangent rule and projection
rule - area of a triangle- problems.
11. Complex Numbers:
Definition of a complex number, modulus, conjugate and amplitude of a complex number,
Arithmetic operations on complex numbers, Modulus- Amplitude (polar) form,
Exponential form (Euler form) of a complex number - Problems.

45
 UNIT-III
Coordinate geometry
12 Straight lines: various forms of straight lines, angle between lines, perpendicular distance from a
point, intersection of non-parallel lines and distance between parallel lines-examples.
13. Circle: locus of a point, Circle, definition - Circle equation, given (i) centre and radius, (ii)
two ends of a diameter, (iii) three non-collinear points of type (0,0), (a,0), (0,b) - general equation
of a circle – finding centre, radius.
14. Definition of a conic section, equation of a conic when focus directrix and eccentricity
are given. Properties of parabola, ellipse and hyperbola in standard forms.

UNIT-IV
Differential Calculus
15. Concept of Limit- Definition and Properties of Limits and Standard Limits - Simple Problems -
Continuity of a function at a point - Simple examples only.
16. Concept of derivative- Definition (first principle) - different notations - derivatives of elementary
functions. Derivatives of algebraic, logarithmic, trigonometric, inverse trigonometric and
hyperbolic functions. Derivatives of sum, product, quotient, scalar multiplication of functions -
problems. Chain rule, derivatives of parametric functions, derivatives of implicit functions,
logarithmic differentiation – problems in each case. Second order derivatives – examples.
Functions of several variables – First and second order partial differentiation - simple problems.

UNIT-V
Applications of Derivatives
17. Geometrical meaning of the derivative, equations of tangent and normal to a curve at any point
- problems.
18. Physical applications of derivatives – velocity, acceleration, derivative as a rate
measure – Problems.
19. Applications of the derivative to find the extreme values – Increasing and decreasing functions,
finding the maxima and minima for quadratic and cubic polynomials.
20. Using the concept of derivative of a function of single variable, find the absolute error, relative
and percentage errors and approximate values due to errors in measuring.
Textbook:
Engineering Mathematics-I, a textbook for first year diploma courses, prepared & prescribed by
SBTET, AP.

Reference Books:
1. Shanti Narayan, A Textbook of matrices, S.Chand & Co.
2. Robert E. Moyer & Frank Ayers Jr., Schaum’s Outline of Trigonometry, 4th Edition, Schaum’s
Series.
3. M.Vygodsky, Mathematical Handbook, Mir Publishers, Moscow.
4. Frank Ayers & Elliott Mendelson, Schaum’s Outline of Calculus, Schaum’s Series.
C-23 Engineering Mathematics – I

Unit Test Syllabus

Unit Test Syllabus
Unit Test-I From L.O. 1.1 to L.O. 2.9
Unit Test-II From L.O. 2.10 to L.O. 3.8
Unit Test-III From L.O.4.1 to L.O. 5.7

46
 C-23
ENGINEERING PHYSICS

Course code Course title No.of periods Total no. of Marks for FA Marks for SA
per week periods
Common -103 Engineering 03 90 20 80
Physics

TIME SCHEDULE

Short
Weightage Answer Essay type COs
No. of of Marks type
S.No Major topics mapped
Periods (10 marks)
(3 marks)

1. Units and measurements 09 03 1

CO1
2. Statics 11 13 1 1

3. Gravitation 12 20 1 2
1 1 CO2
4. Concepts of energy 10 13

5. Thermal physics 10 13 1 1
CO3
2 1
6. Sound 12 16

7. Electricity &Magnetism 13 16 2 1
2 1 CO4
8. Modern physics 13 16
10 8
Total: 90 110

Course title : Engineering Physics

(1) To understand the basic concepts of physics for various Engineering

applications as required for industries.
Course objectives
(2) To equip the students with the scientific advances in technology and
make the student suitable for any industrial or scientific organization.

47
 Familiarize with various physical quantities, their SI units and errors
CO1 in measurements; understand the concepts of vectors and various
forces in statics.

Understand the concepts of gravitation with reference to

CO2 applications in satellites, provides the knowledge of various forms
of energy and their working principles.

COURSE Familiarize with the knowledge of transmission of heat and gas

OUTCOMES CO3 laws; provides the knowledge on musical sound and noise as
pollution and also the concepts of echo and reverberation.

Provide basic knowledge of electricity and concepts of magnetism

CO4 and magnetic materials; familiarize with the advances in Physics
such as photoelectric ell, optical fibers, semiconductors,
superconductors and nanotechnology.

CO-PO Mapping Strength

Course Engineering Physics No of periods 90
code No of Course Objectives : 4
AMG -103
POs Mapped with CO No CO periods Level remarks
addressing PO in Col 1,2,3
1
NO %
PO1 CO1,CO2,CO3,CO4 44 48.9 % 3 >40% level 3
(highly addressed)
PO2 CO1,CO2, CO4 11 12.2% 1
25% to 40% level2
PO3 CO1, CO2,CO3, CO4 10 11.1% 1 (moderately addressed)

5% to 25% level1 (Low

PO4 CO1, CO2,CO4 8 8.9% 1
addressed)

PO5 CO2,CO3, CO4 8 8.9% 1 < 5%

PO6 (not addressed)
PO7 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4 9 10.0% 1

MATRIX SHOWING MAPPING OF COURSE OUT COMES WITH PROGRAMME OUTCOMES

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3

CO1 3 2 2 1 2 2 2
CO2 3 2 2 2 2 2 1 2

CO3 2 1 2 1 1 1
CO4 3 2 3 2 2 3 2 2

3 = strongly mapped 2 = moderately mapped 1 = slightly mapped

48
 Note: The gaps in CO and PO mapping will be achieved by one or more appropriate activities from the
following.

(i) Seminars (ii) Tutorials (iii) Guest Lecturers (iv) Assignments (v) Quiz competitions
(vi) Industrial visits (vii) Techfest (viii) Mini project (ix) Group discussions (x) Virtual classes
(xi) Library visit for e-books Learning outcomes

Upon completion of the course the student shall be able to

1.0 Understand the concept of units and measurements

1.1 Explain the concept of units
1.2 Define t h e t e r m s
a ) Physical quantity, b ) F u n d a m e n t a l physical quantities and
c ) D erived physical quantities
1.3 Define unit
1.4 Define fundamental units and derived units
1.5 State SI units with symbols
1.6 State Multiples and Submultiples in SI system
1.7 State rules of writing S.I units
1.8 State advantages of SI units
1.9 What are d i r e c t a n d i n d i r e c t m e a s u r e m e n t s .
1.10 Define accuracy and least count
1.11 Define error in measurement
1.12 Define absolute, relative and percentage errors with their formulae
1.13 Solve simple problems on absolute, relative and percentage errors
2.0 Understand the concepts of statics
2.1 Explain the concept of Vectors

49
2.2 Define scalar and vector quantities with examples
2.3 Represent vectors geometrically
2.4 Define the types of vectors (equal, negative, unit, co-initial, co-planar, position vector)
2.5 Resolve the vector into rectangular components
2.6 State and explain triangle law of addition of vectors
2.7 Define concurrent forces, co-planar forces and equilibrant.
2.8 State and explain Lami’s theorem
2.9 State the parallelogram law of addition of forces with diagram.
2.10 Write the expressions for magnitude and direction of resultant (no derivation)
2.11 Illustrate parallelogram law with examples (i) flying of bird and (ii) working of sling.
2.12 Define moment of force and couple.
2.13 Write the formulae and S.I units of moment of force and couple.
2.14 Solve simple problems on (i)Resolution of force and
(ii) Parallelogram law of forces (finding R,α and θ).
3.0 Understand the concepts of Gravitation
3.1 State and explain Newton’s universal law of gravitation.
3.2 Define G and mention its value.
3.3 Explain the acceleration due to gravity (g)
3.4 Explain the factors affecting the value of g
3.5 Derive the relationship between g and G.
3.6. State and explain the Kepler’s law of planetary motion
3.7 Define a satellite.
3.8 What are natural and artificial satellites? Give examples.
3.9 Define orbital velocity and write its formula.
3.10 Define escape velocity and write its formula.
3.11 Write a brief note on Polar satellites.
3.12 Write a brief note on Geo-stationary satellites.
3.13 Mention the applications of artificial satellites.
3.14 Solve simple problems on (i) Newton’s law of gravitation and (ii) calculation of orbital
and escape velocities.
4.0 Understand the concepts of Energy.
4.1 Define work done and energy. Mention their SI units.
4.2 List various types of energy.
4.3 Define P.E with examples. Write its equation.
4.4 Define K.E with examples. Write its equation.
4.5 Derive relationship between K.E and momentum.
4.6 State the law of conservation of energy. Give various examples.
4.7 Write a brief note on solar energy.
4.8 Explain the principle of solar thermal conversion.
4.9 Explain the principle of photo voltaic effect
4.10 Solve simple problems on (i) work done (ii) P.E & K.E and (iii) Relation between K.E &
momentum.
5.0 Understand the concepts of thermal physics
5.1 Define the concepts of heat and temperature
5.2 State different modes of transmission of heat
5.3 Define conduction, convection and radiation. Explain with two examples each.

50
5.4 State and explain Boyle’s law
5.5 Define absolute zero temperature
5.6 Explain absolute scale of temperature
5.7 State the relationship between Degree Celcius, Kelvin and Fahrenheit temperatures
5.8 State Charle’s law and write its equation
5.9 State Gay-Lussac’s law and write its equation
5.10 Define ideal gas
5.11 Derive i deal gas equation
5.12 Explain why universal gas constant (R) is same for all gases
5.13 Calculate the value of R for 1 gram mole of gas.
5.14 Solve simple problems on (i) Inter conversion of temperatures between °C, K and F
(ii) Gas laws and (iii) Ideal gas equation.
6.0 Understand the concepts of Sound
6.1 Define the term sound
6.2 Define longitudinal and transverse waves with one example each
6.3 Explain the factors which affect the velocity of sound in air
6.4 Distinguish between musical sound and noise
6.5 Explain noise pollution and state SI unit for intensity of sound
6.6 Explain s o u r ce s of noise pollution
6.7 Explain effects of noise pollution
6.8 Explain methods of minimizing noise pollution
6.9 Define Doppler effect.
6.10 List the Applications of Doppler effect
6.11 Define reverberation and reverberation time
6.12 Write Sabine’s formula and name the physical quantities in it.
6.13 Define echoes and explain the condition to hear an echo.
6.14 Mention the methods of reducing an echo
6.15 Mention the applications of an echo
6.16 What are ultra sonics
6.17 Mention the applications of ultra sonics, SONAR
6.18 Solve simple problems on echo
7.0 Understand the concepts of Electricity and Magnetism
7.1 Explain the concept of P.D and EMF
7.2 State Ohm’s law a n d w r i te t h e f o r m u l a
7.3 Explain Ohm’slaw
7.4 Define r e s i s ta n ce a n d specific resistance. Write their S.I units.
7.5 State and explain Kichoff’s first law.
7.6 State and explain Kirchoff’s second law.
7.7 Describe Wheatstone bridge with legible sketch.
7.8 Derive an expression for balancing condition of Wheatstone bridge.
7.9 Describe Meter Bridge experiment with necessary circuit diagram.
7.10 Write the formulae to find resistance and specific resistance in meter bridge
7.11 Explain the concept of magnetism
7.12 What are natural and artificial magnets (mention some types)
7.13 Define magnetic field and magnetic lines of force.
7.14 Write the properties of magnetic lines of force

51
7.15 State and explain the Coulomb’s inverse square law of magnetism
7.16 Define magnetic permeability
7.17 Define para, dia, ferro magnetic materials with examples
7.18 Solve simple problems on (i) Ohm’s law (ii) Kirchoff’s first law (iii) Wheatstone bridge (iv) meter
bridge and (v) Coulomb’s inverse square law
8.0 Understand the concepts of Modern physics
8.1 State and explain Photo-electric effect.
8.2 Write Einstein’s Photo electric equation and name the physical quantities in it.
8.3 State laws of photo electric effect
8.4 Explain the Working of photo electric cell
8.5 List the Applications of photoelectric effect
8.6 Recapitulate refraction of light and its laws
8.7 Define critical angle
8.8 Explain the Total Internal Reflection
8.9 Explain the principle and working of Optical Fiber
8.10 List the applications of Optical Fiber
8.11 Explain the energy gap based on band structure
8.12 Distinguish between conductors, semiconductors and insulators based on energy gap
8.13 Define doping
8.14 Explain the concept of hole
8.15 Explain the types of semiconductors : Intrinsic and extrinsic
8.16 Explain n-type and P-type semiconductors
8.17 Mention the applications of semiconductors
8.18 Define superconductor and superconductivity
8.19 List the applications of superconductors
8.20 Nanotechnology definition, n a non materials and applications

COURSECONTENT

1. Units and measurements

Introduction – Physical quantity – Fundamental and Derived quantities – Fundamental and
derived units - SI units – Multiples and Sub multiples – Rules for writing S.I. units-Advantages
of SI units – Direct and indirect measurements – Accuracy and least count – Errors : Absolute,
relative and percentage errors –Problems.

2. Statics
Scalars and Vectors– Representation of a vector - Types of vectors - Resolution of vector into
rectangular components – Triangle law of vectors – Concurrent forces - Lami’s theorem -
Parallelogram law of forces : Statement, equations for magnitude and direction of resultant,
examples – Moment of force and couple – Problems.

3. Gravitation
Newton’s law of gravitation and G – Concept of acceleration due to gravity (g) – Factors
affecting the value of g – Relation between g and G- Kepler’s laws – Satellites :
Natural and artificial – Orbital velocity and escape velocity – Polar and
geostationary satellites – Applications of artificial satellites – Problems.

52
4. Concepts of energy
Work done & Energy-Definition and types of energy - potential energy - kinetic energy-- K.E and
Momentum relation – Law of Conservation of energy, examples - Solar energy, principles of
thermal and photo conversion – Problems.

5. Thermal physics
Modes of transmission of heat – Expansion of Gases - Boyle’s law – Absolute scale of
temperature - Thermometric scales and their inter conversion - Charle’s law - Gay-Lussac’s law -
Ideal gas equation - Universal gas constant (R) - Problems.

6. Sound
Sound - Nature of sound - Types of wave motion, Longitudinal and transverse – Factors affecting
the velocity of sound in air - musical sound and noise - Noise pollution – Causes & effects -
Methods of reducing noise pollution - Doppler effect - Echo- Reverberation -Reverberation
time-Sabine ‘s formula – Ultra sonics & applications – SONAR - Problems.

7. Electricity & Magnetism

Concept of P.D and EMF - Ohm’s law and explanation-Specific resistance - Kirchoff’s
laws – Wheat stone’s bridge - Meter bridge.
Natural and artificial magnets – magnetic field and magnetic lines of force – Coulomb’s
inverse square law – Permeability – Magnetic materials – Para, dia, ferro – Examples –
Problems.

8. Modern Physics
Photoelectric effect – laws of photoelectric effect – photoelectric cell – Applications of
photoelectric cell - Total internal reflection - Fiber optics - Principle and working of an optical
fiber - Applications of optical fibers – Semiconductors : Based on Energy gap – Doping – Hole -
Intrinsic and extrinsic semiconductors (n-type & p-type) – Applications of semiconductors –
Superconductivity – applications – Nanotechnology definition, nano materials, applications.

REFERENCES
1. Intermediate physics - Volume - I & 2 Telugu Academy (English version)
2. Unified physics Volume 1, 2, 3 and 4 Dr. S.L Guptha and Sanjeev Guptha
3. Concepts of Physics, Vol 1 & 2 H.C. Verma
4. Text book of physics Volume I Resnick & Holiday
5. Fundamentals of physics Brijlal & Subramanyam
6. Text book of applied physics Dhanpath Roy
7. NCERT Text Books of physics Class XI & XII Standard
8. e-books/e-tools/websites/Learning Physics software
Table showing the scope of syllabus to be covered for unit tests
Unit test Learning outcomes to be covered

Unit test - 1 From 1.1 to 3.14

Unit test - 2 From 4.1 to 6.18

Unit test - 3 From 7.1 to 8.20

53
 Engineering Chemistry and Environmental Studies (C-23)
AMG -104
No. of
Total No. of
Course code Course Title Periods per Marks for FA Marks for SA
Periods
week
Engineering
Chemistry and
104 3 90 20 80
Environmental
Studies
TIME SCHEDULE

Weight Question wise distribution

Unit No of Mapped
S.No age of
Title/Chapter Periods with CO
marks

Essay Short

Fundamentals of
1 14 21 1½* 2 CO1
Chemistry

Solutions, Acids
2 16 21 1½* 2 CO1
and Bases

3 Electrochemistry 12 13 1 1 CO2

4 Corrosion 8 13 1 1 CO2

5 Water Treatment 8 13 1 1 CO3

Polymers &
6 Engineering 12 13 1 1 CO4
materials.

7 Fuels 6 3 0 1 CO4

Environmental
8 14 13 1 1 CO5
Studies

Total 90 110 8 10

*One question of 10 marks should be given with 50% weightage from unit title 1and 2

54
 Course Objectives

Course Title: Engineering Chemistry & Environmental Studies

1. To familiarize with the concepts of chemistry involved in the

process of various Engineering Industrial Applications.
2. To know the various natural and man-made environmental
issues and concerns with an interdisciplinary approach that
Course Objectives
include physical, chemical, biological and socio cultural aspects
of environment.
3. to reinforce theoretical concepts by conducting relevant
experiments/exercises

Course outcomes

Explain Bohr`s atomic model, chemical bonding, mole concept, acids

CO1
and bases, PH and Buffer solutions.
CO2 Explain electrolysis, Galvanic cell, batteries and corrosion
CO3 Explain the chemistry involved in the treatment of hardness in water.
Explain the methods of preparation and applications of Polymers and
Course
CO4 Elastomers, chemical composition and applications of Alloys, Composite
Outcomes
Materials, Liquid Crystals , Nano Materials and Fuels.
Explain Global impacts due to air pollution, causes , effects and
controlling methods of water pollution and understand the
CO5
environment, forest resources, e-Pollution and Green Chemistry
Principles.

Engineering Chemistry and Environmental

Course code
studies No. of periods : 90
AMG-104
No. of Course Objectives:5
eriods
addressi
evel
POs apped with CO No. ng PO in % remarks
1,2,3
Col. No.
1
O2,CO3,
PO1 42 46.7 % 3
CO4,CO5
PO2 O2 9 10.0% 1 addressed)
PO3 O3 8 8.9% 1 25% level1 (Low
PO4 10 11.1% 1 addressed)
PO5 O5 13 14.4% 1 not addressed)
PO6 - - -
PO7 8 8.9% 1

COs-POs mapping strength (as per given table)

55
 PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
CO1 3 2 1 1 - - - 1 1 -
CO2 3 2 2 3 - - - 1 1 -
CO3 3 - 2 1 - - - - - -
CO4 3 - 2 3 - - 2 - - -
CO5 3 1 1 - 3 - 3 1 - -

3=strongly mapped2= moderately mapped1= slightly mapped

Note: The gaps in CO and PO mapping will be achieved by one or more appropriate activities from
the following:
i) Seminars ii) Tutorials iii) Guest Lectures iv) Assignments v) Quiz competitions vi) Industrial visit vii)
Tech. Fest viii) Mini project ix) Group discussions x) Virtual classes xi) Library visit for e-books.

Upon completion of the course, the student shall be able to learn out

ENGINEERINGCHEMISTRY AND ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES

1.0 Atomic structure
1.1 Explain the charge, mass of fundamental particles of an atom (electron, proton and neutron)
and the concept of atomic number and mass number.
1.2 State the Postulates of Bohr’s atomic theory and its limitations.
1.3 Explain th e s i g n i fi ca n ce o f f o u r Quantum numbers and draw the atomic structures of
Silicon and Germanium. evel 3 (highly addressed)
1.4 Define Orbital of an atom and draw the shapes of s,p and d-orbitals. o 40% level2(moderately
1.5 Explain 1 . Aufbau principle, 2 . Pauli’s exclusionprinciple3. Hund’s principle.
1.6 Write the electronic configuration of elements up to atomic number 30.
1.7 Explain the significance of chemical bonding.
1.8 Explain the Postulates of Electronic theory of valency.
1.9 Define a n d e xpl ai n Ionic and Covalent bonds with examples of NaCl , *H 2,*O2 and *N2.(*
Lewis dot method).
1.10 List out the Properties of Ionic compounds and covalent compounds and distinguish between
their properties.
2.0 Solutions, Acids and Bases
2.1 Define the terms 1. Solution, 2.Soluteand 3.S olvent.
2.2 Classify solutions based on solubility.
2.3 Define mole and solve numerical problems on mole concept.
2.4 Define the terms 1. Atomic weight, 2.Molecular weight and 3. Equivalent weight .
Calculate Molecular weight and Equivalent weight of the given acids(HCl,H 2SO4,H3PO4),
Bases (NaOH, Ca(OH)2, Al(OH)3 ) and Salts (NaCl, Na2CO3, CaCO3).
2.5 Define molarity, normality and solve numerical problems on molarity and normality.

56
 a) Calculate the Molarity or Normality, if weight of solute and volume of solution are given.
b) Calculate the weight of solute, if Molarity or Normality with volume of solution are given.
c) Problems on dilution to convert high concentrated solutions to low concentrated solutions.
2.6 Explain Arrhenius theory f Acids and Bases and give its limitations.
2.7 Define ionic product of water, pH and solve numerical problem son pH (Strong Acids and Bases).
2.8 Define buffer solution and classify buffer solutions with examples. Give its applications.
3.0 Electrochemistry
3.1 Define the terms1. Conductor 2. Semiconductor 3.Insulator, 4.Electrolyte5.Non–electrolyte.
Give two examples each.
3.2 Distinguish between Metallic conduction and Electrolytic conduction.
3.3 Explain electrolysis by taking an example off used NaCl and list out the applications of
electrolysis.
3.4 Define Galvanic cell. Explain the construction and working of Galvanic cell.
3.5 Distinguish between electrolytic cell and galvanic cell.
3.6 Define battery and list the types of batteries with examples.
3.7 Explain the construction, working and applications of i) Dry cell (Leclanche cell), ii) Lead storage
battery, iii) Lithium-Ion battery and iv) Hydrogen-Oxygen fuel cell.
4.0 Corrosion
4.1 Define the term corrosion.
4.2 state the Factors influencing the rate of corrosion.
4.3 Describe the formation of (a)composition cell (b) stress cell (c)concentration cell during corrosion.

4.4 Define rusting of iron and explain the mechanism of rusting of iron.
4.5 Explain the methods of prevention of corrosion.
(a)Protective coatings (anodic and cathodic coatings).
(b) Cathodic pr o te cti on (Sacrificial anode process and Impressed–voltage process).
5. 0Water Treatment
5.1 Define soft water and hard water with respect to soap action.
5.2 Define and classify the hardness of water.
5.3 List out the salts that causing hardness of water(with Formulae).
5.4 State the disadvantages of using hard water in industries.
5.5 Define Degree of hardness and units of hardness (mg/L and ppm).
5.6 Solve numerical problems on hardness.
5.7 Explain the methods of softening of hard water by (i) Ion-exchange process and (ii) Reverse
Osmosis process.
6.0 Polymers& Engineering materials.
A) Polymers
6.1 Explain the concept of polymerization.
6.2 Describe the methods of polymerization(a)addition polymerization of ethylene
(b)condensation polymerization of Bakelite (Only flowchart).
6.3 Define plastic. Explain a method of preparation and uses of the following plastics:
1. PVC 2.Teflon3. Polystyrene 4. Nylon 6,6.

57
6.4 Define elastomers. Explain a method of preparation and applications of the following:
1. Buna- S 2. Neoprene.
B) Engineering Materials
6.5 Define an alloy. Write the composition and applications of the following:
1.Nichrome2. Duralumin 3.Stainless Steel.
6.6 Define Composite Materials and give any two examples. StateProperties and their applications.
6.7 Define Liquid Crystals and give any two examples. State Properties and their applications.
6.8 Define Nano Materials and give any two examples. State Properties and their applications.
7.0 Fuels
7.1 Define the term fuel.
7.2 Classify the fuels based on occurrence.
7.3 Write the composition and uses of the following:
1. LPG 2. CNG 3.Biogas 4.Power alcohol
7.4 Write the commercial production of Hydrogen as future fuel. Give its advantages and
disadvantages.
8.0 ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES
8.1 Explain the scope and importance of environmental studies.
8.2 Define environment. Explain the different segments of environment.
1.Lithosphere2.Hydrosphere3.Atmosphere4.Biosphere
8.3 Define the following terms:
1. Pollutant 2.Pollution 3.Contaminant 4. Receptor 5.Sink 6.Particulates 7.Dissolved oxygen
(DO)8.Threshold Limit Value (TLV) 9. BOD 10.COD 11.Eco system1 2 . Producers1 3 . C onsumers
14. Decomposers with examples.
8.4 State the renewable and non- renewable energy sources with examples.
8.5 State the uses of forest resources.
8.6 Explain the causes and effects of deforestation.
8.7 Define air pollution and explain its Global impacts 1.Greenhouseeffect, 2. Ozone layer
depletion and 3.Acidrain.
8.8 Define Water pollution. Explain the causes, effects and controlling methods of Water pollution.
8.9 Define e-Pollution, State the sources of e-waste. Explain its health effects and control
methods.
8.10 Define Green Chemistry. Write the Principles and benefits of Green Chemistry.

COURSE CONTENT

ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY AND ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES

1. Fundament also f Chemistry
Atomic Structure: Introduction - Fundamental particles – Bohr’s theory – Quantum numbers –
Atomic structure of Silicon and Germanium - Orbitals, shapes of s, p and d orbitals - Electronic
configuration of elements-Aufbau’s principle - Hund’s rule - Pauli’s exclusion Principle .
Chemical Bonding: significance–Electronic theory of valency- Types of chemical bonds – Ionic
and covalent bond with examples–Properties of Ionic and Covalent compounds.
2. Solutions, Acids and Bases
Solutions: Types of solutions - Mole concept – Numerical problems on mole concept -Methods
of expressing concentration of a solution – Molarity and Normality – Numerical problems on
molarity and normality.
Acids and Bases: Arrhenius theory of acids and bases – Ionic product of water- pH–Numerical
problems on pH–Buffer solutions – Classification- applications.

58
3. Electrochemistry
Conductors, semiconductors, insulators, electrolytes and non-electrolytes – Electrolysis of
fused NaCl–Applications of electrolysis - Galvanic cell – Battery-Types- Dry Cell (Leclanche
Cell),Lead- Storage battery- Lithium-Ion battery -Hydrogen-Oxygen Fuel cell.
4. Corrosion
Introduction - Factors influencing corrosion - Composition, Stress and Concentration Cells–
Rusting of iron and its mechanism – Prevention of corrosion by Protective Coating methods,
Catholic Protection methods.
5. Water treatments
Introduction– Soft and Hard water– Causes of hardness– Types of hardness– Dis advantages of
hard water – Degree of hardness (ppm and mg/lit) – Numerical problems on hardness -
Softening methods – Ion-Exchange process– Reverse Osmosis process.
6. Polymers & Engineering materials
Polymers:
Concept of polymerization – Types of polymerization – Addition, condensation with examples
– Plastics - Preparation and uses of i).PVC ii) Teflon iii) Polystyrene and iv) Nylon 6,6.
Elastomers: Preparation and application of i)Buna-s and ii) Neoprene.
Engineering Materials:
Alloys- Composition and applications of i) Nichrome, ii)Duralumin and iii) Stainless Steel.
Composite Materials- Properties and applications.
Liquid Crystals- Properties and applications.
Nano Materials- Properties and applications.
7. Fuels
Definition and classification of fuels – Composition and uses of i) LPG ii) CNG iii) Biogas
and iv) Power alcohol – Hydrogen as a future fuel-production- advantages and disadvantages.
8. ENVIRONMENTALSTUDIES
Scope and importance of environmental studies – Environment - Important terms related to
environment–Renewable and non-renewable energy sources–Forest resources – Deforestation –
Air pollution–Global impacts on environment –Water pollution – causes – effects – control
measures- e-Pollution –Sources of e-waste - Health effects - Control methods - Green Chemistry-
Principles -Benefits.
Table specifying the scope of syllabus to be covered for Unit Test- 1, Unit Test- 2 and Unit Test -3
Unit Test Learning outcomes to be covered
Unit Test - 1 From 1.1 to 2.8
Unit Test - 2 From 3.1 to 5.7
Unit Test - 3 From 6.1 to 8.10

REFERENCEBOOKS

1. Telugu Academy Intermediate chemistry Vol. 1&2

2. Jain & Jain Engineering Chemistry
3. O.P. Agarwal,Hi-Tech. Engineering Chemistry
4. D.K.Sharma Engineering Chemistry
5. A.K. De Engineering Chemistry

59
 Course Course Title No. of Total No. of Marks for Marks for
code Periods/Weeks periods FA SA
Basics Of
Computers with
AMG-105 3 90 20 80
Animation and
Graphics

TIME SCHEDULE

S.No CHAPTE Chapter/Uni No. of MARK SHORT ESSAY CO’s

. R t Title Period S QUESTION QUESTION Mapped
NO s S S
1. 1 Fundamental 15 2 1 CO1,CO3,CO
s of 16 4
Computers
2. 2 Programmin 10 16 2 1 CO2
g
Methodolog
y
3. 3 Operating 20 26 2 2 CO1,CO3
System
basics
4. 4 Computer 25 26 2 2 CO1,CO4,CO
Hardware 5
and
Networking
Basics
5. 5 Basics of 20 26 2 2 CO2,CO6
Graphics,
Multimedia
and
Animation
Total Periods 90 110 10 8

Course Objectives i)To know the fundamentals of Computers

ii)To familiarize programming methodologies like algorithms and
flowcharts
iii)To understand Operating system basics
iv)To familiarize basics of animation and multimedia

At the end of the course the student able to learn following:

CO1 AG-105.1 Explain computer fundamentals
Course CO2 AG-105.2 Explain various flowchart, algorithm methods
Outcomes CO3 AG-105.3 Explain the importance of Basic Computer operating
systems

60
 CO4 AG-105.4 Analyse functioning of various Hardware components
CO5 AG-105.5 Explain Networking process in computers
CO6 AG-105.6 Explain basics of Computer Graphics and Animation
concepts with examples.
CO-PO/PSO Matrix:

CO NO. PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
AMG-105.1 3 3 1 1
AMG-105.2 1 2 2 1 3 1 3 1
AMG-105.3 3 1 1 1 1 3 1 1
AMG-105.4 3 2 2 1 1 2 1 2
AMG-105.5 3 2 1 1 1 2 1 2
AMG-105.6 3 1 2 2 2 2 1
Average 2.7 1.5 2 1.25 1.3 1.7 1.25 2.2 1.3 1.3

3=Strongly mapped , 2=moderately mapped, 1=slightly mapped

Learning Outcomes:

1.0 Fundamentals of Digital Computer

1.1. Define various terms related to computers – Computer, Hardware , Software, Firmware, High
Level Language , Low Level Language
1.2. Draw and explain block diagram of a Computer in detail
1.3. Describe the current family of CPUs used in Computers.
1.4. State the use of storage devices used in a Computer.
1.5. List the two types of memory used in a Computer.
1.6. State the importance of cache memory.
1.7. Explain the generations of computers.
1.8. Classification of computers - based on a) size, b) processor.
1.9. State the importance of binary number system for use in Digital Computers

2.0 Implement Programming Methodology.

2.1. State the different steps involved in problem solving.
2.2. Define algorithm.
2.3. List four characteristics of algorithm.
2.4. Define a program
2.5. Differentiate between program and algorithm.
2.6. State the steps involved in algorithm development.
2.7. Differentiate between algorithm and flowchart.
2.8. Develop algorithms for simple problems.
2.9. Draw the symbols used in flowcharts.
2.10. Draw flowcharts for simple problems.
3.0 Operating Systems basics
3.1. Describe the need for an operating system.
3.2. List the various operating systems used presently.
3.3. List and explain
3.3.1.Types of dos commands
3.3.2.Any 10 Internal Commands
3.3.3.Any 5 External Commands
3.3.4.Features of Windows desktop.
3.3.5.Components of a Window.

61
 3.4. State the function of each component of a Window.
3.5. Describe the Method of starting a program using start button
3.6. Explain usage of maximize, minimize, restore down and close buttons.
3.7. State the meaning of a file ,folder.
3.8. Describe the Method of viewing the contents of hard disk drive using Explorer
3.9. Describe the Method of finding a file using search option.
3.10. Use control panel for
3.10.1. installing and uninstalling software
3.10.2. installing and uninstalling hardware
3.10.3. Changing the system date and time
3.10.4. Installing a printer
3.11. Explain Drive space using system tool option of Accessories group
3.12. Explain Disk defragmentation using System tools
3.13. Explain the procedure for changing resolution, color, appearance, screensaver options of
the display
4.0 Computer Hardware and Networking Basics
4.1 Hardware Basics
4.1.1 Identify hardware used for I/P, O/P & inside computer case, system board
components used for communication among devices
4.1.2 Software - 3 types of Software:ROM BIOS, OS, application software
4.1.3 Explain Functions of BIOS
4.1.4 Explain boot process
4.1.5 Explain POST and important beep codes
4.1.6 Describe about different connectors.

4.2 Networking Basics

4.1.1.Explain meaning of a computer network.
4.1.2.Describe the concept of a Local Area Network,Wide Area Network
4.1.3.Compare Internet and Intranet
4.1.4.Describe about internet service provider.
4.1.5.Explain the role of a modem in accessing the Internet.
4.1.6.Describe address format and IP address
4.1.7.What is browser and List various browsers
4.1.8.Explain the role of search engines with examples.
4.1.9.Explain Internet Security.

5.0 Basics of Graphics , Multimedia and Animation

5.1. Computer Graphics and Multimedia.
5.1.1. What is Multimedia?
5.1.2. List the components of Multimedia.
5.1.4. State the Need of Computer Graphics.
5.1.5. Know the meaning of the Graphics and Multimedia terms – pixel, resolution, 2D, 3D,
View, Animation, Coordinates, Modelling, texturing, rigging, rendering, compositing,
editing. 3D dynamics.
5.1.6. Define Transformation and list 3 basic types of transformations.
5.1.7. Define Translation, rotation and scaling.
5.1.8. List various Computer Graphics Software tools and state their features.
5.1.9.List various applications of Computer Graphics.

62
 5.2. Animation
5.2.1. Define animation
5.2.2. Define Computer animation.
5.2.3. Discuss about History of animation.
5.2.4. List and explain types of animations.
5.2.5. List and explain various terminologies used in animation.
5.2.6. List and explain various Animation Techniques/Methods.
5.2.7. List and explain principles of animation with examples.
5.2.8. List various software used for Computer animation
5.2.9. State the minimum hardware specifications required for computer animation.
5.2.10. List basic tools required for computer animation.
5.2.11. Explain applications of Computer Animation.
5.2.12. Explain the Animation process and illustrate with an example like creation of
animated video etc.

COURSE CONTENT

1.0 Fundamentals of Digital Computer

Block diagram of a digital computer, functional parameters of CPU, Clock speed and word length,
Functional blocks of a CPU: ALU and Control unit, types of memory RAM, ROM, purpose of cache
memory

2.0 Programming Methodology.

Steps involved in problem solving - Define algorithm , Program - Characteristics of algorithm
- Differentiate between program and algorithm- Steps involved in algorithm development -
Differentiate algorithm and flowchart - Algorithms for simple problems - Symbols used in flowcharts
-Flowcharts for simple problems.

63
3.0 Understand Operating Systems
Need for an operating system - List the various operating systems - Types of commands, Internal
& External Commands Features of Windows desktop - Components of a Window - Function of each
component of a Window - Method of starting a program using start button -Maximize, minimize,
restore down and close buttons- Meaning of a file and flolder -Viewing the contents of hard disk drive
using explorer -Finding a file - Formatting a floppy disk using explore option - Installing and
uninstalling new software using control panel - installing and un inistalling a new hardware using
control panel - Drive space - disk defragmentation - Installing a printer - Changing resolution, colour,
appearance and screensaver options of the display - Changing the system date and time

4.0 Computer Hardware and Networking Basics

Hardware Basics- I/P, O/P - inside computer case- system board components - 3 types of Software
- BIOS- boot process - POST - different connectors. Networking Basics - computer network - Local Area
Network - Wide Area Network - Compare Internet and Intranet - internet service provider - role of a
modem - address format and IP address - browser - search engines with examples -Describe Internet
Security.

5.0 Basics of Graphics,Multimedia and Animation.

Computer Graphics and Multimedia - What is Multimedia? - The components of Multimedia.- the
Need of Computer Graphics -Know the meaning of the Graphics and Multimedia terms – pixel,
resolution, 2D, 3D, View, Animation, Coordinates, Modelling, texturing, rigging, rendering,
compositing, editing. 3D dynamics.
various Computer Graphics Software tools and state their features- various applications of
Computer graphics
Animation- Definition, Computer Animation, History of animation, Types of animations, Animation
terminology, Principles of animation, Software available for computer animation, Hardware
requirements for Computer animation, Basic Tools for Computer animation, applications of
computer animations, illustrate the process of creating animated video.

REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Information Technology - Curtin.
2. Computer Science Theory & Application - E. Balaguruswamy, B. Sushila
3. Introduction to Computers (Special Indian Edition) - Peter Norton
4. Fundamentals of Multimedia.-Ze – Nian li and Mark S Drew, Pearson Education,2004
5. Multimedia Basics. - Morse, Thomson Course Technology.

Table specifying the scope of syllabus to be covered for unit tests

Unit Test Learning outcomes to be covered

Unit test-1 From 1.1 to 3.3
Unit test-2 From 3.4 to 4.1
Unit test-3 From 4.2 to 5.11

64
 No. of Total No.
Marks for Marks for
Course code Course Title Periods/ of
FA SA
Weeks periods
AMG-106 C and Graphics 4 120 20 80
Programming.

TIME SCHEDULE

S.N CHAPT Chapter/ No. of MARK SHORT ESSAY CO’s Mapped

o. ER Unit Title Perio S QUESTIO QUESTIO
NO ds NS NS
1. 1 Introductio 15 2 1 CO1,CO2
n to C 16
Language
2. 2 Input and 25 16 2 1 CO1,CO2,CO3
output
statements
, Operators
and
Expression
s in C.
3. 3 Decision 25 26 2 2 CO1,CO2,CO3
making,
iterative
and other
control
statements
4. 4 Arrays and 25 26 2 2 CO1,CO2,CO3
strings,
Structures
and Unions
5. 5 User 30 26 2 2 CO1,CO2,CO3,CO4,
defined CO5
functions
and
Graphics
Programmi
ng
Total 120 110 10 8
Periods

65
 x To Relate basics of programming language constructs using C Language
x To classify and implement data types, derived data types, pointers, files, statements
Course x To analyse and develop effective modular programming
Objectives x To construct mathematical, logical and scientific problems and real time applications
using C language
x To develop simple programs with graphical elements and animation.

CO. NO COURSE OUTCOMES

CO1 AMG-106.1 Develop, compile and debug programs using C- fundamentals and different
programming statements in C language.
CO2 AMG-106.2 Evaluate various operations using primary and derived data type sin C.
CO3 AMG-106.3 Analyse programs using pre defined functions, modules and recursive
Techniques
CO4 AMG-106.4 Write scientific and logical programs using pointers, file pointers
CO5 AMG-106.5 Develop programs using information passing and graphics functions

CO-PO/PSOMATRIX

CONO. PO PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
1
AMG-106.1 3 2 2 3 2
AMG-106.2 2 3 3
AMG-106.3 2 3 3 3 1 2
AMG-106.4 3 1 1 2 3 2 2
AMG-106.5 2 2 2 2 3 2 3
Average 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 2 2.3
3=Strongly mapped , 2=moderately mapped, 1=slightly mapped

Learning Outcomes

1.0 Introduction to C-Language

1.1 Describe the history of C-language, structure of C-language program
1.2 Describe the programming style of C language
1.3 Explain the steps involved in Editing, compiling, executing and debugging of C program
1.4 Describe character set, C-Tokens, Keywords, Identifiers, Constants, Variables
1.5 Define Data Type
1.6 Classify Data Types and explain them with examples.
1.7 Explain declaration of constants and variables
1.8 Explain initializing values to variables in declaration
1.9 Explain about user defined data types with a simple program
1.10 Explain the usage of type qualifiers
2.0 Input and output statements, Operators and Expressions in C
2.1 Explain the importance of Pre-processor Directive # include
2.2 Illustrate1) Reading a character using getch (),getche ()and getchar()

66
2) Writing a character using putch(),put char()
3) Formatted input using scanf()&write sample programs using it.
4) Formatted output using printf()&write sample programs using it.
2.3 Explain character functions
2.4 Define an operator, an expression
2.5 Explain 1) Various arithmetic operators and explain the evaluation of arithmetic expressions
with example.
2) Various relational operators and discuss evaluation of relational expressions
3) Various logical operators and discuss evaluation of logical expressions
2.6 Explain the difference between unary and binary operators
2.7 Describe various assignment operators, increment and decrement operators
2.8 Illustrate nested assignment
2.9 Explain conditional operators with an example
2.10 Explain 1) Bit-wise operators and explain each with an example
2) Special operators with examples
3) Precedence and Associativity of operators
2.11 Describe evaluation of compound expression
2.12 Illustrate type conversion techniques
2.13Writesample programs by using all the operators
3.0 Decision making, iterative and other control statements
3.1 Explain decision making statements and its need in programming
3.2 Explain
1. Simple if and if-else statement with syntax and sample program
2. Nested if. Else statements with syntax and sample program
3. if-else-if ladder with syntax and sample program
4. switch statement with syntax and sample program
3.3 State the importance of break statement with switch and illustrate
3.4 Compare
5. Conditional operator with if-else statement
6. if-else with switch statement
3.5 Define looping or iteration
3.6 List and explain iterative statements with syntax and examples
3.7 Compare different loop statements
3.8 What is nested loop and illustrate.
3.9 Explain the usage of go to, break and continue statements with loop statements
3.10 Differentiate break and continue statements.
3.11 Define structured programming.
4.0 Arrays, strings, Structures and Unions
4.1 Define Array
4.2 Describe
1. Declaration and initialization of One Dimensional(1D) Array with syntax and sample
programs.
2. Accessing the elementsin1D-Arraywithsampleprograms.
3. Re ordering an array in ascending order.
4.3 Explain declaration and initialization and usage of two Dimensional (2D) Arrays.
4.4 Illustrate the concept of arrays with sample programs on matrix addition, subtraction and
matrix multiplication
4.5 Define String
4.6 Describe
4. Declare and initialize of String variables.
5. gets()and puts()
6. Reading and is playing of strings from terminal with sample programs.
7. Explain about various String handling functions with sample programs.

67
4.7 Explain Character arithmetic.
4.8 Define a structure.
4.9 Explain
8. Initializingstructure,Declaringstructure,DeclaringStructureVariables.
9. Accessing of the structure members
10. Structure assignment.
11. How to find size of a structure.
12. Nested structure concept.
13. Structures containing arrays
14. Array of structures
4.10 Define Union, declare, initialize and use of union.
4.11 Distinguish between Structures and Unions
4.12 Write sample programs for all the concepts of structures and unions
5.0 User defined functions, Graphics programming in C
5.1 Explain
1. Need of user defined functions
2. Advantages of the functions
3. Elements of function
4. Return values and their types
5.2 Define a function call, function prototype
5.3 Explain
5. Function declaration in programs
6. Functions with no arguments and no return values with sample programs
7. Functions with arguments with no return values with sample programs
8. Functions with arguments with return values with sample programs
9. Functions with no arguments with return values with sample programs
10. Functions that return multiple values with sample programs
11. Recursion with sample programs
12. Passing arrays to functions with sample programs
13. Structure as function arguments and structures as function values.
14. Structures containing pointers.
15. Self-referential structures with examples.
16. Storage classes-auto, register, static, extern
17. Scope, visibility and lifetime of variables in functions
5.4 Differentiate Local and External variables
5.5 Define Global variable
5.6 Discuss passing the global variables as parameters using sample programs
5.7 Graphics Programming.
18. State the importance of graphics. h
19. Know the coordinate system used in C.
20. Know the color codes used in C
21. Know the syntax of in it graph() function and the meaning and usage of its parameters.
22. Explain close graph()function.
23. Importance of Set color () function in C.
24. Explain and use various Shape functions like line, line to, rectangle, circle, ellipse, fill
ellipse(), fill poly(), flood fill()setline style(), set fill style(),bar(),bar3d(),pie slice(),arc()
25. Explain and use various Text functions: out ext, out text xy, te t height, text width, set text
style
26. Explain Cursor functions: move to(),go toxy(),get maxx(),get maxy()
27. Know the usage of delay function().
28. Know the working of function clear device().
29. Know the importance of kbh it() function.
30. Develop simple programs to display text and various shapes.
31. Develop simple animation programs with text and shapes.
68
COURSECONTENT

1. IntroductiontoCLanguage:HistoryofClanguage-importanceofCDefinelanguage-structure of C
language - programming style of C language - steps involved in executing the C program-
Character set - C Tokens - Keywords and Identifiers- Constants and Variables -
DataTypesandclassification-declarationofconstantsandvariables-initializingvaluesto variables-
user defined data types-usage of type qualifiers.
2. Input and output statements, Operators and Expressions in C:importance of Pre-processor
#include-reading and writing a single character functions-formatted input and output
statements-operators-classification of operators- operator precedence and associativity-
expressions and expression evaluation-type conversion techniques.
3. Understand Decision making, iterative and other control statements: simple if, if-else, if else
ladder, nested if-else-switch statement- else if, nested if , else if ladder, switch statements-
Classification of various loop statements- while statement – do.. while statement ram -
forloopstatement-nestingofloops-Comparisonsofdifferentloopstatements–gotostatement-
break and continue statements–concept of structured programming
4. Understand Arrays and strings , basics of Structures and Unions: Arrays -One Dimensional
Arrays – array programs -two Dimensional Arrays- programs on matrix - Strings –- String handling
functions - Structure- Array of structures - Nested structures- pointer to
structureSelfreferentialstructures-Unionandillustrateuseofaunion–
differencebetweenStructuresandUnion
5. Understand User defined functions and Graphics Programming: Function – user defined
functions – Advantages - Recursion concept - parameter passing –storage classes - scope,
visibility and life time of variables in functions- Local and External variables-Global variable.
GraphicsProgramming:Graphics.h-co-ordinatesystem-colorcodes-Initgraph-closegraph-
graphic functions to draw various shapes-text handling functions -delay-clear device—
kbhit()function – animation

REFERENCEBOOKS

1 Programming in ANSICE. Balaguruswamy Tata McGrawHill

2 Programming with C Gottfried Tata McGraw Hill
3 C The complete Reference Schildt Tata McGrawHill
4 Computer Graphics, C Version(2ndEdition),DonaldHearn, M.PaulineBaker -Prentice Hall
5 Computer Graphics: A Programming Approach, Steven Harrington,McGraw-Hill

Table specifying the scope of syllabus to be covered for unit tests

Unit Test Learning out comes to be

covered
Unittest-1 From1.1to2.13
Unittest-2 From3.1to4.6
Unittest-3 From4.7 to5.7.14

69
 FUNDAMENTALS OF ART AND DRAWING

Subject Title Subject Code Periods/Week Periods Per Year

Fundamentals of Art and AMG-107 06 180

Drawing

TIME SCHEDULE

Marks to Short
No. Of Essay type
S.No Major Topics be Answer
Periods Questions
awarded Questions
1 Importance of Art and Drawing 06 - - -

2 Art and Drawing Instruments 18 - - -

And Study of Colours
3 Basic Elements And Principles In 30 15 1 1
Picture Composition

4 Perspective Drawing 27 15 1 1
5 Human Anatomy 27 15 1 1
6 Animal Anatomy 27 15 1 1
7 Cartoon Characters 21 10 1
8 Classical Animated Cartoons 24 10 1
Total 180 80 04 06

Course Objectives and Course Outcomes:

Upon completion of the course the student shall able to understand

Course Objectives
the basic Art and Drawing skills and use them in preparation of
Animation drawings, their reading and interpretation.

CO1 AMG-107.1 Practice the use of Art and Drawing instruments, materials
and tools
Familiarise with the usage of various surfaces, paints,
CO2 AMG-107.2
brushes, inks, notations, colors of Art and Drawing.
Course Construct the i) basic elements and geometrical shapes and
CO3 AMG -107.3
forms ii) Compositional techniques
Outcomes
CO4 AMG -107.4 Visualise and draw the Perspective

CO5 AMG -107.5 Visualise and draw the Human and Animal Anatomy

Draw the development of cartoon characters and Cartoon

CO6 AMG -107.6
animations

70
 PO-CO Mapping

Course Course Title: ENGINEERING DRAWING No. of Periods:

Code : Number of Course Outcomes: 06 180
AMG-107
POs Mapped with CO CO Periods Level Remarks
No. addressing PO (1,2,3)
in Column 1
No %
CO2, CO3, CO4,
PO1 50 42 3
CO5, CO6 >40% Level 3
CO1, CO2, CO3, Highly
PO2 30 25 2 addressed25% to
CO4, CO5, CO6
CO1, CO2, CO3, 2 40% Level 2
PO3 30 25 Moderately
CO4, CO5, CO6
Addressed5 to
PO4
25% Level 1
PO5 Low addressed
PO6 <5% Not
PO7 CO1, CO2, CO3, 10 08 1 addressed
CO4, CO5, CO6

AMG-107 PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
CO1 3 2 2 2 2 2 1
CO2 3 2 2 2 2 2 2
CO3 3 2 2 1 2 3 1
CO4 3 2 2 1 2 3 1
CO5 3 2 2 1 2 3 1
CO6 3 2 2 1 2 3 1
Average 3 2 2 1 2 2.6 1
3: High, 2: Moderate,1: Low

LEARNING OUTCOMES
Upon completion of the course the student shall able to

1. Importance of Art and Drawing

1.1. Know the Brief History Of Art and Drawing.
1.2. Know the importance of Caveman Classical art.
1.3. Know the importance of Renaissance Art.
1.4. Know the importance of Modern Art.
1.5. Understand linkage between Caveman Classical art, Renaissance art and Modern Art with
Animation.
2. Art and Drawing Instruments :
2.1. Know various types of Dry Media materials and tools with examples.

71
2.2. Know Why and when to choose Dry Media materials and tools.
2.3. Know various types of Wet Media materials and tools with examples.
2.4. Know Why and when to choose Wet Media materials and tools.
2.5. Know the significance of Markers and Brushes.
2.6. Understand different types of Markers and Brushes.
2.7. Know the importance of Different Inks and their usage.
2.8. Know the importance of Different Paints and their usage.
2.9. Know different types of Drawing Paper Surfaces.
2.10. Know How to handle Different Drawing Paper Surfaces.
2.11. Know Non-paper Drawing Surfaces like Scrach boards.
2.12. List the tools for erasing and Sharpening like palettes, knives and Easels.
2.13. Study about colour wheel.
2.14. Know about Colour Hormony.
2.15. Write about color theory principles.
2.16. Know about Primary and Secondary Colors.
2.17. Know about Complementary Colors.
2.18. Know about Warm or Cool colors.
2.19. Know the value of Colors.
2.20. Know the Usage of various brushes.
2.21. Know the usage of Various Colors of Light and Shade.
2.22. Understand and Practice the Process of Painting.
3. Basic Elements And Principles In Picture Composition:
3.1. Practice Drawing Lines with different sizes, colors, brushes and paints.
3.2. Practice Drawing Circles with different sizes, colors, brushes and paints.
3.3. Practice Drawing Ovals with different sizes, colors, brushes and paints.
3.4. Practice Drawing Scribbles with different sizes, colors, brushes and paints.
3.5. Practice Drawing Patterns with different sizes, colors, brushes and paints.
3.6 Practice various drawings observing the surroundings like window, fan, chair etc..
3.7. Draw Doodling and Noodling Images or Pictures.
3.8. Practice drawing Straight lines.
3.9. Practice Freehand drawing to surrounding images near you.
3.10. Practice Holding the pencil .
3.11. Draw lines with different angles.
3.12. Practice drawing various shapes like rectangle, square, polygon, etc.. in different forms.
3.13. Practice Drawing with Grids.
3.14. Study of light and shade in pencil of still life object
3.15. Study and Understand Rule of Thirds, Rule of Odds and Rule of Space and Simplification
Compositional Techniques.
3.16. Drawing still life objects in outline by pen and pencil by applying Compositional Techniques.
3.17. Draw still life objects in pen and ink to trace the light and shade by applying Compositional
Techniques.
3.18. Construct a scene for a background of animation/film/graphic novel etc and preparing a sketch
according to a conception with suitable Compositional Techniques.

72
3.19. Drawing in details different objects and attributes of the scene in pencil and with light and
shade and with suitable Compositional Techniques
3.20. Creating a panorama view of a composition in details with perspectives and proper light and
shade , texture, contrast and with suitable Compositional Techniques
4. Perspective Drawing :
4.1. Practice one point perspective drawings.
4.2. Practice two point perspective drawings.
4.3. Learn and Practice three point perspective drawings.
4.4. Practice Multi Point Perspective Drawings.
4.5. Practice drawing with overlapping and intersection of Objects and Shapes in one point
Perspective
4.6. Practice drawing with overlapping and intersection of Objects and Shapes in two point
Perspective
4.7. Practice drawing with overlapping and intersection of Objects and Shapes in three point
Perspective
4.8. Practice drawing with overlapping and intersection of Objects and Shapes in Multi point
Perspective
4.9. Drawing outdoor scenes showing one point perspective
4.10. Drawing outdoor scenes showing two point perspective
4.11. Drawing outdoor scenes showing three point perspective
4.12. Drawing indoor/architectural scenes showing one point perspective
4.13. Drawing indoor/architectural scenes showing two point perspective
4.14. Drawing indoor/architectural scenes showing three point perspective
4.15. Drawing a complete scene as a background for an animation/film scene/graphic novel etc.
having different perspective views and light and shade
4.16. Drawing any object in 3d style of drawing by following the light and shade
4.17. Drawing any object in 3d style of drawing by following the geometric planes.
5. Human Anatomy:
5.1. Understand the basic proportions of Human anatomy like age, gender,Skeletal, Muscle
systems, Body structure, face , eyes, ears , nose, hair , etc..
5.2. Drawing the male figure with proper proportion (like baby, teen, adult)
5.3. Drawing the female figure with proper proportion (like baby, teen, adult)
5.4. Drawing the male face with proper proportion (like baby, teen, adult)
5.5. Drawing the female face with proper proportion (like baby, teen, adult)
5.6. Drawing the hands and legs with proper proportion (like baby, teen, adult)
5.7. Drawing male figure with clothes understanding the folds in basic postures
5.8. Drawing female figure with clothes understanding the folds in basic postures
5.9. Drawing the human figure as stick figure in different postures and gestures
5.10. Tracing the movement of the stick figure from sports and fashion magazine postures
5.11. Drawing the stick figure tracing the movements from life study in outdoor.
6. Animal Anatomy.
6.1. Understand the animal anatomy like body structure, parts, Motion, Grace, Legs, Tails of
different animals, Birds, Reptiles, Insects etc..
6.2. Drawing simple animal figures (dogs, cat, horse, elephants etc) in proper proportion
6.3. Drawing simple Birds figures (Parrots, Peacock, Swan, Duck, Eagle, Hen, Cock etc) in proper
proportion
6.4. Drawing simple Reptiles figures ( Snakes, Frogs, Crocodile, Tortoise, Squirrel etc..) Eagle, Hen
etc) in proper proportion

73
6.5. Drawing simple Insects figures ( Butterfly, Bees, Scorpion , Grasshopper etc) in proper
proportion
6.6. Draw parts of Animals like legs, teeth, face, tails, Horns with proper proportions.
6.7. Draw parts of Birds like Wings of Peacock, Swan Neck and Head and Face of Cock, eggs,
teeth, face, tails, Horns with proper proportions.
6.8. Draw parts of Reptiles like head, Half body, Tail etc with proper proportions.
7. Cartoon Characters:
7.1. Study of different types of cartoon character
7.2. Practice Constructing Basic Cartoons .
7.3. Practice Character Development from cartoons.
7.4. Practice developing cartoons from basic shapes. ( From Ellipse, Cross, Parallelogram,
Heptagon, Octagon, Heart, Arrow, Polygon etcc..As shown below)

7.5. Practice Distortions of Proportions ( Widening, lengthening, Shrinking, bending various parts
of a body like Faces, Eyes, Mouths, Hairs, Nose, Hands, Feet - Facial Expressions)
8. Classic Animated Cartoons
8.1. Discuss various types of characters.
8.2. Creating cartoon character in reference to existing cartoon character and changing them to
create characters of owns idea.
8.3. Creating a group of character for a given story or sequence
8.4. Create different types of Animated cartoons characters like Cute, Screwball, Goffy etc.
8.5. Create different types of Animated Human cartoons characters for a given story or a
sequence.
8.6. Create different types of Animated Animal cartoons characters for a given story or sequence
8.7. Create different types of Animated Birds cartoons characters for a given story or sequence
8.8. Create different types of Animated Reptile cartoons characters for a given story or sequence
8.9. Create different types of animated cartoons consisting of Elves.
8.10. Create different types of animated cartoons consisting Fairy tale characters (Gnomes. Elves,
Dwarfs, Witches)

74
COURSE CONTENTS:
Note: Appropriate Drawing Surfaces are to be chosen based on the topic with appropriate Tools,
materials, paints, brushes, ink etc.

1.Importance of Art and Drawing :A Brief History Of Art and Drawing: – importance of Cavemen,
Classical Art, Renaissance, Modern Art Etc.

2.Art and Drawing Instruments : Drawing Materials And Tools - Dry Media – (Pencils, Charcoals,
Chalks, Crayons – Pastels, Erasers, Smudging Tools) - Wet Media – (Dip Pens, Disposable And
Cartridge Pens) – Markers – Brushes – Inks (Water Based, Alcohol Based, Indian/Chinese Ink) –
Paints (Water Based, Acrylic, Oil)

Drawing Surfaces – (Papers – Newsprint – Vellum - Bristol Board - Rag/Cotton Paper - Watercolor
Paper - Charcoal Paper - Colored Paper - Rice Paper – How To Handle These Papers) - Other Drawing
Surfaces – (Scratchboards) - Tools For Erasing And Sharpening – Palettes – Knives- Easels .

Study of Colors: The Color Wheel – Primary Colors – Secondary colors- Complementary colors-Warm
or cool colors – Value of Colors- Usages of Brushes, Colors of light and shade – process of painting.

3. Basic Elements And Principles In Picture Composition: Drawing Lines, Circles, Ovals, Scribbles,
Patterns Etc. - Drawing From Observation, Doodling And Noodling – Drawing Straight Lines –Free
Hand Drawing – Holding The Pencil – Angle And Direction Of Lines - Shapes And Forms – Drawing
With Grids - Compositional Techniques - Rule Of Thirds - Rule Of Odds - Rule Of Space –
Simplification.

4. Perspective Drawing : Vanishing Points – Orthogonal Lines – Horizon –Eye Level – One Point
Perspective – Two Point Perspective - Three Point Perspective – Multi- Point Perspective -
Overlapping And Intersection Of Shapes In One Point, Two Point And Three Point Perspective Views -
Objects And Shapes In Perspective With Light And Shade –Foreshortening –– Basic 3D dimensional
light set up- 3d shades – 3D planes

5.Human Anatomy: Anatomy Of Different Age Groups – Babies, Children, Teens, Young Adults, Aged
- Basic Proportions – Basic Understanding Of The Skeletal And Muscle System – Human Forms In
Perspective.

Male And Female Anatomy - Body Structure, Proportion And Construction Of Body Parts, Torso,
Face, Eyes, Nose, Ears, Mouth, Hand, Feet , clothes, ornaments Etc.

6.Animal Anatomy: Body Structure, Proportion And Construction Of Body Parts, Basic Forms,
Understanding Motion And Grace, Face, Legs, Tails - Use Of Perspectives While Drawing Animals,
Birds, Reptiles And Insects.

7. Cartoon Characters: -Understanding Cartoon Characters - Cartoon Constructions – Character

Development - Drawing From Basic Shapes - Distortion Of Proportions - Cartoon Faces, Eyes,
Mouths, Hairs, Nose, Hands, Feet - Facial Expressions

75
8. Classic Animated Cartoons: Discuss various types of Characters – Cute – Screwball – Goofy –
Heavy, Pugnacious – Humans, Animals, Birds, Reptiles Characters – Fairy Tale Characters – Gnomes –
Elves – Dwarfs –Witches

REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Social History Of Art : ArnoldHauser

2. Encyclopaedia Of World Art (Vol.I&II): Mcgraw HillPublication
3. The Art Of Pictorial Composition :Wolehonok
4. Exploring The Elements Of Design : Mark A. Thomas, PoppyEvans
5. The Art Of Composition : MichaelJacobs
6. Complete Books Of Artist Techniques : Dr. KurtHerbers
7. Drawing For The Absolute And Utter Beginner: Claire WatsonGarcia
8. Perspective Made Easy: Ernest RNorling
9. Perspective Drawing Handbook: JosephD'Amelio
10. Layout And Composition For Animation: EdGhertner
11. Animation Background Layout: Mike S Flower
12. Drawing For Animation: PaulWells
13. How To Draw What You See: Rudy DeReyna
14. “Figure study made easy”, Aditya Chari, 2nd edition, Grace Prakashan, 2014
15. “Cartooning: the ultimate character design book” Chris Hart, 6th edition, 2014
16. The Fundamentals of Animation. Wells, P. AVA Publishing, 2012

76
 REQUIREMENTS OF FUNDAMENTALS OF ART AND DRAWING LAB
EQUIPMENTS

SLNO EQUIPMENTS
.

1. Drawing Stands With Boards

2. Drawing sheets (A3)

3. Drawing Mannequin

4. Drawing Tool Kit( Paints, Inks , Brushes ,Colors,….etc.)

Total
No of Marks Marks
Course Code Course title no of
periods/week for FA for SA
periods

C and Graphics
AMG-108 06 180 40 60
programming
Lab

S No Chapter/ Unit Title No. of COs Mapped

Periods

1. Fundamentals and Input/Output 15 CO1,CO2

statements

2. Control statements 45 CO1,CO2,CO4

3. Arrays, structures and unions 60 CO1,CO2,,CO3,CO4

4. User defined functions, Graphics 60 CO1,CO2,CO3,CO4,CO5

functions and animation

Total 180

77
 Upon completion of the course the student shall be able to

1. Edit, compile and debug execution of C-Programs

2. Learn the syntax of all the statements, keywords, user defied
identifiers and usage of writing statements in C-Program.
COURSE
3. Evaluate all the expressions using different primary types of
OBJECTIVES data, derived data, operators and with their precedence,
4. Write C-programs using I/O statements, decision making
statements.
5. Write structured and modular C-programs
6. Write C-programs to make use of graphics functions..
7. Write C-programs to implement Animations.

CO No COURSE OUTCOMES

CO 1 AMG-108.1 Perform Edit, compile and debug and execution

of C-Programs(12)
CO 2 AMG-108.2 Develop programs using different predefined
functions, keywords, user defined identifiers(18)
CO 3 AMG-108.3 Evaluate different expressions using available C-
operators and valid data supported by C-
language(24)
CO 4 AMG-108.4 Develop C-programs using control statements,
array’s, structures, unions, files (90)
CO 5 AMG-108.5 Develop C-programs using user defined
Functions and recursion
C06 AMG-108.6 Develop C-programs using graphics and
animation techniques

CO-PO/PSO MATRIX

CO NO. PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3

AMG-108.1 2 2 1 2

AMG-108.2 2 3 2 2 2

AMG-108.3 2 2 3

AMG-108.4 2 3 2 3 3 2 2 2

AMG-108.5 2 2 3 2 2 2

AMG-108.6 2 3 2 2

Average 2 2.5 3 2 2.4 2.5 2 2 2 2.2

3=Strongly mapped , 2=moderately mapped, 1=slightly mapped

78
LEARNING OUTCOMES:

Fundamentals and Input / Output statements

1. Exercise on structure of C Program

2. Exercise on Keywords and identifiers
3. Exercise on constants and variables
4. Execution of simple C program
5. Exercise on operators and expressions
6. Exercise on special operators
7. Exercise on input and output of characters
8. Exercise on formatted input and output
9. Exercise on escape sequence characters

Control statements

(Note: Every statement must be repeated with at least 5 different applications)

10. Exercise on simple if statement
11. Exercise on if..else statement
12. Exercise on if..else..if ladder statement
13. Exercise on switch statement
14. Exercise on conditional operator comparing with if-else statement
15. Exercise on while statement
16. Exercise on for statement
17. Exercise on do. While statement

Arrays, structures and unions

18. Exercise on one dimensional arrays

19. Exercise on two dimensional arrays
20. Exercise on strings
21. Exercise on structure
22. Exercise on union
23. Exercise on array of structures

User defined functions and Graphics

24. Exercise on user-defined function

25. Exercise on recursion
26. Exercise on lines with different colors and styles
27. Exercise on rectangles
28. Exercise on circles
29. Exercise on ellipses and arcs
30. Exercise on pie chart
31. Exercise on bar chart
32. Exercise on text
33. Exercise on text animation.
34. Exercise on bouncing ball till a key is pressed
35. Exercise on moving car till any key is pressed

79
 The competencies and key competencies to be achieved by the student

S.No. Name of the Objectives Key Competencies

experiment

1 Exercise on For a given C program, ™ Identify different building block in a C

structure of C identify the different program
program building blocks

2 Exercise on For a given C program ™ Identify different keywords

Keywords and identify the keywords ™ Check whether the keywords are in
identifiers and identifiers lowercase
™ Differentiate identifiers and keywords

3 Exercise on For a given C program ™ Identify the constants

constants and identify the constants ™ Identify the variables
variables and variables ™ Declare variables with proper names
™ Know the assignment of values to variables

4 Execution of Execute a simple C ™ Acquaint with C program editing

simple C program ™ Compile the program
program ™ Rectify the syntactical errors
™ Execute the program

5 Exercise on Write a C program ™ Identify different arithmetic operators

operators and that uses different ™ Build arithmetic expressions
expressions arithmetic operators ™ Identify the priorities of operators
™ Evaluate arithmetic expression
™ Compile the program
™ Rectify the syntactical errors
™ Execute the program
™ Check the output for its correctness

6 Exercise on Write a C program ™ Identify different special operators

special that uses special ™ Build expressions using special operators
operators operators ™ Compile the program
™ Rectify the syntactical errors
™ Execute the program
™ Check the output for its correctness

7 Exercise on Write a C program for ™ Know the use of get char() function
input and reading and writing ™ Know the use of put char() function
output of characters ™ Compile the program
™ Rectify the syntactical errors
characters
™ Execute the program
™ Check whether the correct output is printed
for the given input

80
8 Exercise on Write a C program ™ Know the use of format string for different
formatted using formatted input types of data in scan f() function
input and and formatted output ™ Know the use of format string for different
types of data in print f() function
output
™ Check whether the data is read in correct
format
™ Check whether the data is printed in correct
format

9 Exercise on Write a C program ™ Know the use of Escape sequence characters

Escape using Escape ™ Use the Escape sequence characters
Sequence Sequence Characters ™ Check whether the data is read in correct
format
Characters
™ Rectify the syntax errors
™ Check the output for correctness

10 Exercise on Write a C program ™ Build a relational expression

simple if using simple if ™ Use the if statement for decision making
statement statement ™ Rectify the syntax errors
™ Check the output for correctness

11 Exercise on if.. Write a C program ™ Build a relational expression

else statement using if.. else ™ Use the if.. else statement for decision
statement making
™ Rectify the syntax errors
™ Check the output for correctness

12 Exercise on Write a C program ™ Use else.. if ladder statements with correct

else..if ladder using else..if ladder syntax
statement statement ™ Rectify the syntax errors
™ Debug logical errors
™ Check the output for correctness

13 Exercise on Write a C program ™ Use switch statement with correct syntax

switch using switch ™ Identify the differences between switch and
statement statement else..if ladder
™ Rectify the syntax errors
™ Debug logical errors
™ Check the output for correctness

14 Exercise on Write a C program ™ Build the three expressions for conditional

conditional using ( ? : ) conditional operator
operator operator ™ Use conditional operator with correct syntax
™ Rectify the syntax errors
™ Debug logical errors
™ Differentiate conditional operator and
if..else statement

81
 15 Exercise on Write a C program ™ Build the termination condition for looping
while using while statement ™ Use while statement with correct syntax
statement ™ Check whether correct number of iterations
are performed by the while loop
™ Rectify the syntax errors
™ Debug logical errors

16 Exercise on for Write a C program ™ Build the initial, increment and termination
statement using for statement conditions for looping
™ Use for statement with correct syntax
™ Rectify the syntax errors
™ Debug logical errors
™ Check whether correct number of iterations
are performed by the for loop
™ Differentiate for and while statements

17 Exercise on Write a C program ™ Build the termination condition for looping

do..while using do statement ™ Use do statement with correct syntax
statement ™ Rectify the syntax errors
™ Debug logical errors
™ Check whether correct number of iterations
are performed by the while loop
™ Differentiate do..while, while and for
statements

18 Exercise on Write a C program to ™ Create a one dimensional array with correct

one create and access one syntax
dimensional dimensional array ™ Store elements into array
™ Read elements from array
arrays
™ Validate boundary conditions while
accessing elements of array
™ Rectify the syntax errors
™ Debug logical errors
™ Check for the correctness of output for the
given input

19 Exercise on Write a C program to ™ Create a two dimensional array with correct

two create and access two syntax
dimensional dimensional array ™ Store elements into array
™ Read elements from array
arrays
™ Validate boundary conditions while
accessing elements of array
™ Rectify the syntax errors
™ Debug logical errors
™ Check for the correctness of output for the
given input
20 Exercise on Write a C program for ™ Declare and initialize string variables
strings reading and writing ™ Read strings from keyboard
strings ™ Print strings to screen

82
21 Exercise on Write a C program ™ Define a structure with correct syntax
structure using structure ™ Identify different members of a structure
™ Declare a structure variable
™ Access different members of structure
™ Observe the size of the structure
™ Rectify the syntax errors
™ Debug logical errors
™ Check for the correctness of output for the
given input

22 Exercise on Write a C program ™ Define a union with correct syntax

union using union ™ Identify different members of a union
™ Declare a union variable
™ Access different members of union
™ Observe the size of the union
™ Rectify the syntax errors
™ Debug logical errors
™ Check for the correctness of output for the
given input

23 Exercise on Write a C program to ™ Define a structure with correct syntax

array of create an array of ™ Identify different members of a structure
structures structures and store ™ Declare a structure variable
™ Create an array of structure
and retrieve data from
™ Access individual element of the array of
that array structure
™ Access different members of structure
™ Rectify the syntax errors
™ Debug logical errors
™ Check for the correctness of output for the
given input

24 Exercise on Write a C program to ™ Identify the different parts of function

user-defined define and call user- declaration
function defined functions ™ Define function with correct syntax
™ Classify functions based on it parameters
and return types
™ Identify parameters passed
™ Identify parameter passing method used
™ Identify return value
™ Rectify the syntax errors
™ Debug logical errors
™ Check for the correctness of output for the
given input

25 Exercise on Write a C program ™ Identify where recursive call is made in the

recursion using recursion function
™ Validate the termination condition
™ Rectify the syntax errors
™ Debug logical errors

83
 ™ Check for the correctness of output for the
given input
26 Exercise on Write a C program to ™ Know the use of different graphics functions
lines draw different lines like line() , lineto() setcolor(),setlinestyle()
with different colors ™ Use the different graphics functions and
initgraph()
and with different
™ Rectify the syntax errors
styiles.
™ Check the output for correctness and effect
of various graphic functions.

27 Exercise on Write a C program to ™ Know the use of different graphics functions

rectangles draw different like rectangle(), fillpoly(), setcolor(),
rectangles with setfillstyle()
™ Use the different graphics functions and
different colors and
initgraph()
with different fill ™ Rectify the syntax errors
styles . ™ Check the output for correctness and effect
of various graphic functions.

28 Exercise on Write a C program to ™ Know the use of different graphics functions

circles draw concentric like circle(), arc(), setcolor(), setfillstyle()
circles with different ™ Use the different graphics functions and
initgraph()
colors and with
™ Rectify the syntax errors
different fill styles . ™ Check the output for correctness and effect
of various graphic functions.

29 Exercise on Write a C program to ™ Know the use of different graphics functions

ellipses and draw different circles like ellipse(), arc(), setcolor(), setfillstyle()
arcs and arcs with ™ Use the different graphics functions and
initgraph()
different colors and
™ Rectify the syntax errors
with different fill ™ Check the output for correctness and effect
styles . of various graphic functions.

30 Exercise on pie Write a C program to ™ Know the use of different graphics functions
chart draw piechart with like pieslice(), setcolor(), setfillstyle()
different slices with ™ Use the different graphics functions and
initgraph()
different colors and
™ Rectify the syntax errors
with different fill ™ Check the output for correctness and effect
styles . of various graphic functions.

31 Exercise on Write a C program to ™ Know the use of different graphics functions

bar chart draw bar and 3d bar like bar(), bar3d(), setcolor(), setfillstyle()
charts with different ™ Use the different graphics functions and
initgraph()

84
 colors and with ™ Rectify the syntax errors
different fill styles . ™ Check the output for correctness and effect
of various graphic functions.

32 Exercise on Write a C program to ™ Know the use of different graphics functions

text display different texts like outtext(), outtextxy(), setcolor(),
with different fonts , settext style() , text height(), text width()
™ Use the different graphics functions and init
styles and colors and
graph()
sizes . ™ Rectify the syntax errors
™ Check the output for correctness and effect
of various graphic functions.

33 Exercise on Write a C program to ™ Know the use of different graphics functions

text Animation animate Your name like outtext(), outtextxy(), setcolor(),
on screen settextstyle() , textheight(), textwidth(),
cleardevice(), delay()
™ Use the different graphics functions and
initgraph()
™ Rectify the syntax errors
™ Check the output for correctness and effect
of various graphic functions.

34 Exercise on Write a C program to ™ Know the use of different graphics functions

Bouncing ball animate bouncing ball like outtext(), outtextxy(), setcolor(),
animation till a key on keyboard settextstyle() , textheight(), textwidth(),
cleardevice(), delay(), kbhit(), circle(),
is pressed
setfillstyle().
™ Use the different graphics functions and
initgraph()
™ Rectify the syntax errors
™ Check the output for correctness and effect
of various graphic functions.

35 Exercise on Write a C program to ™ Know the use of different graphics functions

Car Animation draw a car animate like all shape functions(),cleardevice(),
car movement in left delay(), kbhit(), circle(), setfillstyle().
™ Use the different graphics functions and
to right on the screen
initgraph()
till any key on the ™ Rectify the syntax errors
keyboard is pressed. ™ Check the output for correctness and effect
of various graphic functions.

85
 PHYSICS LABORATORY

SUBJECT SUBJECT CODE TOTAL PERIODS NUMBER PERIODS

PER WEEK
PHYSICS LAB COMMON -109 45 03

(1) To provide strong practical knowledge of Physics to serve as a tool for

Course various device applications in Engineering.
objectives (2) To enhance scientific skills of the students by incorporating new
experiments so as to enrich the technical expertise of the students as required
for industries.

Improving accuracy in various measurements; understanding the

CO1 nature of the forces keeping the body in equilibrium.

Estimating the acceleration caused by the gravity of earth; Practical

CO2 study of the concepts of refraction of light at curved/plane surface

Understanding the pressure of the gas as function of its volume;

COURSE CO3 study of the combined magnetic field of the earth and an artificial
OUTCOMES magnet to estimate its pole strength; Estimating the velocity of
sound in air through resonance phenomenon.
Applying Kirch off’s laws to evaluate the specific resistance of a wire;
CO4 Study of exchange of heat from system to surrounding by graphical
analysis; Conversion of light to micro currents as potential
engineering application.

CO-PO MAPPING

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7

CO1 3 2 2 2 2 1 2

CO2 3 1 1 1 1 1

CO3 3 2 1

CO4 3 2 2 1 2

86
 ENGINEERING PHYSICS LAB
C - 23 curriculum - Common to all Branches)

Subject Title : Engineering Physics Lab

Subject Code : Common-109
Periods per week : 03
Total periods per year : 45

TIMESCHEDULE
S.No List of experiments No.of
Periods
Vernier calipers 03
1.
Micrometer (Screw gauge) 03
2.
Verification of Lami’s theorem using concurrent forces 03
3.
Determination of g using simple pendulum 03
4.
Focal length and power of convex lens 03
5.
Refractive index of solid using travelling microscope 03
6.
Verification of Boyle’s law using Quill tube 03
7.
Determination of pole strength of the bar magnet through magnetic field lines 03
8
Resonance apparatus – Determination of velocity of sound in air 03
9
Experiments for demonstration

Meter bridge – Determination of resistance and specific resistance of a wire 03

10
Verification of Newton’s law of cooling 03
11
Photo electric cell – Study of its characteristics 03
12
Revision 06

Test 03

Total: 45

Objectives:

Upon completion of the course the student shall be able to

1.0 Practice with Vernier calipers to determine the volumes of a cylinder and sphere.
2.0 Practice with Screw gauge to determine thickness of a glass plate and cross sectional area of
a wire.
3.0 Verify the Lami’s theorem using concurrent forces.

87
4.0 Determine the value of acceleration due to gravity (g) using Simple Pendulum. To verify the
result from l-T2 graph.
5.0 Calculate the Focal length and focal power of convex lens using distant object method, and
U-V method. To verify the result from U-V graph and 1 / U – 1 / V graph methods.
6.0 Determine the refractive index of a solid using travelling microscope
7.0 Verify the Boyle’s law using Quill tube. To draw a graph between P and 1/l.
8.0 Determination of magnetic pole strength of a bar magnet by drawing magnetic lines of force
and locating null points (either N - N or N - S method)
9.0 Determine the velocity of sound in air at room temperature and its value at zero degree
Centigrade using resonance apparatus.
10.0 Determine the resistance and specific resistance of material of a wire using Meter Bridge
11.0 To verify the Newton’s law of cooling.
12..0 To study the characteristics of photo electric cell.

Course Outcomes

No.of
S.No List of experiments COs
Periods
1. Vernier calipers 03
CO1
2. Micrometer (Screw gauge) 03
3. Verification of Lami’s theorem using concurrent forces 03
4. Determination of g using simple pendulum 03
CO2
5. Focal length and power of convex lens 03

6. Refractive index of solid using travelling microscope 03

7. Verification of Boyle’s law using Quill tube 03
CO3
Determination of pole strength of the bar magnet through magnetic
8 03
field lines
9 Resonance apparatus – Determination of velocity of sound in air 03
Meter bridge – Determination of resistance and specific resistance of a
10 03 CO4
wire
11 Verification of Newton’s law of cooling 03

12 Photo electric cell – Study of its characteristics 03

88
 Competencies and Key competencies to be achieved by the student
Name of the
Competencies Key competencies
Experiment
x Find the Least count x Read the scales
x Fix the specimen in posit x Calculate the requisite
1 . Practice on Vernier
x Read the scales physical quantities of
Calipers(03)
x Calculate the physical given objects
quantities of given object
x Calculating volumes of
the cylinder and sphere
x Find the Least count x Read the scales
x Fix the specimen in x Noting zero error
2. Practice on Screw position x Calculate thickness of
gauge(03) x Read the scales
given glass plate
x Calculate thickness of glass
place and cross section of wire x Calculate cross section of
and other quantities wire and other quantities
x Making experimental set up x Measuring angles
x Fix suitable weights between the forces
x Note the positions of threads x Marking the directions
3. Verification of on drawing sheet
Lami’s theorem of forces on a paper
x Find the angles between the x Verifying Lami’s from
forces(03) concurrent the weights and
x Changing weights measured angles
appropriately between the forces.
x Fix the simple pendulum to x Find the time for number
the stand of oscillations
x Adjust the length of pendulum x Find the time period
x Find the time for number of
4. Simple x Calculate the acceleration
oscillations
pendulum(03) due to gravity
x Find the time period
x Calculate the acceleration due x Draw l-T2 graph
to gravity
x Draw l-T2 graph
x Fix the object distance x Calculate the focal length
5. Focal length and x Find the Image distance and power of convex lens
Focal power of x Calculate the focal length and x Draw u-v and 1/u – 1/v
convex lens (03) power of convex lens Draw u- graphs
v and 1/u – 1/v graphs
x Find the least count of Vernier x Reading the scales on
on microscope Microscope.
6 Refractive index of x Place the graph paper below
solid using
microscope x Calculate the refractive
traveling
microscope(03) x Read the scale index of glass slab

89
 x Note the atmospheric x Fixing Quill tube in
pressure various positions on
x Fix the Quill tube to retort retort stand.
7 . Boyle’s law stand x Find the length of air
verification (03) x Find the length of air column column
x Draw magnetic meridian
x Place the bar magnet in x Draw the pattern of
NN or NS directions magnetic lines of force
8. Mapping of magnet x Draw magnetic lines of x Locate the neutral points
lines of force
x Calculating pole strength of
force(03) x Locate the neutral points
x Arrange the resonance x Adjust the reservoir level
9. Velocity of sound in apparatus x Find the first and second
air x Adjust the reservoir level for resonanting lengths
–Resonance booming sound x Calculate velocity of
method (03) x Find the first and second sound at room
x Make the circuit connections x Making connections as
x Find the balancing length per circuit diagram.
10. Meter bridge(03) x Calculate unknown resistance x Find the balancing length
x Find the radius of wire x Calculate unknown
x Calculate the specific resistance
x Heating liquid in a beaker x Measuring temperature
using a heating element of a liquid as function of
11. Verification of
x Inserting thermometer in temperature.
Newton’s law of
Cooling (03) liquid in calorimeter x Plotting a cooling curve.
x Stirring liquid x Verifying Newton’s law of
x Experimental set up and
12. Photo electric cell – making connections x Making connections for
Study of its x Varying intensity of light by experimental set up.
Characteristics (03) varying distances between x Varying distances
light source and photocell. appropriately.

Scheme of Valuation for End Practical Examination :

Activity Marks
For writing, Apparatus, formulae, least count (if applicable) 5
Procedure & precautions 5
Drawing Tables 3
Readings, calculations, graph (if applicable), reporting the findings 12
Viva-voce 5
Total marks 30

90
 CHEMISTRYLABORATORY
(C-23 curriculum common to all Branches)

Subjec t Title : Chemistry Laboratory

Subject Code : Common -110
Periods per week : 03
Total periods per year : 45

Operate and practice volumetric apparatus and preparation of

CO1
standard solution.

CO2 Evaluate and judge the neutralization point in acid base titration.

CO3 Evaluate the end point of reduction and oxidation reaction.

Judge the stable end point of complex formation, stable
CO4
precipitation.
Judge operate and demonstrate and perform precise operations
CO5
with instrument for investigation of water pollution parameters.

PO- CO mapping

Course code
Chemistry Laboratory
Common- No. of periods : 45
No. of CO’s:5
110
CO periods
Mapped with CO addressing Level
POs % Remarks
No. PO in Col. 1,2,3
No. 1
CO1,CO2,CO3,
PO1 12 26.66 2
CO4,CO5 Level 3 (highly
CO1,CO2,CO3, addressed)
PO2 9 20 1
CO4,CO5
PO3 25% to 40%
CO1,CO2,CO3, Level2 (moderately
PO4 12 26.66 2 addressed)
CO4,CO5
CO2,CO3,
PO5 12 26.66 2 5% to 25%
CO4,CO5
PO6 Level1 (Low addressed)
PO7 < 5%(not addressed)

91
 COs-POs mapping strength (as per given table)

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
CO1 2 3 1 1
CO2 2 3 2 2 1
CO3 2 3 2 2 1
CO4 2 3 2 2 1
CO5 2 3 2 2 1
3=strongly mapped2= moderately mapped1= slightly mapped

Note: The gaps in CO and PO mapping will be achieved by one or more appropriate activities
from the following: i) Seminars ii) Tutorials iii) Guest Lectures iv) Assignments v) Quiz competitions
vi) Industrial visit vii) Tech Fest viii) Mini project ix) Group discussions x) Virtual classes
xi) Library visit for e-books

TIME SCHEDULE
No. of Mapped
S.No Name of the Experiment
Periods with COs
a) Recognition of chemical substances and solutions used in the
1. laboratory by senses. 03 CO1
b) Familiarization of methods for Volumetric analysis.
2. Preparation of Std.Na2CO3solution and making solutions of different dilutions 03 CO1
3. Estimation of HCl solution using Std.Na2CO3solution. 03 CO2
4. Estimation of NaOH using Std. HCl solution. 03 CO2
5. Determination of acidity of water sample. 03 CO2
6. Determination of alkalinity of water sample. 03 CO2
7. Estimation of Mohr’S Salt usingStd.KMnO4. Solution. 03 CO3
8. Estimation of Ferrous ion by using Std. K2Cr2O7solution. 03 CO3
9. Determination of total hardness of water sample using Std. EDTA solution. 03 CO4
10. Estimation of Chlorides present in water sample by using Std. AgNO3 solution. 03 CO4
Estimation of Dissolved Oxygen(D.O) in water sample by using Std. hypo
11. solution. 03 CO5

12. Determination of Ph using pH meter.. 03 CO5

13. Determination of conductivity of water and adjusting ionic strength required 03 CO5
l l 03 CO5
14. Determination of turbidity of water.
15. Estimation of total solids present in water sample. 03 CO5
Total: 45

92
Objectives:

Upon completion of the course the student shall be able to

1.0 To identify the chemical compounds and solutions by senses.

Practice volumetric measurements (using pipettes, measuring jars, volumetric flask, burettes)
and gravimetric measurements (using different types of balances), making dilutions, etc.
2.0 Practice making standard solutions with pre weighed salts and to make solutions of desired
dilutions using appropriate techniques.
3.0 Conduct titrations adopting standard procedures and using Std. Na2CO3solutionfor estimation of
HCl.
4.0 Conduct titrations adopting standard procedures and using Std. HCl solution for estimation of
NaOH.
5.0 Conduct titrations adopting standard procedures to determine the acidity of given
samples of water (One ground water and one surface / tap water, and rain water if available).
6.0 Conduct titrations adopting standard procedures to determine the alkalinity of given
samples of water (One ground water and one surface / tap water).
7.0 Conduct titrations adopting standard procedures and using Std.KMnO4 solution for estimation of
Mohr’sSalt.
8.0 Conduct titrations adopting standard procedures and using Std.K2Cr2O7 solution for estimation of
Ferrous ion.
9.0 Conduct titrations adopting standard procedures to determine the total hardness of given
samples of water (One ground water and one surface / tap water) using Std. EDTA solution.
10. Conduct titrations adopting standard procedures to determine the chlorides present in the given
samples of water and wastewater (One ground water and one surface / tap water).
using Std. AgNO3 solution.
11. Conduct the test using titrometric / electrometric method to determine. Dissolved Oxygen (D.O)
in the given water samples (One sample from closed container and one from open container / tap
water) by Std. hypo solution.
12. Conduct the test on given samples of water / solutions (like soft drinks, sewage, etc.) to determine
their pH using standard pH meter.
13. Conduct the test on given samples of water / solutions.
a) to determine conductivity .
b) to adjust the ionic strength of the sample to the desired value.
14. Conduct the test on given samples of solutions (coloured and non-coloured) to determine their
turbidity in NTU.
15. Determine the total solids present in given samples of water (One ground water and one
surface / tap water).

93
 Competencies and Key competencies to be achieved by the student
Name of the Experiment
Competencies Key competencies
(No of Periods)
Recognition of chemical
substances and solutions. -
Familiarization of --
methods for Volumetric
analysis.
(03)
ƒ Weighing the salt to the
ƒ Weighing the salt to the accuracy
accuracy of 0.01 mg.
of .01 mg.
Preparation of Std.Na2CO3 ƒ Measuring the water with
ƒ Measuring the water with
solution and making volumetric flask, measuring
volumetric flask, measuring jar,
solutions of different jar, volumetric pipette and
volumetric pipetteand graduated
dilutions. (03) graduated pipette.
pipette.
ƒ Making appropriate
ƒ Making appropriate dilutions.
dilutions.
Estimation of HCl solution
using Std. Na2CO3solution.
(03) ƒ Cleaning the glassware and
Estimation of NaOH using rinsing with appropriate
Std. HCl solution. (03) solutions.
ƒ Making standard solutions.
Determination of acidity
ƒ Measuring accurately the
of water sample. (03)
standard solutions and titrants.
Determination of ƒ Filling the burette with titrant.
alkalinity of water sample. ƒ Fixing the burette to the stand.
(03) ƒ Effectively Controlling the flow of ƒ Making standard solutions.
Estimation of Mohr’s Salt ƒ Measuring accurately the
usingStd.KMnO4solution. the titrant.
ƒ Identifying the end point. standard solutions and
(03)
ƒ Making accurate observations. titrants.
Estimation of Ferrous ion ƒ Effectively Controlling the
ƒ Calculating the results.
by using flow of the titrant.
Std.K2Cr2O7.solution (03) ƒ Identifying the end point.
Determination of total ƒ Making accurate
hardness of water using observations.
Std. EDTA solution. (03)
Estimation of Chlorides
present in water sample
using Std. AgNO3 solution
(03)
Estimation o f Dissolved
Oxygen (D.O) in water
sample (By titration
method) (03)
Determination of pH ƒ Familiarize with instrument. ƒ Prepare standard
using pH meter. (03) ƒ Choose appropriate ‘Mode’ / solutions / buffers, etc.

94
 Determination of ‘Unit’. ƒ Standardize the
conductivity of water and ƒ Prepare standard solutions / instrument with
adjusting ionic strength to buffers, etc. appropriate standard
required level. (03) ƒ Standardize the instrument solutions.
with appropriate standard ƒ Plot the standard curve.
Determination of solutions. ƒ Make measurements
turbidity of water. (03) ƒ Plot the standard curve. accurately.
ƒ Make measurements
ƒ Measuring the accurate ƒ Measuring the accurate
volume and weight of volume and weight of
Estimation of total solids sample. sample.
ƒ Filtering and air drying ƒ Filtering and air drying
present in water sample.
without losing any filtrate. without losing any
(03)
ƒ Accurately weighing the filtrate.
filter paper, crucible and ƒ Accurately weighing the
filtrate. filter paper, crucible and

SCHEME OF VALUATION

A) Writing Chemicals, apparatus, principle and procedure . 5M

B) Demonstrated competencies. 20M
Making standard solutions.
Measuring accurately the standard solutions and titrants.
Effectively controlling the flow of the titrant.
Identifying the end point.
Making accurate observations.
C) Viva-voce. 5M

Total 30M

----

95
 Course No. of Total No. of Marks for
Course Title Marks for FA
code Periods/Weeks periods SA
AMG-111
Computer
(common
Fundamentals 3 90 40 60
to all
Lab
branches)

Time schedule:
S.No. Chapter/Unit Title No. of sessions No.of Periods
each of 3 periods
duration
1. Computer hardware Basics 2 6
2. Windows Operating System 2 6
3. MS Word 8 24
4. MS Excel 7 21
5. MS PowerPoint 5 15
6. Adobe Photoshop 6 18
Total periods 30 90

S.No. Chapter/Unit Title No.of Periods CO’s Mapped

1. Computer hardware Basics 6 CO1
2. Windows Operating System 6 CO1
3. MS Word 24 CO2
4. MS Excel 21 CO3
5. MS PowerPoint 15 CO4
6 Adobe Photoshop 18 CO5
Total periods 90

Course i)To know Hardware Basics

Objectives ii)To familiarize operating systems
iii)To use MS Office effectively to enable to students use these skills in future
courses
iv) To use Adobe Photoshop in image editing.

At the end of the course students will be able to

CO1 C-111.1 Identify hardware and software components
CO2 C-111.2 Prepare documents with given specifications using word
processing software
Course CO3 C-111.3 Use Spread sheet software to make calculation and to draw
Outcomes various graphs / charts.
CO4 C-111.4 Use Power point software to develop effective presentation for
a given theme or topic.
CO5 C-111.5 Edit digital or scanned images using Photoshop

96
 CO-PO/PSO MATRIX
CO NO. PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
AMG- 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3
111.1
AMG- 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3
111.2
AMG- 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3
111.3
AMG- 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3
111.4
AMG- 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3
111.5
Average 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3

3=Strongly mapped , 2=moderately mapped, 1=slightly mapped

Learning Outcomes:
I. Computer Hardware Basics
1. a).To Familiarize with Computer system and hardware connections
b).To Start and Shut down Computer correctly
c).To check the software details of the computer
2. To check the hardware present in your computer
II. Windows’s operating system
3. To Explore Windows Desktop
4. Working with Files and Folders
5. Windows Accessories: Calculator – Notepad – WordPad – MS Paint
III. Practice with MS-WORD
6. To familiarize with Ribbon layout of MS Word
Home – Insert- Page layout – References – Review- View.
7. To practice Word Processing Basics
8. To practice Formatting techniques
9. To insert a table of required number of rows and columns
10. To insert Objects, Clipart and Hyperlinks
11. To use Mail Merge feature of MS Word
12. To use Equations and symbols features
IV. Practice with MS-EXCEL
13. To familiarize with MS-EXCEL layout
14. To access and enter data in the cells
15. To edit a spread sheet- Copy, Cut, Paste, and selecting Cells
16. To use built in functions and Formatting Data
17. To create Excel Functions, Filling Cells
18. To enter a Formula for automatic calculations
19. To sort and filter data in table.
20. To present data using Excel Graphs and Charts.
21. To develop lab reports of respective discipline.
22. To format a Worksheet in Excel, Page Setup and Print

97
V. Practice with MS-POWERPOINT
23. To familiarize with Ribbon layout features of PowerPoint 2007.
24. To create a simple PowerPoint Presentation
25. To set up a Master Slide in PowerPoint
26. To insert Text and Objects
27. To insert a Flow Charts
28. To insert a Table
29. To insert a Charts/Graphs
30. To insert video and audio
31. To practice Animating text and objects
32. To Review presentation
VI. Practice with Adobe Photoshop
33. To familiarize with standard toolbox
34. To edit a photograph.
35. To insert Borders around photograph.
36. To change Background of a Photograph.
37. To change colors of Photograph.
38. To prepare a cover page for the book in your subject area.
39. To adjust the brightness and contrast of the picture so that it gives an elegant look.
40. To type a word and apply the shadow emboss effects.

Key competencies:
Expt Name of Experiment Competencies Key competencies
No
1 (a). To familiarize with a. Identify the parts of a Computer Connect cables to
Computer system system: i). CPU ii). Mother Board external hardware and
and hardware iii) Monitor iv) CD/DVD Drive v) operate the computer
connections Power Switch vi) Start Button vii)
Reset Button
b. Identify and connect various
peripherals
c. Identify and connect the cables
used with computer system
d. Identify various ports on CPU and
connect Keyboard & Mouse
1 (b). To Start and Shut down a. Log in using the password a. Login and logout as
Computer correctly b. Start and shut down the per the standard
computer procedure
c. Use Mouse and Key Board b. Operate mouse
&Key Board
1 (c). To Explore Windows a. Familiarize with Start Menu, a. Access application
Desktop Taskbar, Icons and Shortcuts programs using Start
menu

b. Access application programs b. Use taskbar and Task

using Start menu, Task manager manager
c. Use Help support

98
2. To check the software a. Find the details of Operating Access the
details of the System being used properties of
computer b.Find the details of Service Pack computer and find
installed the details

3. To check the a.Find the CPU name and clock a. Access device
hardware present in speed manager and find
your computer b.Find the details of RAM and the details
Hard disk present b. Type /Navigate the
c. Access Device manager using correct path and
Control Panel and check the Select icon related to
status of devices like mouse and the details required
key board
d.Use My Computer to check the
details of Hard drives and
partitions
e.Use the Taskbar

4. Working with Files and a.Create folders and organizing files a. Create files and
Folders in different folders folders Rename ,
arrange and search
b.Use copy / paste move for the required
commands to organize files and folder/file
folders

c. Arrange icons – name wise, size, b. Restore deleted files

Working with Files and type, Modified from Recycle bin
Folders d.Search a file or folder and find its
Continued.... path
e.Create shortcut to files and
folders (in other folders) on
Desktop
f. Familiarize with the use of My
Documents
g.Familiarize with the use of
Recycle Bin
5. To use Windows a.Familiarize with the use of a. Use windows
Accessories: Calculator accessories and
Calculator – Notepad b.Access Calculator using Run select correct text
– WordPad – MS Paint command editor based on the
c. Create Text Files using Notepad situation.
and WordPad and observe the
difference in file size b. Use MS pain to
d.Use MS paint and create .jpeg, create /Edit pictures
.bmp files using MS Paint and save in the
required format.

6. To familiarize with a.Create/Open a document a. Create a Document

Ribbon layout of MS b.Use Save and Save as features and name
word. – Home –

99
 Insert- page layout- c. Work on two Word documents appropriately and
References-Review- simultaneously save
View d.Choose correct Paper size and b. Set paper size and
Printing options print options

7. To practice Word a.Typing text a. Use key board and

Processing Basics b.Keyboard usage mouse to enter/edit
c. Use mouse (Left click / Right click text in the
/ Scroll) document.
d.Use Keyboard shortcuts b. Use shortcuts
e.Use Find and Replace features in c. Use spell check/
MS- word Grammar features
f. Use Undo and Redo Features for auto corrections.
g.Use spell check to correct
Spellings and Grammar

8. To practice Formatting a.Formatting Text a. Format Text and

techniques b.Formatting Paragraphs paragraphs and use
c. Setting Tabs various text styles.
d.Formatting Pages b. Use bullets and
e.The Styles of Word numbers to create
f. Insert bullets and numbers lists
g.Themes and Templates c. Use Templates
h.Insert page numbers, header and /Themes
footer d. Insert page numbers
date, headers and
footers

9. To insert a table of a.Edit the table by adding the fields a. Insert table in the
required number of – Deleting rows and columns – word document and
rows and columns inserting sub table –marking edit
borders. Merging and splitting of b. Use sort option for
cells in a Table arranging data.
b.Changing the background colour
of the table
c. Use table design tools

d.Use auto fit – fixed row/ column

height/length – Even distribution
of rows / columns features
e.Convert Text to table and Table to
Text
f. Use Sort feature of the Table to
arrange data in
ascending/descending order

10. To Insert objects, a.Create a 2-page document. a. Insert hyperlinks

clipart and Hyperlinks &Insert hyperlinks and t &Bookmarks
Bookmarks. b. Create organization
b.Create an organization chart charts/flow charts

100
 c. Practice examples like preparing
an Examination schedule notice
with a hyperlink to Exam schedule
table.

11. To Use Mail merge a.Use mail merge to prepare Use Mail merge
feature of MS Word individually addressed letters feature
b.Use mail merge to print
envelopes.
12. To use Equations and a.Explore various symbols available Enter Mathematical
symbols features. in MS Word symbols and Equations
b.Insert a symbol in the text in the word document
c. Insert mathematical equations in
the document
13. To Practice with MS- a. Open /create an MS Excel a. Familiarize with
spreadsheet and familiarize with excel layout and
EXCEL
MS Excel 2007 layout like MS use
office Button- b. Use various features
b. Use Quick Access Toolbar- Title available in toolbar
Bar- Ribbon-Worksheets- Formula
Bar-Status Bar

14. To access and Enter a.Move Around a Worksheets- a. Access and select
data in the cells Quick access -Select Cells the required cells by
b.Enter Data-Edit a Cell-Wrap Text- various addressing
Delete a Cell Entry-Save a File- methods
Close Excel b. Enter data and edit

15. To edit spread sheet a.Insert and Delete Columns and Format the excel sheet
Copy, Cut, Paste, and Rows-Create Borders-Merge and
selecting cells Center
b.Add Background Color-Change
the Font, Font Size, and Font
Color
c. Format text with Bold, Italicize,
and Underline-Work with Long
Text-Change a Column's Width
16. To use built in a.Perform Mathematical Use built in functions
functions and Calculations verify -AutoSum in Excel
Formatting Data b.Perform Automatic Calculations-
Align Cell Entries
17. To enter a Formula for a.Enter formula
automatic calculations b.Use Cell References in Formulae Enter formula for
c. Use Automatic updating function automatic calculations
of Excel Formulae
d.Use Mathematical Operators in
Formulae
e.Use Excel Error Message and
Help

101
18. To Create Excel a. Use Reference Operators a. Create Excel sheets
Functions, Filling Cells b. Work with sum, Sum if , Count involving cross
and Count If Functions references and
c. Fill Cells Automatically equations
b. Use the advanced
functions for
conditional
calculations
19. To sort and filter data a. Sort data in multiple columns a. Refine the data in a
in table b. Sort data in a row worksheet and
c. Sort data using Custom order keep it organized
d. Filter data in work sheet b. Narrow a worksheet
by selecting specific
choice
20. To Practice Excel a. Produce an Excel Pie Chart a. Use data in Excel
Graphs and Charts b. Produce sheet to Create
c. Excel Column Chart technical charts
and graphs
Produce Excel Line
Graph
b. Produce a
Pictograph in Excel
21. To develop lab reports Create Lab reports using MS Word a. Insert Practical
of respective and Excel subject name in
discipline Header and page
numbers in Footer
22. To format a a. Shade alternate rows of data a. Format Excel sheet
Worksheet in Excel, b. Add currency and percentage b. Insert headers
page setup and print symbols &footers and print
c. Change height of a row and width
of a column
d. Change data alignment
e. Insert Headers and Footers
f. Set Print Options and Print
23. To familiarize with Use various options in PowerPoint Access required
Ribbon layout a. Home options in the tool bar
&features of b. Insert
PowerPoint 2007. c. Design
d. Animation
e. Slideshow
f. View
g. Review
24. To create a simple a. Insert a New Slide into a. Create simple
PowerPoint PowerPoint PowerPoint
Presentation b. Change the Title of a PowerPoint presentation with
Slide photographs/ClipArt
c. PowerPoint Bullets and text boxes
d. Add an Image to a PowerPoint b. Use bullets option
Slide
e. Add a Textbox to a PowerPoint
slide

102
25. To Set up a Master a. Create a PowerPoint Design a. Setup Master slide
Slide in PowerPoint Template and format
and add notes b. Modify themes b. Add notes
c. Switch between Slide master
view and Normal view
d. Format a Design Template
Master Slide
e. Add a Title Slide to a Design
Template
f. The Slide Show Footer in
PowerPoint
g. Add Notes to a PowerPoint
Presentation
26. To Insert Text and a. Insert Text and objects Insert Text and Objects
Objects b. Set Indents and line spacing Use 3d features
c. Insert pictures/ clipart
d. Format pictures
e. Insert shapes and word art
f. Use 3d features
g. Arrange objects
27. To insert a Flow Chart a. Create a Flow Chart in Create organizational
/ Organizational PowerPoint charts and flow charts
Charts b. Group and Ungroup Shapes using smart art
c. Use smart art
28. To insert a Table a. PowerPoint Tables Insert tables and
b. Format the Table Data format
c. Change Table Background
d. Format Series Legend

29. To insert a a. Create 3D Bar Graphs in Create charts and Bar

Charts/Graphs PowerPoint graphs, Pie Charts and
b. Work with the PowerPoint format.
Datasheet
c. Format a PowerPoint Chart Axis
d. Format the Bars of a Chart
e. Create PowerPoint Pie Charts
f. Use Pie Chart Segments
g. Create 2D Bar Charts in
PowerPoint
h. Format the 2D Chart
e. Format a Chart Background

30. To Insert audio & a. Insert sounds in the slide and a. Insert Sounds and
video, Hyperlinks in a hide the audio symbol Video in
slide appropriate
Add narration to the b. Adjust the volume in the settings format.
slide c. Insert video file in the format b. Add narration to
supported by PowerPoint in a the slide
slide c. Use hyperlinks to
d. Use automatic and on click switch to different
options slides and files

103
 e. Add narration to the slide
f. Insert Hyperlinks

31. To Practice Animation a. Apply transitions to slides Add animation effects

effects b. To explore and practice special
animation effects like Entrance,
Emphasis, Motion Paths &Exit
32. Reviewing a. Checking spelling and grammar a. Use Spell check
presentation b. Previewing presentation and Grammar
c. Set up slide show feature
d. Set up resolution b. Setup slide show
e. Exercise with Rehearse Timings c. Add timing to the
feature in PowerPoint slides
f. Use PowerPoint Pen Tool during d. Setup automatic
slide show slide show
g. Saving
h. Printing presentation
(a) Slides
(b) Hand-out
33 To familiarize with a. Open Adobe Photoshop Open a photograph
standard toolbox b. Use various tools such as and save it in
i. The Layer Tool Photoshop
ii. The Color& Swatches Tool
iii. Custom Fonts & The Text Tool
iv. Brush Tool
v. The Select Tool
vi. The Move Tool
vii. The Zoom Tool
viii. The Eraser
ix. The Crop Tool
x. The Fill Tool

34 To edit a photograph a. Use the Crop tool a. Able to edit image

b. Trim edges by using
c. Change the shape and size of a corresponding tools.
photo
d. Remove the part of photograph
including graphics and text
35 To insert Borders a. Start with a single background Able to create a
around photograph layer border or frame
b. Bring the background forward around an image to
c. Enlarge the canvas add visual interest to a
d. Create a border color photo
e. Send the border color to the back
f. Experiment with different colors
36 To change Background a. open the foreground and Able to swap
of a Photograph background image background elements
b. Use different selection tools to using the Select and
paint over the image Mask tool and layers.
c. Copy background image and paste
it on the foreground.

104
 d. Resize and/or drag the
background image to reposition.
e. In the Layers panel, drag the
background layer below the
foreground image layer.
37 To change colors of a. Change colors using: Able to control color
Photograph i) Color Replacement tool saturation
ii) Hue/Saturation adjustment layer
tool
38 To prepare a cover a. open a file with height 500 and Able to prepare cover
page for the book in width 400 for the cover page. page for the book
subject area b. apply two different colors to work
area by dividing it into two parts
using Rectangle tool.
c. Copy any picture and place it on
work area→ resize it using free
transform tool.
d. Type text and apply color and
style
e. Apply effects using blended
options
39 To adjust the a. open a file. Able to control
brightness and b. Go to image→ adjustments→ brightness/contrast.
contrast of picture to Brightness/Contrast.
give an elegant look c. adjust the brightness and
contrast.
d. Save the image.
40 To type a word and a. open a file Able to apply shadow
apply the shadow b. Select the text tool and type text. emboss effects
emboss effects c. Select the typed text go to layer→
layer style→ blended option→
drop shadow, inner shadow,
bevel and emboss→ contour→
satin→ gradient overlay
d. Save the image.

Table specifying the scope of syllabus to be covered for unit tests

Unit Test Learning outcomes to be covered
Unit test-1 From 1 to 8
Unit test-2 From 9 to 22
Unit test-3 From 23 to 40

105
THIRD SEMESTER

106
 3-D ANIMATION AND GRAPHICS ENGINEERING
SCHEME OF INSTRUCTIONS AND EXAMINATION
CURRICULUM-2023 (III Semester)

Total
Instruction Periods
Periods/ Scheme Of Examinations
Per
Sub Name of the Week Semester
Code Subject
End
Theory Practicals Duration Sessional Total
Exam
(hrs) Marks Marks
Marks
THEORYSUBJECTS

AMG-301 Mathematics–II 4 60 3 20 80 100

AMG-302 Multimedia 4 - 60 3 20 80 100

Graphics Designing 100

AMG-303 5 - 75 3 20 80

AMG-304 2DDigitalAnimation 4 - 60 3 20 80 100

Graphics 100
AMG-305 4 - 60 3 20 80
programming
Through Java
PRACTICALSUBJECTS
Graphics Designing
AMG-306 - 3 45 3 40 60 100
Lab
2D Digital 60
AMG-307 - 4 3 40 60 100
Animation Lab
Graphics 60
AMG-308 programming - 4 3 40 60 100
Through Java Lab
AMG-309 2DGraphics Lab 4 60 3 40 60 100

AMG-310 MiniProject 3 45 3 40 60 100

STUDENT 3
CENTRIC 45
ACTIVITIES
Total 21 21 630 300 700 1000
AMG-301 common with all branches AMG-303,304,307,309,310 common with
DAME branch

107
 C-23
ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS-II
CM/AIML/AMG/AMT/CAI/CCB/CCN/WD-301
(Common to Computer Engg. and allied branches)

No. of Total No. of

Course Marks for FA Marks for SA
Course Title Periods/week periods
Code
Engineering
AMG-301 4 60 20 80
Mathematics-II

TIME SCHEDULE

S.No. Chapter/Unit title No. of Marks Short Essay COs

Periods Allotted Type Type mapped
Unit – I: Integral Calculus
1 Indefinite integration 17 26 2 2 CO1
2 Definite integrals 5 16 2 1 CO1
Unit – II: Differential Equations
3 Introduction to 2 3 1 0 CO2
Differential equations
4 Solutions of 6 10 0 1 CO2
Differential equations
of first order
Unit – III: Graph Theory and Probability
5 Graph theory 5 6 2 0 CO3
6 Probability 12 26 2 2 CO3
Unit – IV : Statistics
6 Measures of Central 1 0 0 0 CO4
Tendency
7 Measures of 3 3 1 0 CO4
Dispersion
8 Correlation 4 10 0 1 CO4
9 Simple linear 5 10 0 1 CO4
regression
Total 60 110 10 8
Marks 30 80

108
Course Objectives (iii) To understand the concepts of indefinite integration and definite
integration.
(iv) To understand the formation of differential equations and learn
various methods of solving first order differential equations.
(v) To comprehend the concepts of graph theory and probability.
(vi) To learn different statistical techniques for data analysis.

Integrate various functions using different methods and evaluate

CO1
definite integrals.
Obtain differential equations and solve differential equations of
CO2
first order and first degree.
Course Outcomes
Able to define the basic concepts of Graph Theory and use the
CO3
principles of Probability in computational systems.
CO4 Apply various statistical techniques for data analysis.

109
 C-23
ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS – II
CM/AIML/AMG/AMT/CAI/CCB/CCN/WD-301
(Common to Computer Engg. and allied branches)
Learning Outcomes

Unit-I
Integral Calculus
C.O. 1 Integrate various functions using different methods and evaluate definite integrals.
L.O. 1.1. Explain the concept of Indefinite integral as an anti-derivative.
1.2. State the indefinite integral of standard functions and properties of ³ (u  v) dx and ³ k u dx
where u, v are functions of x andk is constant.
1.3. Solve problems involving standard functions using the above rules.
1.4. Evaluate integrals involving simple functions of the following type by the method of
substitution.
i) ³ f (ax  b) dx ,where f(x) is in standard form.
³ ( f ( x)) f c( x) dx, n z 1
n
ii)

f c( x)
iii) ³ f ( x)
dx

iv) ³ [ f ( g ( x))] g c( x)dx

1.5. Find the integrals of tan x, cot x, sec x and cosec x using the above.
1.6. Evaluate the Standard integrals of the functions of the type
1 1 1
i) , 2 , 2
a  x a  x x  a2
2 2 2

1 1 1
ii) , ,
a2  x2 a2  x2 x2  a2
iii ) a 2  x 2 , a 2  x 2 , x 2  a 2
1.7. Evaluate integrals using decomposition method.
1.8. Solve problems using integration by parts.

³
1.9. Use Bernoulli’s rule for evaluating the integrals of the form u.vdx .

³ e [ f ( x)  f c( x)] dx
x
1.10. Evaluate the integrals of the form
1.11. State the fundamental theorem of integral calculus
1.12. Explain the concept of definite integral.
1.13. Solve simple problems on definite integrals over an interval using the above concept.
1.14. State various properties of definite integrals.
1.15. Evaluate simple problems on definite integrals using the above properties.

110
 Unit -II
Differential Equations
C.O. 2Obtain differential equations and solve differential equations of first order and first degree.
L.O.2.1. Define a Differential equation, its order and degree
2.2 Find order and degree of a given differential equation.
2.3 Form a differential equation by eliminating arbitrary constants.
2.4 Solve the first order and first degree differential equations by variables separable method.
dy
2.5 Solve linear differential equation of the form  Py Q , where P and Q are functions of x
dx
only or constants.
Syllabus for Unit test-I completed

Unit-III
Graph Theory and Probability
C.O. 3Able to define the basic concepts of Graph Theory and use the principles of Probability in
computational systems.
L.O. 3.1 Define a graph.
3.2 Explain the terminology of a graph, vertices, edges, parallel edges, adjacent vertices, self-loops.
3.3 State the significance of Graph Theory in Computer Science applications.
3.4 Explain incidence and degree of a graph.
3.5 Explain the relation between degree and edges of a graph.
3.6 Explain various types of graphs, null graph, trivial graph, simple graph, multigraph, directed
graph, non-directed graph and cyclic graph.
3.7 Define walk, path, circuit, length of a graph, distance between two vertices.
3.8 Explain the formation of adjacency matrix of a graph.
3.9 Recall the basic probability principles
3.10 Define permutations and combinations with examples.
3.11 State addition theorem of probability for two mutually exclusive and exhaustive events.
3.12 Solve simple problems on addition theorem.
3.13 Explain conditional event and conditional probability.
3.14 Solve simple problems on conditional probability.
3.15 Explain dependent, independent events and state Multiplication theorem.
3.16 Solve simple problems on multiplication theorem.
3.17 Explain the concept of priori and posteriori probabilities.
3.18 State Bayes’ theorem and solve simple problems.

Unit-IV
Statistics
C.O. 4 Apply various statistical techniques for data analysis.
L.O. 4.1 Recall the measures of central tendency.
4.2 Explain the significance of measures of dispersion to determine the degree of heterogeneity of
the data.
4.3 Find the measures of dispersion, Range, Mean Deviation and Standard Deviation for ungrouped
data.

111
4.4 Explain the merits and demerits of the above measures of dispersion
4.5 Explain bivariate data.
4.6 Explain the concept of covariance and correlation between two variables.
4.7 Calculate Pearson’s correlation coefficient between two variables.
4.8 Find Spearman’s rank correlation coefficient.
4.9 Explain predictor variables, outcome variables and simple linear regression.
4.10 Calculate the regression coefficients and regression equations with simple problems.
Syllabus for Unit test-II completed
C-23
Engineering Mathematics – II
CM/AIML/AMG/AMT/CAI/CCB/CCN/WD-301
CO/PO – Mapping
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
CO1 3 2 2 2 3 2 2
CO2 3 2 2 2 3 2 2
CO3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
Avg. 3 2.5 2.5 2.5 3 2.5 2.5

3 =Strongly mapped (High), 2 = Moderately mapped (Medium), 1 = Slightly mapped (Low)

Note:
PO5: Appropriate quiz programme may be conducted at intervals and duration as decided by
concerned teacher.
PO6: Seminars on applications of mathematics in various engineering disciplines are to be planned
and conducted.
PO7: Plan activities in such a way that students can visit the library to refer to standard books on
Mathematics and access the latest updates in reputed national and international journals.
Additionally, encourage them to attend seminars and learn mathematical software tools.

PSO1: An ability to understand the basic mathematical concepts and to apply them in computer
engineering discipline.
PSO2: An ability to solve the Engineering problems using latest software tools, along with analytical
skills to arrive at faster and appropriate solutions.
PSO3: Wisdom of social and environmental awareness along with ethical responsibility to have a
successful career as an engineer and to sustain passion and zeal for real world technological
applications.

112
 C-23
Engineering Mathematics – II
CM/AIML/AMG/AMT/CAI/CCB/CCN/WD-301
PO - CO – Mapping strength

CO periods addressing PO in
Mapped with CO Level
PO no column I Remarks
no (1,2 or 3)
Number %
CO1, CO2, 60
1 100% 3
CO3,CO4 (22+8+17+13) >40% Level 3
CO1, CO2, 38 Highly addressed
2 63% 3
CO3,CO4 (8+3+17+10)
CO1, CO2, 38 25% to 40%
3 63% 3
CO3,CO4 (8+3+17+10) Level 2
CO1, CO2, 38 Moderately
4 63% 3
CO3,CO4 (8+3+17+10) addressed
5
6 5% to 25% Level
7 1 Low addressed
CO1, CO2, 60
PSO 1 100% 3 <5% Not
CO3,CO4 (22+8+17+13)
CO1, CO2, 38 addressed
PSO 2 63% 3
CO3,CO4 (8+3+17+10)
CO1, CO2, 38
PSO 3 63% 3
CO3,CO4 (8+3+17+10)

113
 C-23
ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS – II
CM/AIML/AMG/AMT/CAI/CCB/CCN/WD-301
(Common to Computer Engg. and allied branches)

COURSE CONTENTS
Unit-I
Indefinite Integration:
1. Integration regarded as anti-derivative – Indefinite integrals of standard functions. Properties of
indefinite integrals. Integration by substitution or change of variable. Integrals of tan x, cot x, sec x,
cosec x.
Evaluation of integrals which are of the following forms:
1 1 1
i) , 2 , 2
a  x a  x x  a2
2 2 2

1 1 1
ii) , ,
a x
2 2
a x
2 2
x  a2
2

iii ) a 2  x 2 , a 2  x 2 , x 2  a 2
Integration by decomposition of the integrand into simple rational, algebraic functions.
Integration by parts, Bernoulli’s rule and integrals of the form ³ex [f(x) + f c(x)] dx.
Definite integral-fundamental theorem of integral calculus, properties of definite integrals,
evaluation of simple definite integrals.
Unit -II
Differential Equations:
2. Definition of a differential equation-order and degree of a differential equation- formation of
differential equations-solutions of differential equations of first order and first degree using variables
dy
separable method and linear differential equation of the type  Py Q.
dx
Unit-III
Graph Theory and Probability
3. Definition of a graph – terminology of a graph, significance in computer science applications.
Incidence and degree – relationship between degree and edges. Various types of graphs - null
graph, trivial graph, simple graph, multigraph, directed graph, non-directed graph and cyclic graph.
Walk, path, circuit, length of a graph, distance between two vertices. Formation of adjacency
matrix.

Permutations and Combinations, Addition theorem of probability with simple problems,

conditional probability with simple problems, dependent and independent events with
multiplication theorem – simple problems, priori and posteriori probability – Baye’s theorem with
simple problems.

114
 Unit III
Statistics
4. Measures of dispersion – range, mean deviation and standard deviation of ungrouped data – merits
and demerits. Bivariate data – correlation, Pearson’s correlation coefficient, Spearman’s rank
correlation coefficient. Predictor and outcome variables – simple linear regression coefficients and
regression equations.

Textbook:

Engineering Mathematics-II, a textbook for second year third semester diploma courses,
prepared & prescribed by SBTET, AP.

Reference Books:
1. B.S. Grewal, Higher Engineering Mathematics, Khanna Publishers.
2. Schaum’s Outlines Differential Equations, Richard Bronson & Gabriel B. Costa
3. Trembley and Manohar, Discrete Mathematical Structures with Applications to Computer
Science, Tata-McGraw-Hill.
4. Narsing Deo, Graph Theory, PHI India.
5. Schaum's Outline: Introduction to Probability and Statistics, Seymour Lipschutz & John J.
Schiller.

C-23
Engineering Mathematics – II
CM/AIML/AMG/AMT/CAI/CCB/CCN/WD-301
Unit Test Syllabus

Unit Test Syllabus

Unit Test-I From L.O 1.1 to L.O 2.5

Unit Test-II FromL.O 3.1 to L.O 4.10

115
Course code Course Title No. of Total No. of Marks for FA Marks for SA
Periods/Weeks periods
AMG-302 Multimedia 4 60 20 80

TIME SCHEDULE

S.N CHAPTE Chapter/ No. of MAR SHORT ESSAY CO’s Mapped

o. R Unit Title Periods KS QUESTION QUEST
NO S IONS
1. 1 Introduction to 6 2 1 CO1
Multimedia 13

2. 2 Representation 19 29 2 1 CO1,CO2
of Multimedia
Objects
3. 3 Multimedia 15 29 2 2 CO1,CO2,CO3
Editing and
Compression
technology
4. 4 Multimedia 8 13 2 2 CO1,CO2,CO3,C
Application O4
Design
5. 5 Multimedia 12 26 2 2 CO1,CO2,
Authoring and CO3,CO4,CO5
Publishing
Total Periods 60 110 10 8

x Describe the components and features of Multimedia

x Explain Multimedia file formats
Course x Apply editing and compression techniques in multimedia
Objectives application development
x Analyse various design concepts in Multimedia application
x Apply various Multimedia authoring and publishing tools

CO NO COURSEOUTCOMES
CO1 AMG-302.1 Explain components, features and requirements of Multimedia
CO2 AMG-302.2 Explain different Multimedia file formats
CO3 AMG-302.3 Apply image editing and compression techniques
CO4 AMG-302.4 Explain Multimedia application design concepts
CO5 AMG-302.5 Applying Multimedia authoring and publishing tools
CO-PO/PSO Matrix:

CONO. PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
AM-302.1 3 3 1 1
AM-302.2 1 2 2 1 3 1 3 1
AM-302.3 3 1 1 1 1 3 1 1
AM-302.4 3 2 2 1 1 2 1 2
AM-302.5 3 2 1 1 1 2 1 2
Average 2.7 1.5 2 1.25 1.3 1.7 1.25 2.2 1.3 1.3
3=Strongly mapped, 2=moderately mapped, 1=slightly mapped

116
Learning Outcomes:

1.0 Introduction to Multimedia

1.1 Definemultimedia
1.2 List the multimedia Objects.
1.3 Define Hyper text and Hyper media
1.4 List the applications of multimedia
1.5 List the components of a Multimedia System
1.6 State the Desirable features for a multimedia system.
1.7 List the requirements of multimedia communication
2.0 Multimedia Objects.

2.1. Representation of Analog Signals

2.1.1 Describe Analog to digital(A/D) Sampling
2.1.2 Describe Analog to digital(A/D) quantization
2.2 Text object
2.2.1 Describe the measurement of font type
2.2.2 Recognize the importance of word choice
2.2.3 Describe the difference between a type face and a font
2.2.4 List at least three attributes of a font, for example,
upper/lowercase, serif/sans serif, PostScript/TrueType/Open Type
2.2.5 Discuss the importance of text and ways text can
be leveraged in multimedia presentations
2.3 Graphics object
2.3.1 Explain Raster and Vector representations
2.3.2 Describe aliasing problems
2.4 Image object
2.4.1 Define bit depth
2.4.2 Describe the resolution of an image
2.4.3 Describe the use of colors(RGB,CMYK,HSB) in multimedia
2.4.4 Explain popular image file formats BMP,GIF,TIFF,PNG,JPEG.
2.5 Audio object
2.5.1Describe the difference between speech and wideband audio
2.5.2 Define the terms sampling rate and aliasing
2.5.3 State the importance of Quantisation
2.5.4 Explain popular audio file formats MP3, WMA, WAV, MIDI.
2.6 Video object
2.6.1 Discuss the importance of frame rate and resolution .
2.6.2 Compare interlaced and non-interlaced video
2.6.3 Explain colour planes (YCBCR, YUV).
2.6.4 Explain popular video broadcast standards PAL, NTSC, SECAM
2.6.5 Explain HD Video 2.6.6 State the importance of 3D TV
2.6.7 Explain video representation formats-AVI ,MPEG ,QuickTime ,real video(.rm).
3.0 Multimedia Editing and Compression Technology
3.1 Multimedia Editing
3.1.1 List and explain the software tools of Digital Audio
3.1.2 List and explain the software tools of Music Sequencing and Notation
3.1.3 List and explain the software tools of Image/Graphics Editing.
3.1.4 List and Explain the software tools of Video Editing (Linear, Non-Linear)
3.1.5 State the importance of Subtitling.
117
3.2 Compression Technology
3.2.1 Concept of lossy and lossless compression
3.2.1.1 Basics of information theory
3.2.1.2 Describe the difference between Run-length coding and Variable length coding
3.2.1.3 Define distortion measure
3.2.1.4 Compare lossy and lossless compression
3.2.2 Illustrate the Rate-distortion theory
3.2.3 Basics of image compression
3.2.3.1 Define JPEG Standard
3.2.3.2 List the main Steps in JPEG Image Compression
3.2.3.3 List the various modes supported by JPEG standard
3.2.3.4 List the main Steps of JPEG2000 Image Compression(The EBCOT algorithm)
3.2.4 Basics of audio compression
3.2.4.1 Describe the process of MP3 audio compression.
3.2.4.2 Describe the process of MP4 audio compression.
3.2.5 Basics of video compression
3.2.5.1 Describe the process of MPEG video compression.
3.2.5.2 Describe the process of H.264 video compression.
4. Multimedia Application Design
4.1 List and explain various ways for Content design effectively.
4.2 Explain the various issues in technical design
4.3 Explain various ways for effective visual design
4.4 Explain design metaphors with suitable examples
5. Multimedia Authoring and Publishing
5.1 Define Authoring System
5.2 List the uses of an Authoring System
5.3 Define Authoring Metaphor
5.4 Describe the functioning of Authoring Metaphor
5.5 List the different Metaphors
5.6 Explain Offline Publishing by using Flash with an example.
5.7 Explain Offline Publishing by using PowerPoint with an example.
5.8 Explain Online Publishing by using HTML5 with an example.
5.9 Explain Online Publishing by using Dreamweaver with an example.

COURSE CONTENT

1. Introduction to Multimedia: Definition of Multimedia- Multimedia Objects-. Definition of

Hypertext and Hypermedia- Applications- Components of a Multimedia System- Desirable
features for a multimedia system- requirements of multimedia communication.

2. Representation of Multimedia Objects: Representation of Analog Signals- A/D:Sampling and

quantization, Text: Font and their representation(bimap, truetype), Graphics:Raster and Vector
representation, aliasing problems, Image: (bitdepth, resolution, color(RGB, CMYK, HSB),
introduction to BMP, GIF, TIFF, PNG and JPEG Formats),Audio:(speech and wideband audio,
sampling rate and aliasing, quantisation, introduction to MP3, WMA, WAV, MIDI etc.
Video:(frame rate and resolution, interlaced and non-interlace dvideo, colour planes(YCBCR,
YUV), Video broadcast standards(PAL, ntsc, secam), HDVideo, 3D TV, Video representation-AVI,
MPEG, QuickTime, real video(.rm).

118
3. Multimedia Editing: Digital Audio-Music, Sequencing and Notation, Image/Graphics Editing-
Video Editing(Linear, Non-Linear), Subtitling .
Introduction to Compression Technology: Concept of lossy and loss less compression, Concept
of rate – distortion characteristics, Basics of image compression, Basics of audio compression
and Basics of video compression.

4. Multimedia Application Design: Content design, technical design, visual design, design metaphors,
example studies, and interactivity.

5. Multimedia Authoring and Publishing: Definition of an Authoring System, uses of an authoring system,
Definition and functioning of Authoring Metaphor, Different Metaphors Offline Publishing-Flash,
PowerPoint, Online Publishing-HTML5,Dreamweaver.

REFERENCE BOOKS

1. An Introduction to Multimedia Authoring, A. Eliens

2. Fundamentals of Multimedia, Prentice Hall/Pearson, Ze-Nion-Li & Mark S.Drew
3. Multimedia and Animation, V.K. Jain, Khanna Publishing House, Edition 2018
4. Fundamentals of Multimedia, Ramesh Bangia, Khanna Book Publishing Co., N. Delhi (2007)

Table specifying the scope of syllabus to be covered for unit tests

Unit Test Learning outcomes to be covered

Unittest-1 From 1.1 to 2.6
Unittest-2 From 3.1 to 5.9

119
Course code Course Title No. of Total No. of Marks for FA Marks for SA
Periods/Weeks periods
AMG-303 GRAPHIC 5 75 20 80
DESIGNING

TIME SCHEDULE
S.N CHAPTE Chapter/ No. of MAR SHORT ESSAY CO’s Mapped
o. R Unit Title Periods KS QUESTION QUEST
NO S IONS
1. 1 Photoshop 15 2 1 CO1
Workspace and 16
Work Flow
2. 2 Masking and 15 26 2 2 CO2
Color
Correction
3. 3 Illustrator user 15 26 2 2 ,CO3
interface &
Drawing Tools
4. 4 Designing 15 26 2 2 CO4
Layout &
printing process
5. 5 Designing for 15 16 2 1 CO5
Media
Total Periods 75 110 10 8

x Understand the visual art and design

x Expertise in typography , Page layout designing and Interface
designing

Course Objectives x Able to work with Logo designs, Colouring techniques and
Advertisement designing
x Capable of Working various designing software’s
x Able to handle publishing projects to design projects

CO NO COURSE OUTCOMES
CO1 AMG-303.1 Use Photoshop Menus, shortcut keys, IDE environment and to work with
various tools.
CO2 AMG-303.2 Apply with colours and masking, layers, overlaying, images and sharpness
along with applying filters and effects.
CO3 AMG-303.3 Applying user interface & drawing tools and working images and symbols.

CO4 AMG-303.4 Practice designing layouts and working with various printing processes.

CO5 AMG-303.5 Develop Hard Print media documents such as newspapers, ads, banners etc..

120
COURSE OBJECTIVES

1.0 Photoshop Workspace and Work Flow

1.1. Define the terms Graphics, Photoshop
1.2. List elements of Photoshop Works pace
1.3. Describe the usage of panels and Menus.
1.4. List Tools and state their Uses
1.5. Explain the usage of Short Cut Keys
1.6. Explain the usage of Preset Manager
1.7. State the purpose of Ruler, Grid and Guides.
1.8. Changing Image Size and Resolution
1.9. Explain Creation, Opening and Importing of Images
1.10. Describe the Conversion of Images into Bitmap
1.11. Explain the Image Repair and Restoration
1.12. Describe Image Reshape and Transformation
1.13. State the purpose of Brushes and Patterns
1.14. List the Drawing Shapes and state their uses
1.15. Give the steps to practice Pen Tool
1.16. Explain the Painting
2.0 Masking and Color Correction
2.1. Define layer and state the uses
2.2. Describe the Operations on layers
2.2.1. Selecting/un Selecting layers
2.2.2. grouping/Un grouping layers
2.2.3. Linking layers
2.2.4. Moving layers
2.2.5. Stacking layers
2.2.6. Locking of Layers
2.2.7. Masking/un masking of Layers
2.2.8. ClippingMasks
2.3. Explain Layer Effects and Styles
2.4. How to combine images with Auto-Blended Layers
2.5. Write the steps to use overlaying images
2.6. Write the steps to use the Image Colour Corrections
2.7. State the purpose of Hue and Saturation
2.8. Describe the Exposure Blur and Sharpness
2.9. Define filter and list the types of filters
2.10. Write the steps to create montages
2.11. Explain the Saving feathered borders
2.12. Explain the Creating and saving paths
2.13. Write the steps to add and delete points
2.14. State the procedure to Converting selection to paths
2.15. Describe the Exporting paths to Quark
2.16. Introduction to Photoshop Filters-
2.17. State the Uses of filters in

121
 2.17.1. Blurring and sharpening
2.17.2. Synthesizing texture
2.18. Creation of common file types
2.19. Write the steps for setting transparency
2.20. List types of Images for print
2.21. List types of Images for the web
2.22. State the Advantages of various formats
2.23. Write the steps to convert the image type
2.24. Explain the scanner type’s controls
3.0 Illustrator the user interface &Drawing Tools:
3.1 Explain the Illustrator environment and Work area
3.2 Explain setting up a page
3.3 Explain viewing the document and working in artwork or preview modes
3.4 State the use of Grids, guides and objects
3.5 Explain following Guides operations
3.5.1 Adding and Deleting
3.5.2 Locking and Unlocking
3.5.3 Positioning
3.6. Practice to Draw and modify various basic shapes
3.7. Explain usage of pen and pencil tools
3.8. Explain following
3.8.1. Creation of path
3.8.2. Combining paths
3.8.3. Grouping paths
3.8.4. Applying Spline Curves
3.8.5. Compound Path
3.9. Apply Stroke and Fill colours
3.10. List types and state the uses of Paintbrushes
3.11. Write steps to Set up Text Attributes
3.12. Explain the Wrapping Paragraph and Character Styles
3.13. State steps to Use an illustrator Path to Mask
3.14. Give Steps to Creation of Custom Symbols Using Symbol Tools
3.15. Explain the process ofAccessing Symbol Libraries
3.16. Describe the Manipulating and Duplicating Symbols
3.17. Give steps to Replacing All Instances of a Symbol
3.18. State the steps to Saving Default Symbols
3.19. Describe the 3D Effects and Visualizing
3.20. State use of the Opacity Masks
3.21. Explain the Clipping Masks
3.22. Explain the Graphic Styles Exporting Artwork
4.0. Designing Layout & printing process
4.1. State the terms designing and creativity
4.2. List the Steps in Designing
4.3. List the Steps in Creativity

122
4.4. Define the term Typography
4.5. List and Explain the Visual Ingredients of Graphic Design
4.6. List various Design Considerations
4.7. State Purpose and list Advantages of Symbols Layout
4.8. State Purpose and list Advantages of Logos Layout
4.9. Describe the Layout Styles and Layout Components
4.10. Stages in Preparing a Layout
4.10.1. Marking-Up;
4.10.2. Dummy
4.10.3. Explain any Case Study.
4.11. Define printing
4.12. Explain the process of printing design
4.13. List Types of Printing Processes
4.14. Explain the process of Printing in Letterpress
4.15. Explain the process of Printing in Offset
4.16. Explain the process of Printing in Gravure
4.17. Explain the process of Printing in Flexography
4.18. Explain the process of Printing in Screen Printing
4.19. Explain Non-impact Printing
4.20. Give the Steps to Image Carrier Preparation For Different Types Of Printing Process
5.0 Designing for Media
5.1. Explain the process of Designing Newspapers
5.2. Describe the process of Designing Booklets with an Example
5.3. Explain the process of Designing Magazines
5.4. Demonstrate the process of Designing Business Publications
5.5. Explain the process of Designing Banners& Posters
5.6. Describe the process of Designing Advertisement
5.7. Demonstrate the process of Designing Pamphlets (like polycet campaign)
5.8. Explain the process of Designing Transit
5.9. Explain the process of Designing Interactive Web and Maps
5.10. Explain Relationship between designer, customer and printer
5.11. Explain Selection and co-Ordination of Production Process
5.12. List the Limitations of Printing Process
5.13. Explain the process of Binding and finishing

COURSE CONTENT

1. Photoshop Workspace and Work Flow

Basics of Works pace– Panels and Menus - Tools and Uses – Short Cut Keys – Preset Manager –
Ruler – Grid and Guides – Image Size and Resolution – Creation, Opening and Importing of
Images - Conversion of Images into Bitmap – Repair and Restoration – Reshape and
Transformation – Brushes and Patterns – Drawing Shapes – Pen Tool and their Uses – Painting

123
2. Masking and Color Correction
Basics of Layers – Managing Selecting, grouping, Linking, Moving, Stacking and Locking of Layers
– Masking of Layers and Editing – Layers with Clipping Masks – Layer Effects and Styles –
Combining images with Auto-Blended Layers – Overlaying images –Image Color Corrections -
Hue and Saturation – Exposure Blur and Sharpness
Filters and Effects: Creating montages-Saving feathered borders – Creating and saving paths –
Adding and deleting points-Converting selection to paths – Exporting paths to Quark –
Introduction to Photoshop Filters-Tips on using filters-Blurring and sharpening –Synthesizing
texture- Creating common file types – Setting transparency – Images for print-Images for the
web – Advantages of various formats – Converting the image type – Overview of scanner types
controls
3. Illustrator user interface &Drawing Tools:
Illustrator environment and Work area –Page setup – Viewing the document and working in
artwork or preview modes – Grids, guides, objects – Adding and using guidelines - locking and
unlocking, positioning – Drawing and modifying basic shapes –Using the pen and pencil tools
– to create paths- Combining, Grouping – Spline Curves – Compound Path – Applying Stroke
and Fill colours - Filling –Using paintbrushes
Working With Images &Symbols: SettingText Attributes – Wrapping Paragraph and Character
Styles – Using an illustrator Path to Mask - Creation of Custom Symbols Using Symbol Tools
- Accessing Symbol Libraries-Manipulating and Duplicating Symbols - Replacing All Instances of
a Symbol - Saving Default Symbols - 3D Effects and Visualizing - Opacity Masks - Clipping Masks
- Graphic Styles Exporting Artwork
4. Designing Layout & printing process
Basic Concept Of Designing, Creativity, Steps In Creativity; Typography; Visual Ingredients Of
Graphic Design; Design Consideration; Symbols And Logos Layout – Purpose & Advantages;
Layout Styles; Layout Components; Stages In Preparing A Layout; Marking-Up; Dummy, Case
Studies.
Printing process: Types Of Process – Letterpress, Offset, Gravure, Flexography, Screen Printing
And Nonimpact Printing Processes; Introduction To Image Carrier Preparation For Different
Types Of Printing Process

5. Designing for Media

Designing for Newspapers, Booklets, Magazines, and Business Publications, Banners & Posters,
Advertising, Pamphlets, Transit, Interactive, Web and Maps. Case Studies. Design management
& production planning: Relationship between designer, customer and printer; selection and co-
Ordination of Production Process; Limitation of Printing Process, Binding, finishing
CO-PO/PSO MATRIX

CO NO. PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
AMG-303.1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 3
AMG-303.2 2 2 2 1 1 2 2 1 3
AMG-303.3 2 3 3 1 3 2 3 1 3 3
AMG-303.4 2 3 2 1 1 2 3 1 3 3
AMG-303.5 2 3 2 1 3 3 1 3 3
Average 1.8 2.4 2 1 1.8 2 2.6 1 3 3
3=strongly mapped, 2=moderately mapped, 1=slightly mapped

124
REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. Adobe Photoshop cs4 or higher, by Jennifer smith,Focal press,2010 second edition
2. Photoshop bible cs5, by Brad dayley, Oriley publication, 2011 first Edition or latter.
3. Photoshop cs5 illustrator, by Chirsbotello, Delmar learine, 2010 Second Edition or higher
versions

Table specifying the scope of syllabus to be covered for unit tests

Unit Test Learning outcomes to be covered

Unit test-1 From 1.1 to 3.11
Unit test-2 From 3.12 to 5.13

125
 DIPLOMA IN 3D ANIMATION AND GRAPHICS ENGINEERING
Course code Course Title No. of Total No. of Marks for FA Marks for SA
Periods/Weeks periods
2D Digital
AMG-304 Animation 4 60 20 80

TIME SCHEDULE
S.N CHAPTE Chapter/ No. of MAR SHORT ESSAY CO’s Mapped
o. R Unit Title Periods KS QUESTION QUEST
NO S IONS
1. 1 FLASH 15 2 1 CO1
INTRODUCTION 16

2. 2 DIGITAL 9 13 1 1 CO1,CO2
CONVERSION
3. 3 INTRODUCTION 12 29 3 2 CO1,CO2,CO3
TOANIMATION
4. 4 FLASH 12 26 2 2 CO1,CO2,CO3,
APPLICATIONS CO4
5. 5 CHARACTER 12 16 2 1 CO1,CO2,CO3,
ANIMATION CO4,CO5
Total Periods 60 110 10 8

x describe the work flow of digital 2d animation

x Handling various 2d software’s like Flash with animation principles and color
theory
Course x Creating Background & layout
Objectives x Handling scanning & processing along with Character design
x Working with key roles of 2-D animation, composing and debugging
x Describe animating using various characters designs

CO NO COURSE OUTCOMES
CO1 AMG-304.1 Explain IDE and tools of Flash and to work with color styles and drawing modes.
CO2 AMG-304.2 Creating characters by applying various backgrounds and sequences
CO3 AMG-304.3 Demonstrate timeline aspects , key frAGes and motions in producing animations.
CO4 AMG-304.4 Applying Symbols and animation effects
CO5 AMG-304.5 Animating various characters and exporting images and videos.
CO-PO/PSO MATRIX

CO NO. PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
CO1 2 2 2 2 1 2 3 1
CO2 2 3 2 3 2
CO3 2 2 2 3 3
CO4 3 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3
CO5 2 3 2 2 3 3 3
AVERAGE 2 2.3 2.4 2 2 2 2.3 2.8 2.75 2.3

3=Strongly mapped , 2=moderately mapped, 1=slightly mapped

126
Learning Outcomes

1.0 Flash Introduction

1.1 Introduction to Flash
1.2 Explain the components of IDE
1.3 Describe flash workspace
1.4 State the usage of Tools panel
1.4.1 selection (move),
1.4.2 free transform (scale, rotate),
1.4.3 line,
1.4.4 lasso,
1.4.5 magic wand,
1.4.6 shape,
1.4.7 fill,
1.4.8 gradient,
1.4.9 erase,
1.4.10 pencil,
1.4.11 pen,
1.4.12 brush and more.
1.5 Quote shortcut keys to select or perform various actions of tools
1.6 working with objects
1.6.1 creating objects
1.6.2 Modifying objects
1.6.3 Moving objects
1.7 Explain the importance of flash timeline and its effects
1.8 Describe the features of timeline.
1.9 Describe library and its features
1.10 Discuss the uses and importance of color palette
1.11 Discuss about color mixing and its uses
1.12 Explain different solid colors
1.13 Explain menus
1.14 Explain the process of tracing an object
1.15 List various drawing modes
1.16 Explain drawing modes
1.17 Define color gradients or color transitions
1.18 Discuss about Gradient adjustment
1.19 Discuss about bitmap images .
1.20 Discus about creation of bitmap files.
1.21 Discuss the steps to create pattern
1.22 Describe the flash document settings.
2.0 Digital Conversion
2.1 Describe the terms scanning, import, import as sequence, cleanup, Quick Trace
2.2 Explain the usage of brush too with its properties - smooth, shape, size and color
2.3 Explain the usage of Paint Bucket tool with properties - stroke, style, scale, width and drag fill
2.4 Describe paint bucket cut-color
2.5 Explain the steps to create realistic effects.
2.6 Explain the process of adding lights and shadows to the scene.
2.7 Describe character designing and character build
2.8 Explain the process of creating background
2.9 Explain the process of creating environment lighting
2.10 Differentiate between grid and guide.
2.11 Define Perspective Grid and

127
2.12 Explain the steps to add perspective grids in flash animation file
3.0 Introduction to Animation
3.1 List the properties of timeline
3.2 Explain properties of timeline
3.3 List timeline menus.
3.4 Explain timeline menus.
3.5 Define the terms frame, key-frame, blank key frame and differentiate between them
3.6 Write the steps to insert key frame or blank key frame
3.7 Discuss about motion tween, shape motion Tween and differentiate
3.8 Describe layer with its importance
3.9 State the purpose of motion guide layer
3.10 Write the procedure to copy frame and motion
3.11 Describe how to do image scaling and squeezing in Flash.
3.12 Describe clip animation
3.13 Describe frame-by-frame animation
3.14 Write the procedure to create frame by frame animation (5)
3.15 Describe tweening animation
3.16 Write the procedure to create tween based animation
3.17 Explain different editing modes
3.18 Describe primary and secondary action
3.19 Explain 12 principles of animation.
4.0 Flash Applications
4.1 Define symbol in flash
4.2 List various symbols
4.3 Differentiate among symbols
4.4 Explain different symbols and differentiate
4.5 Explain the procedure to edit a symbol in symbol-editing mode.
4.6 Write the steps to create graphic symbol in flash
4.7 Write the steps to create movie clip symbol in flash
4.8 Write the steps to create button symbol in flash
4.9 Write the steps to modify already existing symbol
4.10 Explain the steps to duplicate symbol
4.11 Explain the steps to swap symbol
4.12 Write the procedure to create symbol based animation
4.13 Describe the concept of creating multiple actions
4.14 List the effects that can be added to timeline and explain them
4.15 Explain the procedure to create timeline effects- Blur Effect, Transition Effect, Drop Shadow
Effect, Expand Effect, Transform Effect, Drop Shadow Effect, Explode Effect
4.16 Explain the procedure to create timeline fade on and fade out effects
5.0 Character Animation
5.1 Describe the concept of character design
5.2 State the importance of character design
5.3 Write the steps to build a character
5.4 Explain the procedure to separate elements of a built character..
5.5 Explain the steps for adding posses in symbols
5.6 Describe the concept of rigging
5.7 Differentiate between rigging and animation.
5.8 Explain the procedure to apply character rigging constraints
5.8.1 Joints
5.8.2 Apply Constrains
5.8.3 Shape hints
5.8.4 Ease In

128
 5.8.5 Ease Out
5.8.6 Walk
5.8.7 Run
5.8.8 Jump
5.8.9 Push
5.8.10 Pull
5.8.11 Loop Action
5.8.12 Play Once
5.8.13 Select Frame
5.8.14 Facial Expressions
5.8.15 Eye Blink
5.8.16 Dialogue
5.8.17 Audio sync
5.9 Explain the process of exporting image and video
5.10 Explain the process of exporting video as sequence of image
5.11 Explain the process of exporting settings
5.12 Explain the steps to take output in flash

COURSE CONTENT

1. Flash Introduction
Introduction- IDE- Tools Panel – Uses of Tool and Properties - working with Objects –– Timeline –
Library – Color mixing– Different solid Colors– Menus –Object tracing -Drawing mode – Gradient
adjustment – Bitmap – Pattern Creation – Document settings
2. Digital Conversion
Scanning – Import – Import as Sequence – Clean up – Quick Trace – Brush tool Properties – Smooth
– Shape – Size – Color apply – Paint Bucket Properties – Cut Color – Realistic – Light and Shade –
Character designing – Character Build – Back ground Creation – Environment Lighting –
Perspective – Grid – Guide
3. Introduction to Animation
Time line Properties – Timeline Menus – Key frame – Insert Key frame – Blank Key Frame – Create
Motion Tween – Shape Motion Tween –layer- Motion Guide Layer – Copy Frame and Motion –
Clip Animation – Frame by frame animation – Different Edit Modes –primary and secondary
avtions-12 principles of animation-
4. Flash Applications
Symbols Introduction – Types of symbols – Symbol Edit Mode – Create symbol – Re Modified
Symbol – Duplicate Symbol – Swap Symbol – Symbol Based Animation – Create Multiple Action –
Adding Effects to Time line – Transition – Blur – Glow – Fade On – FadeOut
5. Character Animation
Character Design – Character Build – Separate Elements - Adding Posses in Symbol – Rigging –
Apply Joints – Apply Constrains – Shape hints – Ease In – Ease Out – Walk – Run – Jump – Push –
Pull – Loop Action – Play Once – Select Frame – Facial Expressions – Eye Blink – Dialogue – Audio
sync – Export as Image and Video – Export as Sequence – Export Settings – Take Output

REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Adobe flash professional cc class room book, by Adobe creative team, Adobe press, 2013 -
First Edition
2. Adobe flash professional, by Adobe creative team, Adobe press, 2012 - First Edition
3. Action script 3.o adobe cs5 pro, by Adobe creative team, Adobe press, 2010 - First Edition

129
Table specifying the scope of syllabus to be covered for unit tests

Unit Test Learning outcomes to be covered

Unit test-1 From 1.1 to 3.9
Unit test-2 From 3.10 to 5.12

130
 AMG-305 Graphics Programming through Java

No. of Total No. of

Course code Course Title Marks for FA Marks for SA
Periods/Weeks periods
Graphics
AMG-305
Programming 5 75 20 80
through Java

TIME SCHEDULE
S.N CHAPTE Chapter/ No. of MAR SHORT ESSAY CO’s Mapped
o. R Unit Title Periods KS QUESTION QUEST
NO S IONS
1. 1 Introduction to 12 2 1 CO1,CO2
Java , Concepts 16
of Class and
Objects
2. 2 Concepts of 12 13 1 1 CO2
inheritance,
Interfaces and
Packages
3. 3 Exception 10 29 3 2 CO3
handling and
Multi-
threaded
programming.

4. 4 Applets, AWT 13 26 2 2 CO4

and Event
Handling
5. 5 Java Swings 13 16 2 1 CO4,CO5
Total Periods 60 110 10 8

i) To know applying object oriented programming paradig min problem solving on

the plat form of Sun Microsystems.
Course ii) Able to design multi-tasking application with the knowledge of multi-threading.
Objectives iii) Familiarized to develop graphics and graphical user interface with event handling
mechanism

CO NO COURSE OUTCOMES
Define, understand, differentiate the Object Oriented
CO1 AMG-305.1
concepts and Java Programming concepts.
Apply object oriented concepts on real time scenarios.
CO2 AMG-305.2
Use Exception handling and multithreading mechanisms to create
CO3 AMG-305.3
efficient of two are applications.
Usage of Applets, AWT and Event Handling
CO4 AMG-305.4
Knowing about Swings
CO5 AMG-305.5

131
 CO-PO/PSOMatrix

CONO. PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3

AMG-305.1 2 1 1 2 2 1 2 2 2

AMG-305.2 1 3 3 3 1 3 1 1 3 1

AMG-305.3 2 3 2 2 3 1 1 3 3

AMG-305.4 1 1 3 2 2 3 2 2 3 2

AMG-305.5 3 3 3 3 2 3 2 2 3 3

Average 1.75 2 2.4 2.4 1.75 2.8 1.4 1.6 2.8 2.2
3=Strongly mapped, 2=moderately mapped, 1= slightly mapped

Learning Outcomes:

1. O OPs and Basics of java

1.1 Procedure oriented programming - Object oriented paradigm

1.2 Basic concepts of object oriented programming
1.3 Describe history and importance of Java in Internet programming.
1.4 Explain features of Java.
1.5 Define Byte codes of Java and JVM.
1.6 Give the steps to write and execute a Java program.
1.7 Explain primitive at a types of java.
1.8 Describe conversion and casting features.
1.9 Explain one-dimensional and two–dimensional arrays and give example programs.
1.10 Describe how to create classes and objects.
1.11 Apply the Usage of new operator and methods.
1.12 Explain usage of constructors with example programs.
1.13 Apply method over loading and constructor over loading in applications.
1.14 Describe usage of ‘this’ pointer,
1.15 Explain Usage of static in variables, methods, and blocks with example.
1.16 Know about string classes.
1.17 Usage of command-line arguments.
1.18 Describe the importance of final keyword.
2. Concepts of in heritance, overriding, Interfaces and Packages
2.1 Explain in heritance with an example program.
2.2 Illustrate how to implement multi level in heritance with an example program.
2.3 Explain method over riding and usage of super key word.
2.4 Describe concept of Inter faces.
2.5 Differences between abstract classes and interface.
2.6 Explain implementation of inter faces with sample program.
2.7 Define a package.

132
2.8 Explain the concept of class path.
2.9 Describe concept of Access protection.
2.10 Illustrate the mechanism of importing packages.
2.11 Develop simple application to design packages with sample programs.
3. Exception handling and Multi-threaded programming
3.1 Describe sources of errors.
3.2 Give advantages of Exception handling.
3.3 Explain types of exceptions Checked and Unchecked
3.4 Write sample programs to make use of Try, Catch, Finally, Throw,Throws
3.5 Explain concept tof Multi-catch statements with example.
a. Explain how to write nested try in exception handling with example.
b. Describe built in exceptions.
c. Describe multi threading.
d. Explain Thread life cycle and states
e. Explain how to Creating single thread with example program.
f. Explain how to Creating multi thread with example program.
g. Illustrate thread priorities in multiple threads with an example.
h. Describe the concept to f synchronization with example program.
i. Explain Inter thread communication with example program.
j. Explain deadlock.
4. Applets, AWT, Event Handling.
Describe the basics of Applets–Life cycle of an applet.
Describe steps for design and execute sample applet program
Explain Graphics class methods Update()Paint(),Drawing Lines, Rectangle, circles, polygons
Describe the process of Working with Color Font classes.
Describe AWT classes
Explain how to design Frame window with example.
Describe Types of Events
List and explain sources of events.
List and explain different event classes.
List and explain event listener interfaces
Demonstrate event handling mechanism.
Demonstrate handling mouse events with sample program.
Demonstrate handling key board events with sample program.
Explain how to use the following AWT controls in applet programming.
a. Labels.
b. Buttons.
c. Text Fields
d. Checkboxes.
e. Lists.
f. Choice
g. Scrollbars.
5. Introduction to Swing
5.1 Describe the Differences between AWT and Swing
5.2 List and explain different Containers in Swing
5.3 List and explain different Components in Swing
5.4 Explain using of check boxes, radio buttons, Combo Boxes, panes
5.5 Demonstate simple Swing applications using Swing

133
COURSECONTENTS

1. Object oriented programming concepts & Basics of java Evolution of OOP’s - Procedure
oriented programming - Object oriented paradigm – basic concepts of object oriented
programming. Importance of Java to Internet – Byte codes. Features of Java: OOPS concepts –
Data types –type conversions – casting – Arrays. Usage of classes – objects – new –methods –
constructors – method overloading, string classes – command line arguments-static members-
this pointer
2. Concepts Inheritance Overriding Interfaces and Package:-Usages of Inheritance:
inheritance super class, sub classes – Multi level inheritance – super keyword -overriding
–Abstract classes-Interfaces-Packages.

3. Exception Handling and Multi threading: – Exception handling: Source of errors – error
handling –Exception handling-Multi catch statements- Define thread – life cycle of thread -
Multi threading –Synchronization-Inter thread communication–Dead locks–Thread properties.

4. Applets, AWT and Event Handling: Basics of Applets – life cycle of an applet- AWT classes
-Working with Graphics class-Methods of Graphics class - Event classes-Listener
interfaces-keyboard and Mouse events-AWT controls-Buttons-Text Fields-Check Box-List

5. Introduction to Swing : Differences between AWT and Swing ,Containers in Swing–J frame,
J Applet, J Dialog, J Panel, Components in Swing- J button, J Label, J Text Field, J Text Area,,
check boxes, radio buttons, Combo Boxes, Tabbed Panes, Scroll Panes, simple Swing applications.
-

REFERENCE BOOKS

1. The complete reference Java–Pattrick Naughten, Herbert Schildt TMH Company Limited,
New Delhi.
2. Programming in JAVA--P. Radhakrishna, University Press
3. Programming in Java--Muthu- Thomson
4. Java Foundations of Programming–NIIT,PHI
5. Programming with Java--Balagurusamy,TMH

Table specifying the scope of syllabus to be covered for unit tests

Unit Test Learning out comes to be covered

Unittest-1 From1.1to3.4
Unittest-2 From3.5to5.5

134
 AMG-306 GRAPHIC DESIGNIING LAB

No. of Total No. of

Course code Course Title Marks for FA Marks for SA
Periods/Weeks periods
GRAPHIC
AMG-306 DESIGNIING 3 45 40 60
LAB

GUIDE LINES:
All the exercises provided in the list of practical's should be
completed and submitted during the semester examination.
In order to develop skill in mastering creativity, every student should
be made to practice thoroughly.
The external examiners are requested to ensure that a single
practical oriented question should not be given to more than three
students while admitting a batch of 30 students during Board
Examination.

Required Infrastructure (Software, Hardware and other Equipment) to be procured as per C-23:

SNO Hardware / Equipment Needed Software Needed

1 Desktop Systems: 1. Operating System:
Microsoft Windows 10
Configuration: professional-64 bit
1. Processor :: AMD Ryzen 9 3900X Or any other (Minimum)
equivalent intel/Motorola etc.. processor or
Above 2.Animation and Graphics
2. Mother Board: AMD 400/500 or its equivalent or Software
above a. Adobe master
3. RAM: 8GB(or above) dual channel DDR4 collection cs6 (or
4. HDD: 500GM (SSD)/1TB(or above) Above)
5. Graphics Card: Aorus GeForce RTX 2080 Ti Xtreme b. Autodesk MAYA
(or equivalent ) c. Autodesk 3DS MAX.
6. Monitor: 17” or above
7. Multimedia Devices like Mic, Head Phones /
Speakers , USB Web camera or USB Digital Video
Camera
8. Color Photo Scanner and Printer

135
 S No Chapter/ Unit Title No. of COs Mapped
Periods

1. 6 CO1
Photoshop Workspace and Work Flow
2. 6 CO2
Masking and Color Correction
3. 9 CO3
Illustrator user interface & Drawing Tools
4. 9 CO4
Designing Layout & printing process
5. 15 CO5
Designing for Media
Total 45

Upon completion of the course the student shall be able to

1. Installation of Photoshop CS5/CS6 software.

2. Practice all menus, tools in Photoshop layout and exercise various
options like present manager, image related operations ... etc.
3. Practice various options like pen tool, brushes, patterns and painting.
4. Exercise on layers operations like linking, masking, grouping etc.
COURSE
5. Practice image colour correction, hue and saturation, feathering and
OBJECTIVES filters etc.
6. Installation of Photoshop Illustrator CS5 software
7. Practice page settings, paths, shapes, 3D effects and opacity etc.
8. Exercise various layouts and printing processes like letter press,
offset flexography etc.
9. Practice various designing medias like news papers, magazines,
poster ,advertisements, banners etc
10. Practice printing, binding and finishing.

CO No COURSE OUTCOMES
After completion of this course the student will be able to
CO 1 AMG-306.1 Practice usage of Photoshop CS5/CS6 software IDE after installation and
configuration.
CO 2 AMG-306.2 Practice patterns, paintings, masking, color correction and filters
CO 3 AMG-306.3 Use Adobe Illustrator software to use drawing tools,3D effects and opacity

CO 4 AMG-306.4 Practice different design layouts and printing process

CO 5 AMG-306.5 Develop design-medias for news papers, magazines, poster
,advertisements, banners etc

136
 CO-PO/PSO MATRIX

CO NO. PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
AMG- 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2
306.1
AMG- 2 2 2 1 1 2 2 1 2
306.2
AMG- 2 3 3 1 3 2 3 1 2 2
306.3
AMG- 2 3 2 1 1 2 3 1 3 2
306.4
AMG- 2 3 2 1 3 3 1 3 2
306.5
Average 1.8 2.4 2 1 1.8 2 2.6 1 2.4 2
3=strongly mapped, 2=moderately mapped, 1=slightly mapped

LEARNING OUTCOMES:

1. Practice user interface options of Photoshop layout.

2. Exercise on various image related operations like size, resolution, colour changeoverlaying etc.

3. Exercise on drawing shapes

4. Exercise using pen tool and painting

5. Exercise on image colour correction

6. Exercise on blurring and sharpness

7. Practice Illustrator environment and work area

8. Exercise on strokes and fill colours

9. Exercise on opacity mask and clipping mask

10. Create a digital advertisement of an educational institution.

11. Create a sticker for CD/DVD coverset

12. Design a poster/pamphlet in Photoshop

13. Design corporate logos using Adobe Illustrator

14. Design a newspaper using Adobe Illustrator

15. Create character and background designs using Adobe Illustrator

16. Create a brochure design for cell phones at your own concept in Adobe Illustrator

137
 The competencies and key competencies to be achieved by the student

S.N Name of the Objectives Key Competencies

o experiment

1 Practice user Identify the different ™ Practice the different options in Menu bar,
interface options of options of Menu bar, tool ™ Practice the tools on tool bar
Photoshop layout. bar in Photoshop layout

2 Exercise on various Identify the various image ™ Practice Photoshop image options
image related options in Photoshop
operations like size,
resolution, colour
change overlaying
etc.

3 Exercise on Identify various drawing ™ Practice Drawingshapes

Drawing shapes shapes

4 Exercise using pen Identify pen tool and ™ Practice Pen and Painting tools
tool and painting painting tool ™ Differentiate between copy and painting

5 Exercise on image Identify various image ™ Practice on various image colour options
colour correction colour options

6 Exercise on blurring Identify blurring and ™ Practice blurring and sharpness tools
and sharpness sharpness tools

7 Practice Illustrator Identify the different ™ Practice different options in Menu bar, tool
environment and options of Menu bar, tool bar in Illustrator
work area bar in Illustrator ™ Practice IDE of Illustrator.

8 Exercise on strokes Identify strokes and fill ™ Practicestrokes and fill colours
and fill colours colours

9 Exercise on opacity Identify various tools to ™ Practice opacity mask and clipping mask
mask and clipping opacity mask and clipping
mask mask

10 Create a digital Identify different tools ™ Identify different tools

advertisement of necessary for ™ Practice color settings, shape tools and
an educational advertisement like pathfinder
institution. background colour,
foreground colour, shapes
etc

11 Create a sticker for Identify different tools ™ Practice shades, reflections, offset path etc
CD/DVD coverset necessary for ™ Know the use of sticker
advertisement like

138
 shadows, reflections offset
path etc

12 Design a Identify different tools ™ Know various options related to poster

poster/pamphlet in necessary for poster like creation
Photoshop typographic, shadows etc ™ Practice typographic, shades etc
Know the use of poster

13 Design corporate Identify different tools ™ Know various options related to logo
logos using Adobe necessary for logo like text, creation
Illustrator shapes and colours etc ™ Practice text, shapes, colors etc
™ Know the usage oflogo
14 Design a Identify different tools ™ Know various options related to newspaper
newspaper using necessary for newspaper creation
Adobe Illustrator like text, shapes, colours ™ Practice text, shapes, colours etc
and alignments etc

15 Create character Identify different tools ™ Practice various options related to character
and background necessary for character and creation and background
designs using background like pen, ™ Practice pen, shapes, colours, opacity and
strokes etc
Adobe Illustrator shapes, colours, opacity,
stroke etc

16 Create a brochure Identify different tools ™ Know various parts of brochure

design for cell necessary for brochure like ™ Practice text, layouts, guides etc
phones at your text, layouts, guides, etc ™ Designing a brochure
own concept in
Adobe Illustrator

GUIDE LINES:

x All the exercises provided in the list of practical’s should be

completed and submitted during the semester examination.
x In order to develop skill in mastering creativity, every student should
be made to practice thoroughly.
x The external examiners are requested to ensure that a single
practical oriented question should not be given to more than three
students while admitting a batch of 30 students during Board
Examination.

139
Course code Course Title No. of Total No. of Marks for FA Marks for SA
Periods/Weeks periods
AMG-307 2D Digital 4 60 40 60
Animation Lab

S No Chapter/ Unit Title No. of COs Mapped

Periods

1. DIGITAL CONVERSION 10 CO1,CO2

2. INTRODUCTION TOANIMATION 15 CO1,CO2,CO4

3. FLASH APPLICATIONS 15 CO1,CO2,,CO3,CO4

4. CHARACTER ANIMATION 20 CO1,CO2,CO3,CO4,CO5

Total 60

Upon completion of the course the student shall be able to

8. Practice on Edit, test, play back flash animation designs

9. Apply usage of tools, objects and animation effects.
COURSE 10. Design animations using timeline, different tweening methods, symbols,
OBJECTIVES libraries with various drawing modes
11. Develop animation using character design and background settings
12. Create animation using character rigging constraints, frame by frame
13. Develop animation with different posses of character

CO No COURSE OUTCOMES

CO 1 AMG-307.1 Perform Edit, test and playbackof designed animation

CO 2 AMG-307.2 Designing various symbols and objects using tools and library

CO 3 AMG-307.3 Developing animations suing symbols and objects with timeline

CO5 AMG-307.4 Designing animations with backgrounds, effects of timeline

CO5 AMG-307.5 Applying character rigging constrains on various animations

140
 CO-PO/PSO MATRIX

CO NO. PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
AG-307.1 2 2 3 2 3 2
AG-307.2 2 2 3 2 3 2 2
AG-307.3 2 2 3 2 2 2 2
AG-307.4 2 2 3 2 3 2 2 1
AG-307.5 2 3 2 3 3 1 2 2
Average 2 2.25 2.75 2.2 2.8 1.5 2 2.33 2 1.5
3=Strongly mapped , 2=moderately mapped, 1=slightly mapped

LEARNING OUTCOMES:

1. Design the back ground of nature environment for animationclip.

2. Create the ball bouncing using frame by frame animation techniques (10sec).
3. Create the web jingles with the given reference andconcepts.
4. Design the character for animation with thereference
5. Create flight animation in 3 different shots for 20sec.
6. Create the car animation with proper background for 20sec.
7. Design your character and animate the facial expression for 10sec.
8. Create character animation by apply rigging constrains like walk, run, jump, pull and push
9. Create 2D animation using moving guide layer and masking
10. Develop Animation based on symbols at least for 10sec

The competencies and key competencies to be achieved by the student

S.N Name of the Objectives Key Competencies

o. experiment
1 Design the back Develop animation Identify the required suitable background nature
ground of nature Develop background environment
environment for Combine both Mix with animation
animation clip.
2 Create the ball Design frames with ball in identify the no of frames required
bouncing using different angles arrange in sequence to Animate frame by frame
frame by frame Set timeline as required set the timeline for 10 sec accordingly
animation Animate frames playback
techniques (10sec).
3 Create the web Create web jingles Identify the given reference with suitable
jingles with the Apply given references concepts
given reference Create the web jingles
and concepts.

141
4 Design the Design the required identify the given references
character for suitable character use the designed character
animation with the Apply reference set timeline for required period of animation
reference Use timeline and animate playback
5 Create flight Design or choose flight Identify 3 different posses of flight
animation in 3 image with matching Arrange frames in order
Use time line and playback
different shots for posses
20sec. Set timeline for 20sec
Arrange flight frames in
sequence, playback
6 Create the car Design car image Identify suitable background
animation with Chose required background Use the timeline and set time for 20sec
playback
proper background Set timeline for 20sec
for 20sec. Animate
7 Create character Design character Identify and arrange the sequence of frames
animation by apply Develop different symbols Animate for the required period

rigging constrains with required rigging

like walk, run, constraints
jump, pull and push Create and arrange frames
8 Create 2D Create the moving guide Use the moving guide layer
animation using layer Apply suitable mask
Design suitable2D animation
moving guide layer Apply masking
playback
and masking Design the suitable 2D
animation
9 Develop Animation Design the required Use the symbols and library
based on symbols symbols Use the timeline
Playback for 10sec
at least for 10sec Set timeline for 10sec
Apply animation on
symbols

142
 No. of Total No. of
Course code Course Title Marks for FA Marks for SA
Periods/Weeks periods
GRAPHICS
PROGRAMMING
AMG-308 THROUGH JAVA 4 60 40 60
LAB

S.No. Chapter/Unit Title No.of Periods CO’s Mapped

1. Basics, overloading, inheritance, 16 CO1,CO2
overriding
2. Interfaces and Packages and Collections. 10 CO2,CO3
3. Exceptions and Multi threaded 14 CO3,CO4
programming.
4. Applets and Event Handling, awt, swing 20 CO5
Total Periods 60

i)Design object oriented programming paradigm

Course ii)Able to develop multi tasking application with the knowledge of multi threading.
Objectives iii) Familiarized to develop graphics and graphical user interface with event handling
mechanism.

CO1 Perform object oriented programming model application design.

CO2 Design optimized definition for an application with reusability features like
Course inheritance and polymorphism.
Outcomes CO3 Analyze modular design for real time applications by using packages
concept in projects. Able to design data structures used in applications.
CO4 Apply multi threading concepts to implement multitasking and multi
programming applications.
CO5 Develop effective graphics and dynamic user interface for any front end
applications using Applets and events, awt, swing

CO-PO/PSO Matrix:

CO NO. PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
CM-407.1 2 1 3 2 2 1 2 3 3
CM-407.2 1 3 3 3 1 3 2 2 3 3
CM-407.3 1 2 3 2 2 3 1 2 3 3
CM-407.4 1 1 3 2 2 3 2 2 3 3
CM-407.5 3 3 3 3 2 3 2 2 3 3
Average 1.5 2.6 3 2.6 1.5 3 1.6 2 3 3
3=strongly mapped, 2=moderately mapped, 1=slightly mapped

143
Learning Outcomes

1. Exercise programs on conditional statements and loop statements

2. Exercise programs on Strings.
3. Exercise program to create class and objects and adding methods.
4. Exercise programs using constructors and construction over loading.
5. Exercise programs on command line arguments.
i) Input as command line arguments and perform operation on that data.
ii) Input as command line arguments and update manipulated data in Files.
6. Exercise programs using concept of overloading methods.
7. Exercise programs on inheritance.
8. Write a program using the concept of method overriding.
9. Exercise on packages.
i) Creation of packages
ii) Design module to importing packages from other packages.
10. Exercise programs on interfaces.
11. Exercise on exception handling.
i) Programs on try, catch and finally.
ii) Programs on multiple catch statements
iii) Programs on nested try statements.

12. Exercise on multithreading

i) Programs on creation of single and multiple threads.
ii) Programs on adding priorities to multiple threads.
iii) Programs on Inter thread communication.
13. Exercise on applets
i) Programs on Graphics and colors.
ii) Simple animations using threads and graphics.
14. Exercise on AWT controls
i) Program to handle mouse events.
ii) Program to handle keyboard events.
iii) Programs to illustrate Text Fields and Button control.
iv) Programs to illustrate Check Box and List control.
v) Write an application program to illustrate multiple controls.
15.Exercises on Swing

i) Program to illustrate Swing -Containers –Jframe, JApplet, JDialog, JPanel .

ii) Program to illustrate Components in Swing-Jbutton,JLabel,JTextField,JTextArea
iii) Program for a simple application using graphics.

144
 KEY COMPETENCIES

Exp. Name of the Objectives Key Competencies

No. experiment

1 Exercise programs on (a) Write program using if (a) Know the usage of IF and switch
conditional statements statement and switch statements.
and loop statements.
(b) Write program using while, do (b) Compile the program and rectify the
and for constructs. errors.

(c) Observe the output.

2 Exercise programs on (a) Write a programs to (a) Create String objects

Strings. manipulate Strings (b) Use string class methods
(b) Write a programs to arrange (c) Observe the output.
array of strings in ascending
order

3 Exercise program to (a) Write a program to create a (a) Create class.

create class and objects class and create objects.
(b) Declare methods.
and adding methods.
(b) Write a program to create class
adding methods and access class (c) Create objects.
members. (d) Write main method.

(e) Access class members.

4 Exercise programs (a) Write a program using default (a) Declare and define constructor.
using constructors and constructor.
(b) Call default constructor.
construction over
loading. (b) Write a program using
(c) Call parameterized constructor.
parameterized constructor.
(d) observe constructor overloading.

5 Exercise programs on (a) Write a program to illustrate (a) Use command line arguments.
command line usage of command line
arguments. (b) Run the program.
arguments.
(b) Write a program to read data
as command line arguments and (c) Understand usage of Files.
update it into Files. (c) Observe the output.

6 Exercise programs (a) Write a program to illustrate (a) Observe method overloading.
using concept of method overloading.
(b) Overload constructor methods.
overloading methods. (b) Write a program to illustrate
method overloading using
constructors.

145
7 Exercise on (a)Write a program to illustrate (a) Create base class.
inheritance. single inheritance.
(b) Write base class constructor.
(b)Write a program to illustrate
multiple inheritance. (c) Create derived class.

(d) Use extends keyword.

(e) Use super keyword.

(f) Write derived class constructor.

8 Write a program using Write a program using the (a) Use method overriding.
the concept of method concept of method overriding.
overriding. (b) Use this keyword.

(c) use super keyword

9 Exercise on importing Write a program to create and (a) Create package.

packages. importing package.
(b) Use of access specifiers.

(b) Use package.

(c) Use import keyword.

10 Exercise on interfaces. Write a program to illustrate (a) Define interface.

multiple inheritance using
interfaces. (b) Use extends keyword.

(c) Use implements keyword.

(d) Access interface variables.

11 Exercise on exception (a) Write a program to illustrate (a) Use try – catch.
handling exception handling.
(b) Use multiple catch blocks.
(b) Write a program to illustrate
exception handling using multiple (c) Use finally statement.
catch statements. (d) use Nested try
(c) Write a program to illustrate
exception handling using nested
try.

12 Exercise on (a) Write a program to create (a) Use extends, new.

multithreading single a thread by extending the
thread class. (b) Use run() and start() methods.

(c) Observe thread execution.

146
 (b) Write a program to create a (d) Use implements runnable interface.
single thread by implementing the
runnable interface. (e) Use setPriority() and getPriority()
methods.
(c) Write a program to create
(f) use wait(),notify() methods
multiple threads.

(d) Write a program to illustrate

thread priorities.

(e) Write a program to illustrate

inter thread communication.

13 Exercise on applets. Write a program to create simple (a) Use <applet>…</applet> tag.
applet to display different shapes
with colors. (b) Add applet to html file.

Write an applet program to design (c) Run the applet.

simple animation. (d) use graphics methods

(e) use threads and graphics.

14 Exercise on AWT (a) Write an applet program (a) Use keyboard event methods
controls to handle key events. (b) Use mouse event methods
(b) Write an applet program (c) Use Text Field class methods
to handle mouse events. (d) Use button class methods
(c) Write an applet program (e) Use Check box and List class
to illustrate Text Field and methods
button control.
(d) Write an applet program
to illustrate Check box and
List control.
(e) Write an applet program
to illustrate multiple
controls.
15 Programs using swing (a) Write a Java Program using (a) Use swing Containers –J frame, Jdialog
Swing to design a Window
(b) Write a Java program using (b) Use Components in Swing-Jbutton, J
different Swing components Label , J TextField, J TextArea,
(c) Write a Java program for a
simple application using (c) Use different components and
graphics. containers in swing

147
GUIDE LINES:

x The theory topics given below are to be taught as part of this Lab.
x All the exercises provided in the list of practical’s should be completed and submitted
during the semester examination.
x In order to develop skill in mastering creativity, every student should be made to practice
thoroughly.
x The external examiners are requested to ensure that a single practical oriented question
should not be given to more than three students while admitting a batch of 30 students
during Board Examination.

Required Infrastructure(Software, Hardware and other Equipment) to be procured as per C-20:

SNO Hardware / Equipment Needed Software Needed

1 Desktop Systems: 1. Operating System:
Microsoft Windows 10 professional-
Configuration: 64 bit (Minimum)
9. Processor :: AMD Ryzen 9 3900X Or any other
equivalent intel/Motorola etc.. processor or 2.Animation and Graphics Software
Above d. Adobe master collection cs6 (or
10. Mother Board: AMD 400/500 or its equivalent Above)
or above e. Autodesk MAYA
11. RAM: 8GB(or above) dual channel DDR4 f. Autodesk 3DS MAX.
12. HDD: 500GM (SSD)/1TB(or above)
13. Graphics Card: Aorus Ge Force RTX 2080 Ti
Xtreme (or equivalent )
14. Monitor: 17” or above
15. Multimedia Devices like Mic, Head Phones /
Speakers , USB Web camera or USB Digital
Video Camera
16. Color Photo Scanner and Printer

LIST OF Animation Exercise

Theory content:

1. Animation Production Techniques: Animation Principles with light box, Flip book Animation
theory, Character sketching, Different Character styles, Color Models, Foregrounds and Back
Grounds, Movements of elements, Pivot Based and joint Movement, Different Functions and
poses of human, Lip sink
2. Important Application of Light box: Key Poses, In-Between, Timing, Retouch up of drawing ,
Clean up, Dope sheets, Walk, Run and Jump, Flexibility, Acting, Body language, Change of
Expressions, Formation of Story Board , Camera movements and Angels, Recording, Finalizing
of Story Board, Animatic creation with Audio Narration, View output

148
 No. of Total No. of
Course code Course Title Marks for FA Marks for SA
Periods/Weeks periods
AMG-309 2D GRAPHICS 4 60 40 60
LAB

S No Chapter/ Unit Title No. of COs Mapped

Periods

1. Basics of 9 CO1

2. Environment Lighting 12 CO2

3. Mental ray Lighting Setup 12 CO3

4. Mental ray Rendering Techniques 15 CO4

5. V ray Lighting Work Flow 12 CO5

Total 60

Upon completion of the course the student shall be able to

1. Introduction to animation principles.

2. Sketching characters with different styles.
COURSE
3. Working with foregrounds and backgrounds.
OBJECTIVES 4. Practicing movement of elements and poses.
5. Practicing walk, run, jump sequences .
6. Practicing body part movements and expressions.
7. Creation and finalising storyboards.
8. Adding audio narration to animation sequences.

CO No COURSE OUTCOMES

CO 1 AMG-309.1 Working with comic characters animation

CO 2 AMG-309.2 Developing Backgrounds for story board animation sequences.

CO 3 AMG-309.3 Working with motion cycles of parts of comic characters

CO 4 AMG-309.4 Develop story boards and Audio narration.

CO 5 AMG-309.5 Working with change of expressions and camera movement.

149
 CO-PO/PSO MATRIX

CO NO. PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
AMG-309.1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1
AMG-309.2 1 1 3 2 3 1 2 2 2
AMG-3093 2 3 1 3 1 1 1 3
AMG-309.4 1 2 2 2 3 2 1 3 2
AMG-309.5 3 2 1 2
Average 1.3 1.7 2.4 1.6 3 1.6 1.5 1 1.7 2.25
3=Strongly mapped , 2=moderately mapped, 1=slightly mapped

Learning Outcomes.

1. Practice drawing basic shapes in 2d.

2. Practice drawing diagrams of animals, humans, birds etc..

3. Design any two comic character for 2d animation process with proper poses

4. Create the two nature BG for your story board animation sequence(3min)

5. Create the ball bounce animation with stretch &squash (3min)

6. Create the normal walk cycle for your own character(2cycles)

7. Create the tail animation for any character for (2min)

8. Create run cycle for any own cartoon character(3min)

9. Create any five facial expression of your characters for (1min)

10. Create Hair movement for your character.(1 min)

11. Create jumping sequence of your character (3 min)

12. Create eye lid animation of your character ( 2 min).

13. Create eye brow movement of your character (2 min)

14. Create lip movement of your character (1 min).

15. Practice eye ball movement of your character(1 min)

150
 The competencies and key competencies to be achieved by the student

S.N Name of the Objectives Key Competencies

o. experiment

1 Practice drawing basic Working with basic ™ Working with basic drawing elements
shapes in 2d. shapes ™ View output

2 Practice drawing Creation of drawings ™ Combining various shapes to form a

diagrams of animals, drawing
humans, birds etc.. ™ View output

3 Design any two comic Create characters with ™ Identifying characters

different poses. ™ Identifying poses
character for 2d
™ Generate animation sequence.
animation process ™ View output
with proper poses

4 Create the two nature Creation of different ™ Using backgrounds

Backgrounds ™ Working with storyboard.
BG for your story
™ View output
board animation
sequence(3min).

5 Create the ball bounce Working with bouncing ™ Identify bouncing sequence
™ Using stretch and squash.
animation with stretch objects.
™ Working with timing
&squash (3min) ™ Working with angles.
™ View output
6 Create the normal Working with walk ™ Identify movement sequences.
cycles. ™ Using timing and angles.
walk cycle for your
™ Sound narration.
own ™ View output
character(2cycles)

7 Create the tail Working to move Body ™ Identify movement of body elements.
elements . ™ Identify poses.
animation for any
™ View output
character for (2min)

8 Create run cycle for Work with run cycles. ™ Identify running sequences.
™ Using timing and angles.
any own cartoon
™ Sound narration.
character(3min) ™ View output
9 Create any five facial Identify Facial ™ Identify change of expressions
expressions ™ Using timing and angles.
expression of your
™ Sound narration.
characters for (1min) ™ View output

151
10 Create Hair movement Identify body part ™ Identify change of expressions
elements ™ Using timing and angles.
for your character.(1
™ Sound narration.
min) ™ View output

11 Create jumping Generation of jump ™ Identify jump sequences

sequences. ™ Identify change of expressions.
sequence of your
™ Using timing and angles.
character (3 min) ™ Sound narration.
™ View output

12 Create eye lid Identify body element ™ Identify structure of eye lid with other parts.
movement ™ View output
animation of your
character ( 2 min).

13 Create eye brow Identify Body elements. ™ Identify the structure of brow construction.
movement of your ™ Working with angles and timings.
character (2 min) ™ Sound narration
™ View output
14 Create lip movement Practice lipsink. Identify lip sinking with narrated sound.
of your character (1
min).

15 Practice eye ball ™ Identify the structure of eye ball

construction.
movement of your
™ Identify poses
character(1 min) ™ Working with angles and timings.
™ Sound narration
™ View output

Guidelines:

1. Students have to be divided into groups consisting of 4 to 6 members.

2. Each group has to develop a Miniproject by applying the knowledge acquired during previous
and current semesters.
3. They have to approach nearby TV studios, Film Industries, Photo and Video Studios ,
Multimedia centers , DTP centres, Printing presses to collect the information and the Day to
day Short term Projects related to Photography, Animation, Print Media and Visual media.
4. They have to be in a position to develop Visiting Cards, Logos, Invitation cards, Brochures,
News papers, banners, Hotel Menu cards etc..
5. Develop Book covers for Various Local Publishers.
6. Any other local Animation and Multimedia related Jobs have to be taken up.
7. They have to Produce the Project report at the end of the semester.
8. They should conduct minimum three seminars/Workshops to explain the progressive
development of their project with co project members and the staff.

152
FOURTH SEMESTER

153
 DIPLOMA IN 3D ANIMATION AND GRAPHIC S ENGINEERING
SCHEME OF INSTRUCTIONS AND EXAMINATION
CURRICULUM-2023

(IV Semester)
Instruction
Periods/Week Scheme Of Examinations
Total
Theory Practicals Periods
Sub Code Name of the End Exam
Per DurationSessional Total
Subject Marks
Semeste (hrs) Marks Marks
r
THEORY SUBJECTS
AMG-401 Elements of Film 5 - 75 3 20 80 100
Technology
AMG-402 Digital 4 60 3 20 80 100
-
Photography
AMG-403 3DAnimation and 4 - 60 3 20 80 100
Graphics
Web Designing
AMG-404 4 - 60 3 20 80 100

AMG-405 3DModeling 4 - 60 3 20 80 100

,Texturing, and
lighting
Techniques
PRACTICALSUBJECTS
3DAnimation and
3 45 3 40 60 100
AMG-406 Graphics Lab -
Digital Photography
AMG-407 4 60 3 40 60 100
Lab
-
Communication
AMG-408 Skills - 3 45 3 40 60 100
3DModeling
,Texturing, and
AMG-409 lighting Techniques 4 60 3 40 60 100
lab
Net working and
Web Designing Lab
*Note: Develop a
AMG-410 Mini project with - 4 60 3 40 60 100
Web Designing
STUDENT
CENTRIC 3 45
ACTIVITIES
Total 2 21 630 - 3 700 10
1 0 00
0

AMG-401 Common with AMT-303 AMG-408 Common with all branches

AMG-402 Common with AMT-305 AMG-404 ,410 Common with DAME
AMG-407 Common with AMT-308

154
 Course code Course Title No. of Total No. of Marks for FA Marks for SA
Periods/Weeks periods
AMG-401 Elements of 5 75 20 80
Film
Technology

TIME SCHEDULE
S.N CHAPTE Chapter/ No. of MAR SHORT ESSAY CO’s Mapped
o. R Unit Title Periods KS QUESTION QUEST
NO S IONS
1. 1 VISUAL 15 2 1 CO1
COMMUNICATI 16
ON
2. 2 PRE SHOOTING 15 26 2 2 CO2
3. 3 PRODUCTION 15 16 2 1 CO3
DESGIN
4. 4 SHOOTING 15 26 2 2 CO4
5. 5 POST 15 26 2 2 CO5
SHOOTING
Total Periods 75 110 10 8

x Understand the film history ,

x Apply Script writing techniques and story writing
techniques
x Able to make documentary films and short films
Course Objectives
x Able To Handle Production Unit
x Expert in handling cameras & techniques and to play role
of director.

CO NO COURSE OUTCOMES
CO1 AMG-401.1 Use various types of visual communication techniques and
methods.
CO2 AMG-401.2 Describe pre-shooting activities
CO3 AMG-401.3 Apply the production design methodologies
CO4 AMG-401.4 Apply the activities of shooting process
CO5 AMG-401.5 Apply Post shooting activities.

CO-PO/PSO MATRIX
CO NO. PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
AMG-401.1 1 2 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 2
AMG-401.2 2 2 2 2 3 3 2 2 3 2
AMG-401.3 2 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 3 3
AMG-401.4 2 3 3 3 3 2 3 1 3 3
AMG-401.5 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 3
Average 1.8 2.6 2.6 2.4 2.8 2.2 2.4 1.6 2.8 2.6
3=Strongly mapped , 2=moderately mapped, 1=slightly mapped

155
Learning Outcomes:

1. VISUAL COMMUNICATION
1.1. Define communication.
1.2. State the importance of human and visual communication.
1.3. Explain basics of communication.
1.4. List functions of communication.
1.5. Explain functions of communication.
1.6. List types of Communication.
1.7. Explain types of Communication.
1.8. Define the term visual communication.
1.9. Describe verbal communication.
1.10. Explain nonverbal communication.
1.11. Explain inter personal relationships.
1.12. What is mass communication.
1.13. Describe mass communication.
1.14. State the importance of Group communication.
1.15. Explain group communication.
1.16. Explain visual communications.
1.17. List visual vocabulary.
1.18. Explain visual vocabulary.
2. Pre Shooting.
2.1. Define script
2.2. List the characters of a good script.
2.3. List and explain the elements of a script.
2.4. Write a sample script.
2.5. What is script analysis.
2.6. Explain the process of script analysis.
2.7. Classify the genre of the film.
2.8. Explain various genre of film.
2.9. Explain social or fantasy genre of film.
2.10. Explain the process of genering
2.11. Explain the process of assessing the characters based on profession and
backgrounds.
2.12. Explain the process of assessing the characters based on jeweler.
2.13. Explain the process of assessing the characters based on costumes.
2.14. Explain the process of assessing the characters based on transportation system.
2.15. Explain the history (research) of assessing characters based on profession and
background.
2.16. Explain the history (research) of assessing characters based on jewels.
2.17. Explain the history (research) of assessing characters based on costumes.
2.18. Explain the history (research) of assessing characters based on transportation
Systems.
2.19. Explain the importance of visiting Museums, Libraries in pre-shooting.
2.20. Explain the importance of Internet, old maps and films in pre shooting.
2.21. Describe the channelizing the findings of visiting Museums, Libraries, Internet, old
maps and films.

156
 2.22. Explain the concept of collection of materials.
2.23. Define the term anachronism and artifact.
2.24. Explain the process of avoiding anachronisms Important to discard artifacts non –
pertaining to the periods and genre of the film
2.25. Explain the process of assisting the director to finalize casting.
3. PRODUCTION DESGIN:
3.1. Define the term location.
3.2. List types of locations.
3.3. State the purpose of location.
3.4. What is location hunting.
3.5. State the need of location hunting.
3.6. State the roles of Film Director.
3.7. State the roles of cinematographer.
3.8. Explain Location hunting process with Director and cinematographer.
3.9. Describe the Identification of location suitable to provide backdrop on the scenes .
3.10. Define the terms Set and set erection.
3.11. State the need of set erection.
3.12. Describe the process of Erection of sets.
3.13. Describe the process of surrealistic and dreamy sets for song sequences
3.14. Define the terms Sketch and diagram.
3.15. State the need of sketch.
3.16. State the need of Diagram.
3.17. Describe the preparations of sketches and diagrams.
3.18. Define the terms color and tone of the film.
3.19. Determining the color and tone of the film.
3.20. Explain selection of properties in accordance with the tone and color of the films
3.21. Define the Film Budget.
3.22. State the purpose of the Film Budget.
3.23. Explain Estimating the budget.

4. SHOOTING:

157
4.1. Define term Shooting.
4.2. Define the terms Backdrop.
4.4. List the properties of backdrop and scenes.
4.5. Explain Providing Backdrops and properties which enhance the mood of the scene to be
shot
4.6. List narrative strategies.
4.7. Explain narrative strategies.
4.8. What is location scouting.
4.9. Explain the location scouting
4.10. Define the term casting actor.
4.11. Describe role of casting actors .
4.12. Define the term Motivating actor.
4.13. Describe the role of motivating actors.
4.14. Describe the process of getting the performance from actors.
4.15. How to use .cinematographer as Director’s eye.
4.15. State the purpose of the dynamization of space and time .
4.16.Explainthe process of dynamization of space and time.
4.19. List and explain various kinds of continuity.
4.20. Define the term shot.
4.21.Determining the field of each shot and creativity.
4.22.List latest technologies with regard to Graphics, Animation and special Effects.
4.24. Explain Blue/Green mat shooting.
4.25. State the purpose of miniature.
4.25. Explain the Preparationof miniatures.
4.26. State the purpose of plaster casts.
4.27. Explain the preparation of plaster casts.
4.28. State the purpose of clay models.
4.29. Explain the process of preparation of clay models.

5. POST SHOOTING:
5.1. List the members of Post production team.
5.2. Explain the job roles of Post Production Team members.
5.3. LIST THE STAGES OF Post production.
5.4. Define Editing.
5.5. Explain the process of Editing.
5.6. Define Dubbing.
5.7. Explain the process of Dubbing.
5.8. Define Re-Recording.
5.9. Explain the process of Re-recording.
5.10. Define Mixing.
5.11. Explain the process of imposing Sound and Special effects.
5.12. Explain the process of Mixing.
5.13. What is First copy and how to release First copy.
5.14. What is the is the role of Censorship body.
5.15. Explain the roles and responsibilities of Censorship .
5.16. Explain the tasks involved in making Release arrangements.
5.17. State the importance of maintaining relationship with media.
5.18. Explain the process of Maintaining relationship with media .
5.19. Define the terms publicity and promotion.
5.20. Explain the process of Publicity and promotion.

158
COURSE CONTENT

1. VISUAL COMMUNICATION : Basics of communication - functions and types of

communication – verbal communication – nonverbal communication – Interpersonal
relationships – Mass communication – Group communication – Visual communications–
Visual vocabulary

2. PRE SHOOTING: Script analysis – Categorizing the genre ofthefilm, social or fantasy –
assessing the characters, their profession and backgrounds, jeweler, costumes,
Transportation systems etc. – Research based on the above – visiting Museums, Libraries,
Internet, old maps and films – Channelize the findings – collection of materials – Avoiding
Anachronisms: Important to discard artifacts non – pertaining to the periods and genre of
the film. Assisting the Director to finalize casting

3. PRODUCTION DESGIN: Location hunting with Director and cinematographer – Identification

of location suitable to provide backdrop on the scenes – Erection of sets wherever required
– surrealistic and dreamy sets for song sequences – preparations of sketches and diagrams –
Determining the color and tone of the film – selection of properties in accordance with the
tone and color of the films – Estimating the budget.

4. SHOOTING: Providing Backdrops and properties which enhance the mood of the scene to be
shot – Narrative strategies – location scouting – casting actors – motivating actors – getting
the performance – cinematographer as Director’s eye –dynamisation of space and time –
various kinds of continuity– Determining the field of each shot and creatively.– Knowledge
of latest technology with regard to Graphics, Animation and special Effects – Blue/Green mat
shooting – Preparationof miniatures, plaster casts, clay models

5. POST SHOOTING: Editing, Dubbing, Re-recording, Sound, Special effects, Mixing etc. – First
copy – Censorship – Release arrangements. Relationship with media – Publicity and
promotion

Reference Books:
1. Directing Film techniques and Aesthetics, by Michael Rabiger, - Big picture media, 2010 5th
edition
2. Shot By Shot, by Steven D.Katz, Columbia university press, 2006 3rd edition
3. Film Language, by Christian Metz , Chaplin book publishers 2002 2 nd edition

Table specifying the scope of syllabus to be covered for unit tests

Unit Test Learning outcomes to be covered

Unit test-1 From 1.1 to 3.12
Unit test-2 From 3.13 to 5.20

159
 Course code Course Title No. of Total No. of Marks for Marks for
Periods/Weeks periods FA SA
AMG-402 Digital 4 60 20 80
Photography

TIME SCHEDULE
S.N CHAPTE Chapter/ No. of MAR SHORT ESSAY CO’s Mapped
o. R Unit Title Periods KS QUESTION QUEST
NO S IONS
1. 1 BASIC OF 12 2 1 CO1,CO2,CO5
PHOTOGRAPHY 16

2. 2 DIGITAL 12 16 2 1 CO2,CO3
PHOTOGRAPHY
3. 3 IMAGE 12 26 2 2 CO2,CO4,CO5
COMPOSITION
4. 4 DIGITAL 12 26 2 2 CO1,CO2,CO3
IMAGING
5. 5 CONCEPT 12 26 2 2 CO1,CO2,CO4
PHOTOGRAPHY
Total Periods 60 110 10 8

x Describe Camera Mechanism and various equipment in digital

photography
x apply lighting techniques in handling various photo shoots
Course Objectives along with projecting various styles in photo graphic
x Analyse various image format handlings& uses
x Apply Digital color correction &grading techniques
x Printing & photo sharing

CO NO COURSE OUTCOMES
CO1 AMG-402.1 Distinguish the relationship between human eye and camera and basic
principles of Photography.
CO2 AMG-402.2 Practicing Digital camera Functions.
CO3 AMG-402.3 Illustrate various image composing techniques.
CO4 AMG-402.4 Explain digital imaging principles
CO5 AMG-402.5 Explain industrial Applications of photography techniques and
documentation.

Course Objectives:

160
 1. Basic Photography

1.1 Define the term Camera

1.2 Differentiate between Human Eye and Camera
1.3 Relate human eye and camera.
1.4 Define the term Photography.
1.5 Explain about history and development of Photography.
1.6 List different types of camera
1.7 state its importance of different camera.
1.8 State the purpose of Lens.
1.9 List different types of Lens
1.10 state their usage of lens
1.11 State the importance of Light.
1.12 List and explain different types of Lights.
1.13 Define the term filter.
1.14 State the need of filter.
1.15 List different types of Filters and explain their usage.
1.16 Define is film with its need
1.17 List different types of Films.
1.18 What is reversal film?
1.19 Describe Reversal Films.
1.20 Explain about manipulation of Color
1.21 Explain about manipulation of Light.
1.22 Explain about Black and white Photography
1.23 Explain about ColorPhotography
1.24 Describe Negatives.
1.25 List and explain Color materials.
1.26 Explain colorProcessing
1.27 ExplainPrinting.
2. Digital Camera Functioning

2.1 Define Digital Camera

2.2 Define Digital Still Camera.
2.3 Define Digital SLR Camera
2.4 Explain operation of Digital SLR Camera
2.5 Explain the functions and operation of Digital Camera
2.6 Explain functions of major Components of Digital Camera with neat diagram

161
2.7 List and explain modes of digital Camera.
2.8 List and explain Advantages of digital camera.
2.9 Describe Light Meter and explain its Usage.
2.10 Describe Flash.
2.11 List types of Flash
2.12 Explain the purpose of flash
2.13 State the importance of Electronic Flash
2.14 Explain the process of selecting Flash Mode Setup for Digital Imaging
2.15 List and explain Desktop Computer Components needed for Digital camera functioning.
2.16 List the Software used for Digital Processes.
2.17 . Explain features of any two software used for digital process.
3. IMAGE COMPOSITION

3.1 List Basic Techniques for Better Image.

3.2 Define Aperture and state it’s Usage?
3.3 Describe Shutter Speed?
3.4 Explain Usage of shutter speed.
3.5 Describe Depth of Field?
3.6 Define Focal Length.
3.7 Describe Exposure Meter
3.8 Explain the terms Basic Lighting, Key Light and Fill Light.
3.9 Define Low Key and High Key Picture.
3.10 Describe Rule of Third.
3.11 Describe Angle of View.
3.12 Explain Different Angles of a Camera.
3.13 List various Perspectives of camera angle?
3.14 Explain Over the Shoulder Shot (OSS ) picture format
3.15 Describe the term lighting
3.16 Explain indoor and outdoor lightening
3.17 Describe the terms Exposing, Focusing.
3.18 Explain the Types of lighting
4. Digital Imaging

4.1 Define the terms Light room ,LightRoomWorkspace and Palettes

4.2 Explain Special effects techniques in digital imaging
4.3 Describe about motion pictures.
4.4 Define the terms manipulation of image, framing and trimming.

162
4.5 Explain the process of Choosing Color and Color grading Brush Shape.
4.6 Explain the Operations and Usage ofArt Marks tool and Art Layers,
4.7 Explain the Operations and Usage of, Layer Mark andCreate Layer,
4.8 Explain the Operations and Usage ofFill Tool and Trashcan
4.9 Explain the Operations and Usage of Cloning,Clone Align and Art Filter
4.10 Explain about various Formats of Digital Image on VariousMedia.

5. Concept Photography

5.1 Describe Photo journalism.

5.2 State the importance of Advertising Photography.
5.3 Explain about Industrial Photography
5.4 List and explain the Architectural Photography Documents
5.5 Explain Stop motion Photography Techniques
5.6 Explain the process of Creating Photography Albums

CO-PO/PSO MATRIX

CO NO. PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
CO1 2 1 2 2
CO2 3 3 1 3 2
CO3 2 2 3 2 3 2 2 2 2 2
CO4 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
CO5 3 3 1 3 2
Avg 2 2 3 2 3 2 2 2 2
3=Strongly mapped, 2=moderately mapped, 1=slightly mapped

COURSE CONTENT:

1. BASIC OF PHOTOGRAPHY
Human Eye and Camera - Basics of Camera - Define Photography. Brief History and Development
of Photography. Camera –Types- Usage. Lens- Types Usage. Lights- Types- Usage. Filters –Types-
Usage. Film – Types..– Manipulation of Color and Light.– Black and White and Color Photography
– Negatives – Color materials, Processing and Printing.

2. DIGTAL CAMERA FUNCTIONING

Define -Digital- Digital Still Camera. Digital SLR Camera – () Camera operations Types. Working
with Digital Camera – Major Components and Functions, Camera Operation, Mode, Advantages.
Light Meter- Usage. Flash - Types-Usage- Electronic Flash – Selection of Right Flash Mode Setup
for Digital Imaging-Windows. Desktop Computer Components-. Software for Digital Processes.

3. IMAGE COMPOSITION
Basic Techniques for Better Image. – Aperture-Usage. – Shutter- Speed- Usage. Depth of Field. –
Focal Length.–Exposure Meters –Basic Lighting- Key Light-Fill Light.– Low Key and High Key
Picture– Rule of Third. – Angle of View. Different Angles of a Camera – High Angle – Eye Level
Angles – Low Angles - Long Shot (LS) – Medium Shot (MS) – Close-up (CU) – Perspectives – Over

163
 the Shoulder Shot (OSS Picture Format )– Understanding lighting-indoor and outdoor, – Exposing
and Focusing, Types of lighting, – Natural and Artificial Lights

4. DIGITAL IMAGING
Light room. Light Room Workspace. Palettes, Special effects techniques- motion pictures etc.,
manipulation of image, framing & trimming. Choosing Color, Color grading Brush Shape.
Operations and Usage of Tools- Art Marks, Art Layers, – Layer Mark, Create Layer, – Fill Tool,
Trashcan, Cloning, – Clone Align, Art Filter – Image Various Formats Digital Image on Various
Media.

5. CONCEPT PHOTOGRAPHY
Photo journalism, – Advertising Photography - Industrial Photography- Architectural
Photography Documents- Stop motion Photography Techniques- Creating Photography Albums

REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Understanding Exposure: How to Shoot Great Photographs with a Film or Digital Camera, by
Bryan Peterson, Am photo Books, August 1st 2004 Second Edition
2. The Wonders of Photography, by Dennis P Curtin, Watson-Gustily, 2009 Fifth Edition
3. The Basic Photography Guide for Photograph, by Langfords, Courier Dover Publications,
2000 - First Edition
4. The Digital Photography, by Scott Kelby, Watson-Gustily , 2002- Second Edition

Table specifying the scope of syllabus to be covered for unit tests

Unit Test Learning outcomes to be covered

Unit test-1 From 1.1 to 3.2
Unit test-2 From 3.3 to 5.7

***

164
Course code Course Title No. of Total No. of Marks for FA Marks for SA
Periods/Weeks periods
AMG-403 3D Animation 4 60 20 80
& Graphics

TIME SCHEDULE
S.N CHAPTE Chapter/ No. of MAR SHORT ESSAY CO’s Mapped
o. R Unit Title Periods KS QUESTION QUEST
NO S IONS
1. 1 Introduction To 12 2 1 CO1
3Ds MAX 16

2. 2 Modeling 12 16 2 1 CO2
Techniques
3. 3 Material & 12 26 2 2 CO3
Shading
network
4. 4 Rigging &A 12 26 2 2 CO4
nimation
5. 5 Lighting 12 26 2 2 CO5
&Rendering
Total Periods 60 110 10 8

x To familiarize with 3Ds MAX software

x To understand Modeling Techniques
x To understand Material &S hadingnetwork
Course Objectives
x To understand Rigging
x To understand Lighting & Rendering

CO NO COURSE OUTCOMES
CO1 AMG-403.1 Use the user interface Menus, tool bars of 3Ds MAX software, keyboard
shortcuts.
CO2 AMG-403.2 Design surfaces and Modelling techniques
CO3 AMG-403.3 Apply Material & Shading network, mappings
CO4 AMG-403.4 Practice Animation tools, Curve Editor, Character studio
CO5 AMG-403.5 Apply Lighting, Rendering, filters and FX simulations

Course Objectives:

1.0 INTRODUCTION TO 3DS MAX

165
1.1. Define user interface
1.2. List and explain MAX software user interface elements
1.3. List the Preferences and settings and explain them.
1.4. Explain steps in Project Work Flow
1.5. Explain four types of View Ports
1.6. List and state the purpose of Menu Bar
1.7. List and state the purpose of Toolbars
1.8. Explain Quad Bars
1.9. List and state the use of Navigation Controls
1.10. Describe the Command Panel
1.11. List types of Selection Commands
1.12. State the steps used for Selection of objects.
1.13. List Geometric Primitives
1.14. Explain the Architectural Objects
1.15. State the purpose of Compound Objects
1.16. Explain Animation & Time Controls
1.17. List and explain the purpose of various Display Controls
1.18. List and state the purpose of Key Board Short Cuts
2.0 MODELING TECHNIQUES
2.1. Explain the procedure of Working with Primitives and Shapes
2.2 State the purpose of Surface Modeling.
2.3. Explain about Sub division Surface.
2.4. Describe the Graphite Modeling Tools.
2.5. Explain about Editable Poly Surface.
2.6. Explain about Editable Mesh Surface
2.7. State the use of Patch Objects
2.8. Define the NURBS Modeling
2.9. Explain the NURBS Modeling
2.10 Explain about Low Res &High Level Polygon Modeling
2.11. State the purpose of Set & Props Modelling.
2.12. Explain Set& Props Modelling
2.13. State the purpose ofVehicle modelling.
2.14. Explain the procedure of Vehicle modelling
3.0. MATERIAL&SHADINGNETWORK
3.1. Explain Material Editor
3.2. List steps to open Material/Map Browser
3.3. Classify the Types of Material.
3.4. List and State the purpose of shaders
3.5. Define map and state steps to add map
3.6. Explain 2D and 3D Maps
3.7. State the purpose of Compositor Maps
3.8. List steps to apply Ray Trace Mapping
3.9. Explain types of Texture Mapping
3.10. Explain Working with UVS
3.11. List steps to Unwrap UVS

166
3.12 Define Alpha Mapping
3.13 Steps to apply Texture For Gaming
3.14 List Steps to apply High Resolution Texturing
3.15 Explain 3Ds MAX Custom Shader.
4.0 RIGGING & ANIMATION
4.1 Define 3D Animation Concepts
4.2 Explain 3D Animation Methods
4.3 Identify animation tools
4.4 Explain various types of Animation Constraints
4.5 Draw and Explain hierarchical structure
4.6 State the purpose of Kinematics
4.7 State the steps to apply Wire Parameters
4.8 List types of Animation Utility
4.9 State the use of components of Character Studio
4.10 State the purpose of Physique Interface
4.11 List Types Of Camera
4.12 Explain Camera Tracker
4.13 List steps to apply Set/Auto Key Mode
4.14 State the use of Motion Panel
4.15 Define Nonlinear Animation
4.16 List different method to open Curve Editor
4.17 Explain Dope Sheet
4.18 Steps to apply Motion Mixer
4.19 Explain animating character with CAT Tools.
5.0 LIGHTING &RENDERING
5.1 List types of Standard Lights
5.2 List Types of Shadows
5.3 List Photometric Lights
5.4 State the purpose of Common Lighting Rollouts
5.5 List the advantages and disadvantages of the Shadow types.
5.6 Explain the Sunlight and Daylight Systems.
5.7 List the steps to change the Environment background
5.8 List the steps to apply Atmosphere effects
5.9 List the types of Exposure Controls
5.10 State the purpose of Default Scan Line Render
5.11 Explain various types of Render Settings
5.12 List steps to apply Mental Ray Render Setup
5.13 List steps to apply I-ray Render Setup
5.14 State the steps to adding backgrounds and filters using Video Post
5.15 Explain Mass FX simulations.

COURSE CONTENT

1. Introduction to 3ds Max - User Interface – Preference & Setting – Project Work Flow – General
View Port Concepts – Menu Bars – Toolbars – Quad Bars – Navigation Controls – Command Panel
– Selection Commands Objects Creating – Geometric Primitives – Architectural Objects –

167
 Compound Objects – Animation & Time Controls – Display Controls – Key Board Short Cuts.
2. MODELING TECHNIQUES - Working With Primitives & Shapes – Surface Modeling – Subdivision
Surface – Graphite Modeling Tools – Editable Poly Surface – Editable Mesh Surface – Patch Objects
– NURBS Modeling – Low Res & High Level Polygon Modeling – Set & Props Modeling – Vehicle
Modeling.
3. MATERIAL & SHADING NETWORK - Material Editor – Material/Map Browser – Types of Material
– Map &Shader – 2D & 3D Maps – Compositor Maps – Ray Trace Mapping – Types of Texture
Mapping – Working With UVS – Unwrap UVS – Alpha Mapping –Texture For Gaming – High
Resolution Texturing – 3Ds MAX Custom Shader.

4. RIGGING & ANIMATION: 3D Animation Concepts Method – Animation Constraint – Hierarchies –

Kinematics – Wire Parameters – Animation Utility – Character Studio – Physique Interface – Types
Of Camera – Camera Tracker – Animation Concepts – Set/Auto Key Mode – Motion Panel –
Nonlinear Animation – Curve Editor – Dope Sheet – Motion Mixer – CAT Tools.

5. LIGHTING & RENDERING: Standard Lights – Types Of Shadow – Photometric Lights – Common
Lighting & Rollouts – Shadow Controls – Sunlight & Daylight System – Environment And
Atmosphere Control – Exposure Control – Default Scan Line Render – Render Settings – Mental
Ray Render Setup – I-ray Render Setup – Video Post – Mass FX.
CO-PO/PSO MATRIX

CO NO. PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
AMG- 1 1 1 2 2 2
403.1
AMG- 1 2 1 2 1 2 2 2
403.2
AMG- 1 2 2 2 2 3 1 3 3
403.3
AMG- 1 3 3 3 2 2 3 1 3 3
403.4
AMG- 1 3 3 3 2 2 3 1 3 3
403.5
Average 1 2.5 2 2.5 2 1.6 2.6 1.4 2.6 3
3=strongly mapped, 2=moderately mapped, 1=slightly mapped
REFERENCE BOOKS

1. 3ds Max Modeling for Games Andrew Gahan Autodesk Media Entertainment 2008 - First
Edition
2. 3ds Max Architectural Visualization Brain L. Smith Autodesk Media Entertainment 198 First
Edition
3. 3ds Max bible Kelly L. Murdock Autodesk Media Entertainment 2012- First Edition

Table specifying the scope of syllabus to be covered for unit tests

Unit Test Learning outcomes to be covered

Unit test-1 From 1.1 to 3.7
Unit test-2 From 3.8 to 5.15

168
 No. of Total No. of
Course code Course Title Marks for FA Marks for SA
Periods/Weeks periods

AG-404 Web Designing 4 60 20 80

TIME SCHEDULE
S.N CHAPTE Chapter/ No. of MAR SHORT ESSAY CO’s Mapped
o. R Unit Title Periods KS QUESTION QUEST
NO S IONS
1. 1 HYPERTEXT 12 2 1 CO1
MARKUP 16
LANGUAGE
(HTML)
2. 2 SCRIPTING 12 16 2 1 CO1,CO2
LANGUAGE
3. 3 DREAMWEAVE 12 26 2 2 CO1,CO3
R CREATIVE
CLOUD
4. 4 WORK SPACE 12 26 2 2 CO1,CO3CO4
AND VISUAL
DEVELOPMENT
5. 5 FLASH WITH 12 26 2 2 CO5
ACTION
SCRIPTS
Total Periods 60 110 10 8

x Describe basic concepts of WWW and Learn HTML, CSS.

x Developing Scripts using Java script
x working with Dream viewer to handle uploading , importing files , folders ,
images and videos.
Course x Analyze Integrating Layouts, photo shop, Dream viewer, templates to optimize
Objectives workspace and visual web development with HTML
x Working with Action scripts of flash to develop web pages with Movie clips ,
animations and Games to develop dynamic websites to make user activities live
.

CO NO COURSE OUTCOMES
CO1 AMG-404.1 Develop simple web pages using HTML.
CO2 AMG-404.2 Develop webpage using Client side scripting Language.

169
 CO3 AMG-404.3 Working with Creative cloud environment.
CO4 AMG-404.4 Apply features of Workspace and Visual development in web designing.
CO5 AMG-404.5 Developing live web pages to achieve dynamic programming.

CO-PO/PSO MATRIX

CO NO. PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
CO1 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 1
C02 2 2 2 2 1 2 3 1
C03 2 2 2 2 1 2 3 1
C04 2 2 2 2 1 2 3 2
C05 2 2 2 2 1 2 3 3 2
Average 2 2 2 2 1.2 2 3 2.6 1.75 2
3=strongly mapped, 2=moderately mapped, 1=slightly mapped

Learning Outcomes:

1. Hypertext Mark-up Language (HTML):

1.1 Introduction and Evolution of World Wide Web
1.2 Define Browser
1.3 List different types of browsers
1.4 Discuss the Applications of Web Designing
1.5 What is HTML State the advantages of HTML
1.6 Explain the Structure of an HTML Document
1.7 Describe the Standards of HTML
1.8 Explain about various Text Formatting Tags, Positioning Tags and List Tags
1.9 Explain about various Table Formatting Tags, Image Tags and Anchor tags
1.10 Explain about various Frames, Forms and Form Elements
1.11 Explain about Other Tags of HTML
1.12 What is CSS?
1.13 Explain about Styles and Style sheets with CSS
1.14 What is CSS Positioning?
1.15 Explain about Scripting Styles in CSS
2. SCRIPTING LANGUAGE:
2.1 Define JavaScript
2.2 syntaxes of JavaScript
2.2.1 literals
2.2.2 variables
2.2.3 constants, comments
2.3 Explain various Operators used in JavaScript
2.3.1 arithmetic
2.3.2 string
2.3.3 logical, bitwise
2.3.4 assignment
2.4 Explain about Conditional Code in JavaScript
2.5 Explain about Loops in JavaScript
2.5.1 for, for/in, for/of

170
 2.5.2 while, do/while
2.6 Explain Arrays in JavaScript
2.6.1 Definition and declaration
2.6.2 initialization, accessing
2.6.3 array methods
2.7 Explain objects in JavaScript
2.7.1 Definition and declaration
2.7.2 initialization, accessing
2.7.3 objects methods
2.8 Explain about Function
2.8.1 definition of function
2.8.2 syntax of function
2.8.3 function invocation with return statement
2.9 What is Testing Type?
2.10 List the Reserved Words in JavaScript
2.11 Explain about Cookies
2.12 Explain about Dialog Box
2.13 Explain about Animation and Multimedia
2.14 Describe about Image Map
3. Dreamweaver Creative Cloud:
3.1 What is Workspace
3.2 Explain Documentation and Preference
3.3 Explain about Toolbar
3.4 Describe various components in Panel
3.5 Draw and explain Basic site Structure
3.6 Describe Naming Conventions
3.7 Defining a site Files and Folders
3.8 Write the procedure to Uploading Files
3.9 Explain about Browser's and Web Sites
3.10 Write the steps needed for Creating Web Page
3.11 Explain about Graphics for the web
3.12 Explain the steps to Importing HTML
4. Work Space and Visual Development:
4.1 Explain Web- Application Development
4.2 Define Photoshop Integration
4.3 Explain about Photoshop Dream weaver Workflows
4.4 Defining your site
4.5 Describe Page layout with table
4.6 Explain various Library temples
4.7 Define form
4.8 Define Data Managing
4.9 Describe about Text and Alignment
4.10 Explain the procedure to Adding effects
4.11 Explain the Optimizing Graphics for the web
4.12 Explain a procedure to Creating navigation Buttons

171
 4.13 Write steps to maintaining web site
4.13.1 Write the procedure to Importing HTML
4.13.2 Write steps to Insert content, Inserting an email
4.13.3 Explain Getting your site on web
5. Flash with Action Scripts:
5.1 Explain about Action Panel
5.2 Explain various Conditions
5.3 Explain various List loops
5.4 Write a procedure to Create a Hyperlink
5.5 Explain the procedure to Working with Movie Clips
5.6 Event Handling
5.6.1 Definition
5.6.2 Listing the basic event handlings
5.6.3 Explain about the basic event handlings
5.7 Graphics and Animation
5.7.1 Definitions
5.7.2 Explain about Creating Button
5.7.3 Explain about Button Animation
5.7.4 Explain about Skeleton Animation
5.8 Explain about Games Developing

COURSE CONTENT

1. Hypertext Mark-up Language (HTML): Introduction and Evolution of World Wide Web,
Browsers, Applications of Web Designing, Introduction to HTML, Benefits of HTML, Structure of
an HTML Document, HTML Standards.HTML TAGS - Text Formatting Tags, Positioning Tags, List
Tags, Table Formatting Tags, Image Tags, Anchor tags, Frames, Forms and Form Elements, and
Other HTML Tags. Introduction to CSS – Styles and Style sheets with CSS, CSS Positioning,
Scripting Styles
2. SCRIPTING LANGUAGE: Introduction to JavaScript - Syntax Basics- Operators-Conditional Code,
Loops, Arrays, Objects- Functions- Testing Type- Reserved Words-Cookies- Dialog Box-
Animation- Multimedia-Image Map-Browser's
3. Dreamweaver Creative Cloud: Introduction- Workspace-Documentation and Preference-
Toolbar- Panel- Basic sit Structure- Naming Conventions-Defining a site Files and Folders-
Uploading Files- Browser's and Web Sites- Creating Web Page- Working with Graphic-Importing
HTML-
4. Work Space and Visual Development: Web- Application Development - Photoshop Integration
- Photoshop Dream weaver Workflows- Defining your site-Page layout with table- Library
temples- form and Data Managing-Working with Text and Alignment - Adding effects,
Optimizing Graphics for the web, Creating navigation Buttons, maintaining web site - Importing
HTML-Insert content, Inserting an email - Getting your site on web
5. Flash with Action Scripts: Working with Action Panel- Code- Conditions and Loops- Create a
Hyperlink, Working with Movie Clips, Text- Basic Event Handlings- Programming for Graphics
and Animation - Creating Button and Button Animation - Skeleton Animation - Games
Developing
172
REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Designing with Web Standards, by Jeffrey Zeldman, New Riders,

1. Usalibity The practice of simplicity, by JakobJielsen, New Riders,

Table specifying the scope of syllabus to be covered for unit tests

Unit Test Learning outcomes to be covered

Unit test-1 From 1.1 to 3.6
Unit test-2 From 3.7 to 5.14

173
Course Course Title No. of Total No. of Marks for FA Marks for SA
code Periods/Weeks periods
3D Modelling
,Texturing, and
AMG-405 4 60 20 80
lighting
Techniques

TIME SCHEDULE
S.N CHAPTE Chapter/ No. of MAR SHORT ESSAY CO’s Mapped
o. R Unit Title Periods KS QUESTION QUEST
NO S IONS
1. 1 Maya Interface 10 2 1 CO1
& Workflow 16

2. 2 Low Polygon 18 26 2 2 CO2

and Advanced
Modeling
Techniques
3. 3 Texturing Work 15 26 2 2 CO3
Flow and
Advanced
Texturing
Techniques
4. 4 Basic Lighting 10 26 2 2 CO4
Techniques
5. 5 Environmental 12 16 2 1 CO5
Lighting
Total Periods 60 110 10 8

S.No. Chapter/Unit Title No.of Periods CO’s Mapped

1. Maya Interface & Workflow 10 CO1
2. Low Polygon and Advanced 18 CO2
Modeling Techniques
3. Texturing Work Flow and Advanced 15 CO3
Texturing Techniques
4. Basic Lighting Techniques 10 CO4

5. Environmental Lighting 12 C05

Total Periods 60

174
 x To familiarize with User interface tools in MAYA software.
x To develop modelling techniques for Polygon using
Polygon tools and to develop 3D modelling techniques.
Course Objectives x To understand Mapping Techniques in texturing and to
apply character texturing techniques
x To familiarize with basic lighting techniques.
x To understand environment lighting .

At the end of the course the student able to learn following:

CO1 AMG-405.1 Describes various User interface tools in MAYA
software
CO2 AMG-405.2 To develop modelling techniques for Polygon using
Polygon tools and to develop 3D modelling techniques
Course
CO3 AMG-405.3 To understand Mapping Techniques in texturing and to
Outcomes
apply character texturing techniques

CO4 AMG-405.4 Demonstrates variousbasic lighting techniques

CO5 AMG-405.5 Apply differentenvironment lighting Techniques

CO-PO/PSO Matrix:

CO NO. PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
AMG-405.1 3 1 3 1 1
AMG-405.2 2 2 2 1 3 1 3 1
AMG-405.3 3 1 1 1 1 1 1
AMG-405.4 1 2 2 1 1 2 1 2
AMG-405.5 3 2 1 1 1 2 2
Average 2.4 1.5 2 1.3 1 1.5 1 2 1.5 1.4

3=Strongly mapped , 2=moderately mapped, 1=slightly mapped

175
Learning Outcomes:

1.0 MAYA INTERFACE&WORKFLOW

1.1. Identify Menu bar and Status bar in Maya layout.
1.2. State the need of Shelves in Maya layout.
1.3. Study about Toolbox tools to move, scale and rotate object.
1.4. Describe viewport in Maya layout.
1.5. Explain navigation controls in Maya layout.
1.6. Explain the importance of Channel Box in Maya layout.
1.7. Describe Layer Editor in Maya layout.
1.8. Explain Attribute Editor in Maya layout.
1.9. Explain Time & Range Slideroptions in Maya layout.
1.10. Check the various playback options in Maya layout.
1.11. Explain command help lines in Maya.
1.12. State the need of outliner in Maya.
1.13. Describe save preferences in Maya layout
1.14. Demonstrate Export and Import options in Maya.
1.15. Study various Project Folder Setting in Maya interface.
1.16. Explain different types of Curves in Maya.
1.17. Explain about various Curve Editing Tools.
1.18. Explain Curve Fillet andRebuild Curves.
1.19. Explain about NURBS Surfaces.
1.20. Describe the necessity of object and component in Maya.
1.21. Explain the process of Revolve in Maya.

2.0 LOW POLYGON AND ADVANCED MODELLING TECHNIQUES:

2.1. Study the purpose of Polygons Primitives Object &Component.
2.2. Describe Polygon Selection– Combine and Group.
2.3. State the need of Extract in polygon modeling.
2.4. Explain the concept of Booleans in polygon modeling.
2.5. Explain Triangulate &Quad angulate.
2.6. Explain Component Selection Tools.
2.7. Explain Component Editing Tools.
2.8. Develop Logos for various examples like your college, branch, city… etc.
2.9. Develop a Simple Models according to your ideology by using various polygon modelling
techniques.
2.10. Study about basic Anatomy Needs for Character Model.

176
2.11. Explain Model sheet preparation in 2D modelling.
2.12. Explain the Conditions of Model Sheet Preparation in 2D modelling.
2.13. Explain Pose Studies in 2D modeling.
2.14. State the need of Polygon Nodes in 2D modeling.
2.15. Explain Mesh concept with examples in 2D modeling.
2.16. Mention the steps to Avoid Triangle in 2D modeling.
2.17. Describe Basic Shapes Making in 2D modeling.
2.18. Explain Poly Count in 2D modeling.
2.19. Know how to set Model Sheets in 3D modeling.
2.20. Explain the concept of Image Planes in modeling with examples.
2.21. Explain how to create the following
2.21.1. Body Parts
2.21.2. Arms
2.21.3. Legs
2.21.4. Fingers
2.21.5. Toe
2.22. Explain Sculpting Meshes in 3D modeling.
2.23. Explain the steps to create Meshes in 3D modeling.
2.24. Explain how to use Polygon Tools in 3D modeling.
2.25. Explain the steps to create
2.25.1. Male Head
2.25.2. Female Head
2.25.3. Child
2.25.4. Old Man
2.25.5. Realistic Head and Cartoon Head
2.25.6. Ear and Inner Eye
2.25.7. Inner Mouth, Teeth and Tongue
2.25.8. Polygon Hair
3.0 TEXTURING WORK FLOWAND ADVANCE TEXTURING TECHNIQUE
3.1. Know about Hyper Shade in Texturing.
3.2. State the need of networking concept in Texturing.
3.3. Explain Texture mapping with different examples.
3.4. Explain about File Texture.
3.5. Describe Texture Resolution concept in Texturing.
3.6. Explain about Texture Filtering.
3.7. Explain the following Mapping Methods in Texturing.
3.7.1.Projection Mapping
3.7.2.Stencil Mapping
3.7.3.Label Mapping
3.7.4.Bump Mapping
3.8. Describe 2D &3D Texture Positioning with examples.
3.9. Explain following Mapping types
3.9.1.Planar Mapping
3.9.2.Cylindrical Mapping
3.9.3.Spherical Mapping.
3.10. Explain about Mapping Manipulators in Texturing.
3.11. Explain Layered Textures with examples.
3.12. State the need of Unwrapping in Texturing.
3.13. Describe UV Texture Editor.
3.14. Explain the steps to create UV Files.
3.15. Explain different UV Edit Tools.

177
 3.16. Explain character texturing techniques.
3.17. Explain Normalize concept in Texturing.
3.18. Describe about Rotate concept in Texturing.
3.19. Explain about Map UV Border in Texturing.
3.20. State the purpose of Relax concept in Texturing.
3.21. Describe about Untold in Texturing.
3.22. Explain about Layout in Texturing.
3.23. Explain the steps to cut UV Edges, Split and Move in Texturing.
3.24. State the purpose of UV Snap Shot in Texturing.
3.25. Explain the concept of Texturing in Photoshop.
4.0 BASIC LIGHTINGTECHNIQUES
4.1. Explain about Maya Lights.
4.2. State the Art of Lighting.
4.3. Explain Common Light Attributes.
4.4. Explain the various types of Light.
4.4.1.Ambient Light
4.4.2.Directional Light
4.4.3.Point Light
4.4.4.Spot Light
4.4.5.Volume Light
4.5. Describe about Light Menus.
4.6. Explain the steps to working on Light Decay.
4.7. Explain Lighting Placement concept.
4.8. State the need of Key in lighting techniques.
4.9. Explain the process of Fill in lighting techniques.
4.10. Explain about Rim Lights.
4.11. Describe about Positioning Lights.
4.12. Explain Light Connections with examples.
4.13. Explain about Negative Lights with examples.
5.0 ENVIRONMENT LIGHTING
5.1. Introduction to Light Setup environment lighting.
5.2. Explain the concept of Exterior Light Setup with examples.
5.3. Explain the concept of Interior Light Setup with examples.
5.4. Explain the concept of 3Point Lighting Setup with examples.
5.5. Describe Light Linking in environment lighting.
5.6. Describe Shadow Linking in environment lighting.
5.7. Compare Light Linking and Shadow Linking techniques.
5.8. Explain the concept of Light fog.
5.9. Explain the concept of Light Glow.
5.10. Explain about Depth Map Shadow in environment lighting.
5.11. Explain about Ray Trace Shadow in environment lighting.
5.12. Describes about Environment &Volume Fogs techniques with examples.
5.13. Explain about Camera Settings.
5.14. Explain the concept of Depth of Field.
5.15. Mention about Motion Blur.
5.16. Explain about the Production Quality.
5.17. Explain the steps to create Sun Direction Light.
5.18. Describe the concept Render Global in environment lighting.
5.19. Explain Software Rendering in environment lighting.
5.20. Explain about IPR Rendering.
5.21. Explain briefly about Ray Trace Setting.

178
COURSE CONTENT:

1. Maya interface & workflow – Menu Bars- Status Bar – Shelves –Toolbox -Viewport & Navigation
Controls - Channel Box – Layer Editor –Attribute Editor –Time & Range Slider –Playback Options
– Command & Help Lines – Outliner – Save Preferences – Export & Import – Project Folder Setting
– Intro to Curves –Types Of Curves – Curve Editing Tools – Curve Fillet – Rebuild Curves – Nurbs
Surfaces – Object & Component – Revolve .
2. LOW POLYGON AND ADVANCE MODELLING TECHNIQUES:
2D MODEL PROCESS:Polygons Primitives – Object &Component – Polygon Selection– Combine,
Group, Extract& Booleans– Triangulate &Quad angulate– Component Selection Tools –
Component Editing Tools -Anatomy Needs For Character Model – Model Sheet Preparation –
Conditions Of Model Sheet Preparation Draw Model Sheet –Mesh – Avoid Triangle – Basic Shapes
Making – Create Low Resolution Model – Poly Count
3 D MODEL PROCESS: Model Sheets –Image Planes – Blocking With Primitives – Creating Body Parts
– Creating Arms & Legs – Creating Fingers & Toe – PolygonsNormal's– Sculpting Meshes – Fine
Tuning-Create Portrait Model – Head Blocking – Create Meshes –Needs Of Polygon Editing Tools
– How To Use Polygon Tools – Male Head – Female Head – Child – Old Man – Realistic Head –
Cartoon Head – Ear – Inner Mouth – Teeth – Tongue - Inner Eye – Polygon Hair

3. TEXTURING WORK FLOW AND ADVANCE TEXTURING TECHNIQUES

Hyper Shade & Networking – Intro to Texture mapping– File Texture – Texture Resolution –
Texture Filtering –Mapping Methods– Projection Mapping – Stencil Mapping – Label Mapping –
Bump Mapping –2D &3D Texture Positioning –Mapping types-Planar Mapping – Cylindrical
Mapping –Spherical Mapping– Mapping Manipulators –Layered Textures Unwrapping – UV
Texture Editor – Create UV Files – UV Edit Tools –Character texturing Techniques-Normalize,
Rotate– Map UV Border, Relax, Untold, Layout – Cut UV Edges, Split, Move– UV Snap Shot –
Texturing In Photoshop
4. Basic lighting techniques – Maya Lights – Art of Lighting - Common Light Attributes –Types of
Light – Ambient Light – Directional Light – Point Light – Spot Light – Volume Light - Light Menus –
Working on Decay – Lighting Placement –Key, Fill, Rim Lights – Positioning Lights – Light
Connections – Negative Lights

5. Environment lighting – Exterior Light Setup – Interior Lighting –3Point Lighting Setup –Light
Linking – Shadow Linking – using Light fog – Light Glow - Depth Map Shadow –Ray Trace Shadow
– Environment &Volume Fogs – Camera Settings – Depth of Field – Motion Blur – Production
Quality– Create Sun Direction Light Scene – Render Global - Software Rendering – IPR Rendering
– Ray Trace Setting

REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Mastering Maya AERIC KELLER WILEY INDIA PVT LTD 2009 - First Edition
2. Autodesk Maya Techniques Marc – André iguanodon neoreel Autodesk media
Entertainment 2008 First Edition
3. Maya with Photoshop Daniel gray BPB Publications 2007- First Edition

Table specifying the scope of syllabus to be covered for unit tests

Unit Test Learning outcomes to be covered

Unit test-1 From 1.1 to 3.16
Unit test-2 From 3.17 to 5.21

179
 No. of Total No. of
Course code Course Title Marks for FA Marks for SA
Periods/Weeks periods
3D ANIMATION
AND GRAPHICS
AMG-406 3 45 40 60
LAB

Required Infrastructure(Software, Hardware and other Equipment) to be procured as per C-20:

SNO Hardware / Equipment Needed Software Needed

1 Desktop Systems: 1. Operating System:
Microsoft Windows 10
Configuration: professional-64 bit (Minimum)
17. Processor :: AMD Ryzen 9 3900X Or any
other equivalent intel/Motorola etc.. 2.Animation and Graphics
processor or Above Software
18. Mother Board: AMD 400/500 or its g. Adobe master collection cs6
equivalent or above (or Above)
19. RAM: 8GB(or above) dual channel DDR4 h. Autodesk MAYA
20. HDD: 500GM (SSD)/1TB(or above) i. Autodesk 3DS MAX.
21. Graphics Card: Aorus GeForce RTX 2080 Ti
Xtreme (or equivalent )
22. Monitor: 17” or above
23. Multimedia Devices like Mic, Head Phones
/ Speakers , USB Web camera or USB
Digital Video Camera
24. Color Photo Scanner and Printer

S.No. Chapter/Unit Title No.of Periods CO’s Mapped

1. Introduction To 3Ds MAX 9 CO1
2. Modeling Techniques 6 CO2
3. Material & Shading network 9 CO3
4. Rigging & Animation 9 CO4
5. Lighting &Rendering 12 CO5
Total Periods 45

x To familiarize with 3Ds MAX software

x To understand Modelling Techniques
x To understand Material & Shading network
Course Objectives x To understand Rigging
x To understand Lighting & Rendering

180
 CO NO COURSE OUTCOMES
CO1 AMG-406.1 Practice the user interface Menus, tool bars of 3Ds MAX software,
keyboard shortcuts.
CO2 AMG-406.2 Design surfaces and Modelling techniques
CO3 AMG-406.3 Develop animations using Material & Shading network, mappings
CO4 AMG-406.4 Practice Animation tools, Curve Editor, Character studio in developing 3D
animations.
CO5 AMG-406.5 Use Lighting, Rendering, filters and FX simulations on 3D animations.

6. CO-PO/PSO MATRIX

CO NO. PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
AG-308.1 1 1 1 2 2 2
AG-308.2 1 2 1 2 1 2 2 2
AG-308.3 1 2 2 2 2 3 1 3 2
AG-308.4 1 3 3 3 2 2 3 1 3 2
AG-308.5 1 3 3 3 2 2 3 1 3 3
Average 1 2.5 2 2.5 2 1.6 2.6 1.4 2.6 2.3
3=strongly mapped, 2=moderately mapped, 1=slightly mapped

Learning outcomes:

1. Installation of 3Ds max studio and practice IDE.

2. Practice commands, menus and toolbars.
3. Create 3d geometric objects like cone, cylinder, sphere, and cube.
4. Create an Exterior Set modeling with given reference Image.
5. Model the interior set with given reference image.
6. Practice editable poly surfaces and Editable mesh surfaces.
7. Create vehicle modeling application using a bike.
8. Texture the given exterior model with PSD.
9. Texture the given set model with bitmap file using material editor
10. Practice ray trace mapping for an exterior setup like a tree.
11. Create your college logo animation
12. Create animation application to rotate a globe on inclined stand.
13. Create the lighting for exterior with mental ray lighting system.
14. Create the lighting for interior with I-ray render lighting system.
15. Create a 3D animation application to add backgrounds and filters using Video Post

181
 The competencies and key competencies to be achieved by the student

S.No. Name of the experiment Objectives Key Competencies

1 Installation of 3Ds max studio Identify different options of ™ Practice IDE options
and practice IDE. IDE in 3D Max
2 Practice commands, menus Identify commands, menus ™ Practice commands, menus
and toolbars. and tool bars and tool bars
3 Create 3d geometric objects Identify different ™ Practice geometric objects
like cone, cylinder, sphere, Geometric objects
and cube.
4 Create an Exterior Set Identify exterior modeling ™ Practice exterior modeling
modeling with given reference tools tools like shading, layers etc
Image. ™ Practice types of images
importing in to 3D max
5 Model the interior set with Identify interior modeling ™ Practice interior modeling
given reference image. tools tools like shading, layers etc
™ Practice types of images
importing in to 3D max
6 Practice editable poly surfaces Identify editable poly ™ Practice editable poly
and Editable mesh surfaces. surfaces and mesh surface surface tools and editable
tools mesh surface tools like
vertices, edges, boarders,
polygon etc
7 Create vehicle modeling Identify vehicle modeling ™ Practice vehicle modelling
application using a bike. tools tools like vertices, edges,
boarders, polygon, connect,
etc
8 Texture the given exterior Identify various texture ™ Practice various materials
model with PSD images and textures etc
9 Texture the given set model Identify material editor ™ Practice material editor
with bitmap file using material options options and importing
editor bitmap images
10 Practice ray trace mapping for Identify ray trace map ™ Practice material editor
reflective and refractive option options and ray trace map
surfaces. options
11 Create Your college logo Design your college logo ™ Practice shapes, colors and
animation rendering options
12 Create animation application Animate the globe with ™ Practice rotation of object
to rotate a globe on inclined rotate options options
stand.
13 Create the lighting for exterior Identify mental ray render ™ Practice mental ray render
with mental ray lighting lighting tools lighting options
system.
14 Create the lighting for interior Identify I-ray render ™ Practice I-ray render lighting
with I-ray render lighting lighting tools options
system.
15 Create a 3D animation Identify background tool, ™ Practice Video Post options
application to add
filters and video post
backgrounds and filters using
Video Post options

182
 Course No. of Total No. of Marks for
Course Title Marks for FA
code Periods/Weeks periods SA

Digital
AMG-407 4 60 40 60
Photography Lab

GUIDE LINES:

All the exercises provided in the list of practical’s should be

completed and submitted during the semester examination.
In order to develop skill in mastering creativity, every student should
be made to practice thoroughly.
The external examiners are requested to ensure that a single
practical oriented question should not be given to more than three
students while admitting a batch of 30 students during Board
Examination.

S No Chapter/ Unit Title No. of COs Mapped

Periods

1. BASIC OF PHOTOGRAPHY 10 CO1

2. DIGITAL PHOTOGRAPHY 15 CO1,C02,C03

3. IMAGE COMPOSITION 15 CO1,CO2,CO3

4. DIGITAL IMAGING&PHOTOGRAPHY 20 CO1,CO2,CO3,CO4,CO5

Total 60

x Perform Camera Mechanism and Handling various equipment in

digital photography
x Applying lighting techniques in handling various photo shoots
Course Objectives along with projecting various styles in photo graphic
x Designing various images in various formats
x Applying Digital color correction &grading
x Perform Printing & sharing photos.

CO No COURSE OUTCOMES

CO1 AMG-407.1. Analysing basic principles of Photography

CO2 AMG-407.2 Practicing Digital camera Functions.
CO3 AMG-407.3 Applying various image composing techniques.
CO4 AMG-407.4 Applying digital imaging principles
CO5 AMG-407.5 Practicing industrial Applications of photography techniques and
documentation.

183
 CO-PO/PSO MATRIX

CO NO. PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
AMG-407.1 2 2 2 3 2 2
AMG-407.2 2 2 2 2 3 3 2
AMG-407.3 2 2 3 2 3 2 3 2
AMG-407.4 2 3 2 2 2 3 3 1
AMG-407.5 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 1
average 2 2 2.6 2 2 2.3 2.6 2.8 2.4 1
3=Strongly mapped , 2=moderately mapped, 1=slightly mapped

LIST OF PRACTICAL EXERCISES

1. Take shots of a Landscape exterior in different angles.

2. Create Portrait Photography.
3. Create Food Photography
4. Create your own visual story Photography
5. Create your silhouette Photography
6. Create macro Photography
7. Create your creative Photography
8. Create your special effects Photography
9. Create Photography album
10. Create Milky Way photography
11. Create Pet photography
12. Crete sea space Photography
13. Create wildlife photography

184
 AMG-408 Communication Skills

Course No. of Total No. of Marks Marks for

Course Title
Code Periods/Week Periods for FA SA

Communication
AMG-408 3 45 40 60
Skills

Course Objectives: The students shall

- communicate effectively in diverse academic, professional and everyday situations

- exhibit appropriate body language and etiquette at workplace

- be employable through preparing appropriate job applications and attend interviews confidently
with all necessary skills

Course Outcomes: The students shall

CO1: Listen and comprehend the listening inputs related to different genres effectively

CO2: Communicate effectively in interpersonal interactions, interviews, group discussions and

presentations

CO3: Acquire employability skills: job hunting, resume writing, attending interviews

CO4: Practise appropriate body language and professional etiquette

Course Delivery: Text book: “Communication Skills”

By State Board of Technical Education and Training, AP

SlNo Unit Teaching

Hours
1 Listening Skills 6
2 Work place Etiquette 3
3 Introduce oneself 3
4 Short presentation (JAM) 6
5 Group Discussion 6
6 Resume Writing and Cover Letter 3
7 Interview Skills 9
8 Presentation Skills 9
Total 45

185
Course Content:

UNIT I:Listening Skills 6 periods

Pre – While- Post-listening activities- Listening to audio content ( dialogues/ speech/ narrations) -
answering the questions and fill in the blanks- vocabulary

UNIT 2: Work place Etiquette 3 periods

Basics of Etiquette- politeness/ courtesy, good manners- features of work place etiquette-
adaptability, positive attitude, body language.

UNIT 3: Introducing One self 3 periods

Speak about oneself- introduce oneself to a gathering/ formal & informal situations- Know about
others- filling in the grid- introducing oneself in interviews

UNIT 4: Short Presentation 6 periods

Dos and Don’ts in short presentation- speak for a minute without repetition, deviation & hesitation -
the techniques to speak fluently – defining and describing objects, people, phenomena, events.-
speaking on randomly chosen topics.

UNIT 5: Group Discussion 6 periods

Fundamentals of Group Discussion- Dos and Don’ts- filling the Grid- possible list of topics- practice
sessions- sample videos-Group activity

UNIT 6: Resume Writing and Cover Letter 3 periods

Pre activity: answer the questions- jotting down biographical information- sample resumes- tips, Dos
and Don’ts- model resumes- practice exercises on Resume writing

UNIT 7: Interview Skills 9 periods

Pre –while-post activities: - things to do at three stages – respond to notifications- know the
information about the organisation-practice FAQs - preparation of good/ suitable C V, Body
language, tips for success in interviews, model / mock interviews.

UNIT 8: Presentation Skills 9 periods

Preparatory work: observe pictures and answer questions- different kinds of presentations- PPTs,
Flash cards, Posters, Charts. - tips to prepare aids, slide show, model PPTs, - checklist on pre, while
and post presentations.

Mapping Course Outcomes with Programme Outcomes:

PO 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
CO POs 1 to 5 are applications of Engineering Principles, 1,2,3,4 1,2,3,4
can’t be directly mapped to Communication Skills

186
 CO –PO Mapping

Cognitive levels as per

Bloom’s Taxonomy
R/U/A/An
Cos / Unit
CO Course Outcome POs mapping ( Remembering /
Mapped
Understanding /
Applying/ Analyising)

CO 1 Listen and comprehend Unit 1 6,7 R/U/A

listening inputs related to
different genres
effectively
CO2 Communicate effectively 3,4,5,7,8 6,7 R/U/A/An
in interpersonal
interactions, interviews,
group discussions and
presentations
CO3 Acquire employability 6,7 6,7 R/U/A/An
skills: job hunting, resume
writing, attending
interviews
CO4 Practise appropriate body 2, 3,4,5,7,8 6,7 R/U/A
language and professional
etiquette

ASSESSMENT

C23-Common-408: English Communication Skills Lab

x The assessment for C23-Common 408 : ‘English Communication Skills’ is on par with all other
practical subjects comprising 40 marks for Internal assessment and 60 marks for External
examination attaining the final total of 100 Marks.

x The Internal Assessment can be conducted in the form of Assignments in all the 8 Units. One or
Two assignments can be conducted in each Unit, awarding 10 marks for each assignment and the
total marks can be averaged to 40 marks as suggested below.

x These assignments should focus mostly on LISTENING and SPEAKING skills rather than writing.
However, for the practice sake, students can write down their assignments in a separate note
book to enable them speak/present in the end exam fluently. The students should submit these
assignment note books to the teacher.

x Questioning styles vary from Unit to Unit as different skills are assessed in each Unit with specific
parameters as given in the workbook.

187
 x Listening skills can be tested by playing different Audio/ Video clips ( appropriate in content and
language, preferably without subtitles) and test their skill of listening comprehension . Follow
pre-while-post stages of listening activity and students should answer general, specific,
inferential, vocabulary questions.

x Personal profile, describing a place/a thing/ a person/ an event / a picture, JAM, presentations,
Direct interaction with the teacher/ examiner are the topics for individual speaking skills.

x Role plays, GD and Interview skills should be made as group activities and the teacher assesses
various skills of the students as given in the workbook.

x Teacher should maintain a record of the following Assessment sheet ( one for each student) to
award Internal marks.

Calculating Internal marks through Assignments :

Name of the Student: PIN:Branch: Academic Year:
S. Title of the Unit Assignment 1: Assignment 2: Total Marks in
No. 10 Marks 10 Marks each Unit (Average
for 10 Marks )
1 Listening Skills
2 Workplace etiquette
3 Introducing Oneself
4 Short Presentations (JAM)
5 Group Discussion
6 Resume & Cover Letter
7 Interview Skills
8 Presentation Skills
Marks Scored Ex: 65
Total No. of Units 8
Internal Assessment : (65/8 ) X4 = 32.5 33 ( for 40 Marks)
Average for 40 Marks

End Exam Model paper: C23-Common-408 : Communication Skills Lab

Guidelines to prepare the question paper of the Lab End exam for 60 marks:

I. Listening Skills:
Students listen to the audio / watch the video clip ( without subtitles) and answer the questions
supplied to them in advance; observe the three stages of the Listening activity. : 10 Marks
II. Individual Speaking skills:
a) Speak for a minute (JAM) on the given topic, can be allotted through chits/lots: 10 M.
b) Individual speaking skills on any given topic ….descriptions / role play etc: 10 Marks
c) Direct Interaction/ dialogue with the examiner to test his/her speaking skills : 10M.
III. Pair / Group Speaking Activities. : 20 Marks
a) Role Plays / dialogue making , b) Group Discussion, c) Interview skills

188
Note: If the students are more in number and the time is not sufficient to conduct the Viva for all
the students in a single spell, the examiner can also adapt the blended mode of exam. A few
significant questions can be tested orally and one or two questions can be answered in writing.(
Ex: Resume, cover letter, FAQs in Interview skills etc.) along with the answers of Listening Test.

Aspects to be evaluated to test speaking skills

S.No Language Aspects Organising Aspects Body Language
aspects
1 Content: Quality, clarity and Coherence, cohesion of Postures
relevance of ideas relevant ideas
2 Fluency Proper beginning, topic Gestures,
sentence, expansion/details,
conclusion
3 Vocabulary Using proper Linkers Eye contact
4 Pronunciation Avoid repetitions, clichés, fillers Audibility, pitch,
Permissible pauses
5 Grammar ( Syntax, Other Permissible
semantics) body movements

189
 Course code Course Title No. of Total No. of Marks for FA Marks for SA
Periods/Weeks periods
3D Modelling
AMG-409 Texturing and 4 60 40 60
Lightening Lab

Required Infrastructure(Software, Hardware and other Equipment) to be procured as per C-20:

SNO Hardware / Equipment Needed Software Needed

1 Desktop Systems: 1. Operating System:
Microsoft Windows 10
Configuration: professional-64 bit (Minimum)
25. Processor :: AMD Ryzen 9 3900X Or any
other equivalent intel/Motorola etc.. 2.Animation and Graphics
processor or Above Software
26. Mother Board: AMD 400/500 or its j. Adobe master collection cs6
equivalent or above (or Above)
27. RAM: 8GB(or above) dual channel DDR4 k. Autodesk MAYA
28. HDD: 500GM (SSD)/1TB(or above) l. Autodesk 3DS MAX.
29. Graphics Card: Aorus GeForce RTX 2080 Ti
Xtreme (or equivalent )
30. Monitor: 17” or above
31. Multimedia Devices like Mic, Head Phones /
Speakers , USB Web camera or USB Digital
Video Camera
32. Color Photo Scanner and Printer

No. of
S No Chapter/ Unit Title COs Mapped
Periods

1. Maya Interface & Workflow 6 CO1

Low Polygon and Advance Modeling

2. 15 CO2
Techniques

Texturing Work Flow and Advance

3. 15 CO3
Texturing Techniques

4. Basic Lighting Techniques 15 CO4

5. Environmental Lighting 9 CO5

Total 60

190
 Upon completion of the course the student shall be able to

11. Installation of MAYA software.

12. Practice all menus in MAYA layout and exercise various options like Time
slider, Range slider, Import and Export options ... etc.
13. Install and practice Component Selection, Editing, Split, Bevel, Chamfers,
Split and Sculpt geometry tools.
COURSE
14. Draw various model sheets in Front and Side views.
OBJECTIVES 15. Describe Basic Shapes Making and draw Low Resolution Model.
16. Install and draw various polygon editing tools in 3D.
17. Practice to draw Ear, Inner Mouth, Teeth, Tongue, Inner Eye and Polygon
Hair
18. Practice different mappings like Projection Mapping, Stencil Mapping, Label
Mapping, Bump Mapping, ... etc.
19. Practice various Depth ColoringTechniques update With Maya
20. Install Spotlight Tools and and develop Spotlight Techniques

CO No COURSE OUTCOMES

CO 1 AMG-409.1 Installing MAYA tools and practice various options in Maya layout

CO 2 AMG-409.2 Develop a Simple Model (including Logos) according to your ideology by

using various polygon modelling techniques.
CO 3 AMG-409.3 Draw various models like Ear, Inner Mouth, Teeth, Tongue, Inner Eye and
Polygon Hair, Male Head, Female Head, Child – Old Man, Realistic Head
and Cartoon Head.
CO 4 AMG-409.4 Illustrates how to working with different types of light

CO 5 AMG-409.5 Develop different types of light setup models in environment lighting

CO-PO/PSO MATRIX

CO NO. PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
AMG-409.1 2 2 1 1 1
AMG-409.2 1 3 2 3 1 2 2 2
AMG-409.3 1 2 3 1 3
AMG-409.4 2 2 3 3 2 2
AG-409.5 2 2 1 2 1 2
Average 2 1.6 3 1.5 2.4 1.6 2 1 2 2.3
3=Strongly mapped , 2=moderately mapped, 1=slightly mapped

191
LEARNING OUTCOMES:

1. Practice Menu bar, Status bar in MAYA layout.

2. Exercise on different Maya layout options like Export option, Import option, play back options,
.., etc.
3. Practice various Curve Editing Tools.
4. Draw the NURBS Surfaces.
5. Practice various polygon tools like Split, Bevel, Sculpt Geometry, …, etc.
6. Develop Logos for various examples like your college, branch, city… etc.using various polygon
modelling techniques.
7. Develop a Simple Model according to your ideology by using various polygon modelling
techniques.
8. Prepare Model Sheet to any image in Front View and Side View.
9. Practice to making Basic Shapes of any image in 2D.
10. Draw various human body Parts like Arms, Legs, Fingers & Toe in 3D.
11. Draw the picture of Male Head, Female Head and Child – Old Man in 3D.
12. Draw the picture of any bird’s Realistic Head and Cartoon Head in 3D.
13. Practice various images using different Mapping Methods.
14. Practice on any image by changing common light attributes.
15. Exercise on various light menus and options.
16. Practice on different types of lights.
17. Demonstrates the Positioning Lights by taking an image
18. Light The Interior Scene Using Software Renderfor any image
19. Light The Exterior Scene Using Software Render for any image
20. Light The Given 3d Scene With Caustics And Final Gather
21. Practice how to create Sun Direction Light Scene to an image
22. Demonstrates the Camera Settings and Ray Trace Setting
23. Light The Scene With Direct Illumination Using Skylight System

The competencies and key competencies to be achieved by the student

S.No. Name of the Objectives Key Competencies

Experiment

1 Practice Menu Identify the different ™ Identify the different options in

bar, Status bar in options in Menu bar, Menu bar, Status bar
MAYA layout. Status bar of MAYA ™ Differentiate various options in
menu bar and status bar in MAYA
layout
layout
2 Exercise on Identify the various ™ Identify different MAYA layout
different Maya options in Maya layout options
layout options ™ Know the purpose of each option
™ Practice all options in layout
like Export
option, Import
option, play back
options, ..., etc.

192
3 Practice various Showing the various ™ Know the Curve Editing Tools
Curve Editing Curve Editing Tools ™ Install available curve editing tools
Tools. ™ Practice curve editing techniques

4 Draw the NURBS Identify different ™ Identify the NURBS Boolean values
Surfaces measurements to draw ™ Draw NURBS Surfaces
NURBS surface ™ Practice on that surface with
different measurements
5 Practice various Identify different ™ Installation of Split, Bevel, Sculpt
polygon tools like polygon tools available Geometry, ... , etc. Polygon tools.
Split, Bevel, and Install that polygon ™ Practice different tools with various
examples
Sculpt Geometry, tools
…, etc.

6 Develop Logos Know the techniques ™ Know about various polygon

and Simple used to draw Logos modelling techniques.
Models according ™ Identify different Logos
Identify various Models ™ Develop various models
to your ideology
by using various
polygon
modelling
techniques.

7 Prepare Model Identify the elements of ™ Prepare Model sheet in 2D

Sheet to any Model Sheet in 2D ™ Know different views like Front view
image in Front and Side view in 2D
™ Practice any image in Front view and
View and Side
Side view
View.

8 Practice to Identify the various basic ™ Know the basic shapes in 2D

making Basic shapes of image in 2D ™ Draw any image basic shapes in 2D
Shapes of any
image in 2D.

9 Draw various Identify various tools to ™ Know different tools used to draw
Body Parts like draw any image in 3D any image in 3D
Arms, Legs, ™ Draw different images like Arms,
Legs, and Fingers & Toe.
Fingers & Toe,
™ Draw Male Head, Female Head,
Male Head, Child – Old Man.
Female Head, ™ Draw Realistic Head and Cartoon
Child – Old Head
Man,Realistic ™ Compare all images
Head and
Cartoon Head in
3D.

193
10 Practice various Identify different ™ Know different Mapping Methods
images using Mapping Methods and ™ Know about PSD network
different different texture models ™ Identify different models in PSD
network
Mapping in PSD network
™ Create PSD network
Methods and ™ Practice on PSD network in texturing
Texture the given
exterior model
with PSD network

11 Exercise on how Identify UV file options ™ Know various UV editing tools

to create UV ™ Install UV editing tools
Files. ™ Exercise to create UV file
™ Practice on various UV file options
12 Draw an animal Know the different ™ Identify various painting techniques
image by using painting techniques ™ Compare different painting
various painting techniques
™ Paint different animal images using
techniques.
various Brushes
13 Practice how to Identify Mesh concept in ™ Know about Mesh concept
exporting Mesh advance texturing ™ Develop mesh in texturing
technique ™ Exercise export option in Mesh
method
14 Create any image Identify Displacement ™ Know about Displacement Mapping
by using Mapping concept in concept
Displacement advance texturing ™ Create any image by using
Displacement Mapping
Mapping. technique
™ Practice with different images
15 Texture human Identify different models ™ Know various models in texturing
face model with and draw that model ™ Draw different models
given texture ™ Compare different models
reference image

194
 No. of Total No. of
Course code Course Title Marks for FA Marks for SA
Periods/Weeks periods
40(20 – 60 (30-
Networking
Networking + Networking
AMG-410 And Web 4 60
20- Mini +30- Mini
Designing Lab
Project) project)

GUIDE LINES:

x All the exercises provided in the list of practical’s should be completed and submitted during
the semester examination.
x In order to develop skill in mastering creativity, every student should be made to practice
thoroughly.
x The external examiners are requested to ensure that a single practical oriented question
should not be given to more than three students while admitting a batch of 30 students
during Board Examination.

No. of
S No Chapter/ Unit Title COs Mapped
Periods
Computer Networking
1. 25 CO1,CO2,CO3
Network Maintenance through server
2. 15 CO3,CO4
Networking Lab Total 40
Mini Project (should be developed -
3 Based on Web designing 45 CO1,CO2,CO3,CO4,CO5,CO6
Course)
Mini Project Total 20
Total No. of Hours 60

1. Identify all the components of mother board.

2. Install drives, NIC cards, modems(internal, external)
3. Install network devices, design and develop network.
4. Understand ip address classes and sub netting
COURSE 5. Prepare cross and straight Ethernet cables
6. Install and configure proxy server
OBJECTIVES 7. Install any network operating system and Control/maintain the network
and network resources using server administration.
8. Troubleshoot the entire network
9. Setting up VPN
10. Develop a Live Web based Animation Mini Project based on the
Knowledge acquired in web designing Theory Course.

195
 CO1 AG-410.1 Identify the PC Components.
CO2 AG-410.2 Install network devices, Design and develop network and
perform sub-netting
CO3 AG-410.3 Install any Operating system and maintain/ control the entire
Course network as a system administrator
Outcomes
CO4 AG-410.4 Troubleshoot entire network.
CO5 AG-410.5 Install any network device and configure
C06 AG-410.6 Developing a Live Web based Mini project to encourage group
activity

CO-PO/PSO MATRIX

CO NO. PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
AMG-410.1 2 1 2 2
AMG-410.2 3 3 1 3 2
AMG-410.3 2 2 3 2 3 2 2 2 2 2
AMG-410.4 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
AMG-410.5 3 3 1 3 2
AMG-410.6 2 2 3 2 3 2 2 2 2
Average 2.3 2.2 2 2.5 3 2 2 2 2 2
3=Strongly mapped , 2=moderately mapped, 1=slightly mapped

Learning Outcomes:

Computer Networking
1. Exercise on Identification and familiarization of various components of computer system.
a. Identify and note down mother board , Components and Chips
b. Identify various Internal and External slots in the mother board and clean them
with blower/ Brush.
c. Practice Inserting and Removing RAM with care
d. Measure the Output voltages of SMPS
2. Exercise on Installation of Network card.
3. Exercise on Dis-assembling and assembling of working desktop.
4. Exercise on Preparing the Ethernet cable for cross and direct connections using crimping tool
and test using LAN tester.
5. Exercise on Installation of a switch and connecting systems to a network switch.
6. Exercise on Installation of a modem (internal, external or USB) and connecting to internet.
7. Exercise on Using FTP for uploading and downloading files.
8. Exercise on Installation and configuring the proxy server for internet access.
9. Exercise on Setting of particular IP address to an existing terminal system
10. Exercise on Installation of network operating system
Network Maintenance through server
11. Exercise on Creating and managing user accounts through network server.
12. Exercise on Configuration of DHCP and DNS
13. Exercise on File/Folder accessing rights for sharing
14. Exercise on remote desktop.
15. Exercise on setting up of VPN on network
16. Mini Project:

196
 The competencies and key competencies to be achieved by the student

S.No. Name of the Objectives Key Competencies

experiment
1 Exercise on Identification and ™ Identify and note down mother board ,
Identification familiarization of various Components and Chips.
and components of ™ Identify various Internal and External
familiarization of computer system. slots in the mother board and clean
various them with blower/ Brush.
components of ™ Practice Inserting and Removing RAM
computer with care.
system. ™ Measure the Output voltages of SMPS.

2 Exercise on Installation of Network ™ Identify the slot for placing NIC card
Installation of card. ™ Know how to place NIC card
Network card. ™ Install required NIC driver
™ Check for working status of NIC card

3 Exercise on Dis- Dis-assembling and ™ Identify all the peripherals of Desktop

assembling and assembling of working computer.
assembling of desktop. ™ Check the working condition of system
working desktop. before dis-assembling it.
™ Dis-assemble all the peripherals.
™ Assemble all the peripherals.
™ Check the working condition of system
after assembling it.
4 Exercise on Preparing the Ethernet ™ Know the color pattern of Ethernet
Preparing the cable for cross and cable for direct connection.
Ethernet cable direct connections using ™ Prepare UTP cable for direct connection
for cross and crimping tool and test using crimping tool.
direct using cable tester. ™ Check the working condition of cable
connections using LAN tester.
using crimping ™ Know the color pattern of Ethernet
tool and test cable for cross connection.
using LAN tester. ™ Prepare UTP cable for cross connection
using crimping tool.
™ Check the working condition of cable
using LAN tester.
5 Exercise on Installation of a switch ™ Know the purpose of switch
Installation of a and connecting systems ™ Run Ethernet cables from switch to
switch and to a network switch individual computers
connecting ™ Connect Ethernet cables of computers
systems to a to switch.
network switch. ™ Check the network status of the
connection in computer system.

6 Exercise on Installation of a modem Internal modem

Installation of a (internal, external or ™ Identify PCI slot for placing Internal
modem USB) and connecting to modem
(internal, internet. ™ Connect internal modem
external or USB) ™ Install required modem driver

197
 and connecting ™ Check for the working condition
to internet. External modem
™ Connect External modem
™ Install required modem driver
™ Check for the working condition
USB modem
™ Connect USB modem
™ Install required modem driver
Check for the working condition

7 Exercise on Using FTP for uploading ™ Know about FTP protocol

Using FTP for and downloading files. ™ Know how to upload file using FTP
uploading and ™ Know how to download file using FTP
downloading
files.
8 Exercise on Installation and ™ Know about proxy server.
Installation and configuring the proxy ™ Know how to install proxy server.
configuring the server for internet ™ Know how to configure proxy server.
proxy server for access
internet access
9 Exercise on Setting of particular IP ™ Know about IP addresses
Setting of address to an existing ™ Know how to set IP addresses to the
particular IP terminal system computer systems in a LAN
address to an
existing terminal
system
10 Exercise on Installation of network ™ Know about Network operating
Installation of operating system systems.
network ™ Know about different network
operating system operating systems.
™ Install any Network operating systems
™ Configure the system with the proper
settings.
11 Exercise on Creating and managing ™ Know how to create user accounts
Creating and user accounts through ™ Know how to modify user accounts
managing user network server. ™ Know how to delete user accounts
accounts
through network
server.

12 Exercise on Configuration of DHCP ™ Know about static IP address, dynamic

Configuration of and DNS. IP address
DHCP and DNS. ™ Know about DHCP
™ Configure the DHCP
™ Know about DNS
™ Configure the DNS
13 Exercise on File/Folder accessing ™ Know the different accessing rights
File/Folder rights for sharing. ™ Know how to give access rights
accessing rights ™ Know how to remove access rights
for sharing ™ Know how to share file/folders

198
14 Exercise on Exercise on remote ™ Know about remote login
remote desktop. desktop. ™ Know how to login to the remote
desktop
15 Exercise on Exercise on setting up of ™ Know about VPN
setting up of VPN on network ™ Know how to configure VPN service
VPN on network

16 Mini Project Student has develop a Student Activities:

Web Based Mini Project ™ Create Animation Clips
by applying the ™ Create Images with different
knowledge acquired. proportions
™ Create Photographs.
™ Develop Cartoon Movies.
™ Develop web pages
™ Upload them to the web site
™ Import from web site
™ Integrate web with photoshop,
dream viewer, Flash etc
™ Upload media data into YouTube,
Facebook, Twitter, Instragram …etc.

199
FIFTH SEMESTER

200
 DIPLOMA IN 3D ANIMATION AND GRAPHIC S ENGINEERING
SCHEME OF INSTRUCTIONS AND EXAMINATION
CURRICULUM-2023
(V Semester)
Instruction
Periods/Week Total Scheme Of Examinations
Sub Name of Periods
Code the Subject Per Sessio- End
Pract- Duration Total
Theory Semester nal Exam
-icals (hrs) Marks
Marks Marks

THEORY SUBJECTS
Industrial
AMG- Management and
4 - 60 3 20 80 100
501 Entrepreneurship

3D Rendering,
AMG- rigging AND
6 90 3 20 80 100
502 Character animation -

AMG-
Cinema autography 4 60 3 20 80 100
503 -
AMG- Advanced 3D
4 60 3 20 80 100
504 dynamics -
Visual EFX and
AMG-
Compositing 5 75 3 20 80 100
505 -
Techniques
PRACTICAL SUBJECTS
3D
Rendering,rigging
AMG-
AND Character 3 45 3 40 60 100
506 -
animation lab

AMG-
Compositing Lab _ 3 45 3 40 60 100
507
AMG-
Life Skills - 3 45 3 40 60 100
508
AMG-
Editing Lab 3 45 3 40 60 100
509
AMG-
Project work - 6 90 3 40 60 100
510
Total 24 18 630 - 260 640 900
Note:AMG-501Common with DIT, DCME, DAME Branches
AMG-502, AMG-503, AMG-505 , AMG-506, AMG-507, AMG-509 , AMG-510 common with DAME
AMG-508 common with all

201
 No. of
Course Total No. of
Course Title Periods/ Marks for FA Marks for SA
code periods
Weeks
Industrial Management and
AMG-
Entrepreneurship 4 60 20 80
501

TIME SCHEDULE

Weightage SHORT ESSAY TYPE CO’s

Sl. Chapter/ Unit Title Periods
of Marks TYPE QUESTIONS Mapped
No.
QUESTIONS
Principles of 08 16 2 1 C01
1. Management.
Organization 2 2
Structure & 15 26 CO2
2 Organizational
Behaviour.
Production 14 26 2 2 CO3
3.
Management.
Engineering Ethics & 2 2
Safety and Labour 15 26 CO4
4.
Codes.
Entrepreneurship & 08 16 2 1 CO5
5.
Start-ups.
Total 60 110 10 8

Course Objectives and Course Outcomes

Upon completion of the course the student shall be able to

(i) Familiarize the concepts of management, and organization
structures.
COURSEOBJECTIVES (ii) Exposure to organizational behavioural concepts, basics of
production management in industries.
(iii) Exposure to Engineering Ethics, Industrial Safety, Labour codes and
entrepreneurial start-ups programmes.
CO1 AMG- Understand the principles of management as applied to industry.
501.1
C02 AMG- Explain types of the industrial organization structures and the behaviour
COURSE 501.2 of an individual in an organization, motivational and leadership styles.

202
OUTCOMES C03 AMG- Explain the different aspects of production management.
501.3
CO4 AMG- Explain Engineering Ethics, Industrial Safety and industrial Labour Codes.
501.4
CO5 AMG- Explain Entrepreneurial development programmes and Start-ups.
501.5
CO and PO Mapping

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
CO1 1 1
CO2 1 2
CO3 3 2 2
CO4 3 1 2
CO5 2 1 2

3: High, 2: Moderate, 1: Low Note:

The gaps in CO and PO mapping will be achieved by one or more appropriate activities from the
following:
(i) Assignments (ii) Tutorials (iii) Seminars (iv) Guest Lectures (v) Group Discussions
(vi) Quiz (vii) Industry Visits (viii) Tech-Fest (ix) Mini Projects (x) Library Visits.

203
Learning Outcomes

Understand the principles of management as applied to industry.

1.0 Principles of Management

1.1 Define industry, commerce (Trade) and business.
1.2 Know the need for management.
1.3 Understand functions of Management.
1.4 List the principle of scientific management by F.W.Taylor
1.5 List the principle of modern management by Henry Foyal.
1.6 Differentiate management, administration and organization
1.7 Differentiate Lower, Middle and Top level management
1.8 Explain the importance of Managerial skills (Technical, Human, Conceptual)
1.9 Know the objectives of Management Information Systems.
1.10 Know the Characteristics of Management Information Systems.
2.0 Organization Structure & Organizational Behaviour
2.1 Define organization structure.
2.2 Explain line, staff and line & staff organization structures with advantages, disadvantages and
applications.
2.3 List various Motivation theories.
2.4 Explain Maslow’s Hierarchy of needs.
2.5 Explain Different leadership styles.
2.6 Explain Trait theory of leadership
2.7 Explain Behavioral theory of Leadership.
2.8 Explain the Responsibility of human resource management.
2.9 Understand the process of recruitment, selection and training
2.10 State the Objectives of Job Analysis.
3.0 Production Management
3.1 Define Production, Planning and Control.
3.2 Explain Briefly Mass production, Batch production and Job order production.
3.3 Define the terms Routing, Scheduling and Dispatching.
3.4 List applications of network diagrams in production planning and control.
3.5 Draw PERT and CPM Network Diagrams – Simple Problems.
3.6 Know the functions of Materials Management.
3.7 Explain ABC analysis of Inventory.
3.8 Explain concept of Economic ordering quantity.
3.9 Explain meaning of Supply chain management.
3.10 Write processes of Supply Chain Management
3.11 List the Functions of Purchase Department.
3.12 Write functions of Stores Department.
4.0 Engineering Ethics & Safety and Labour Codes
4.1 Definition of Engineering Ethics.
4.2 Understand Core qualities of Professional Engineers.
4.3 Explain Different types of Ethics in Engineering.
4.4 State the meaning of Intellectual Property Rights
4.5 List common types of Intellectual Property Rights.
204
4.6 List Activities of Corporate Social Responsibility (CSR).
4.7 State the need of Human values in engineering fields.
4.8 Comprehend the importance of safety at Workplace.
4.9 ListDifferent hazards in the industry.
4.10 State the causes of accidents costs of accidents and their prevention.
4.11 List Salient features of Code on Wages, 2019.
4.12 List Salient features of Industrial Relations Code, 2020,
4.13 List Salient features of Code on Social Security, 2020
4.14 List Salient features of Occupational Safety, Health and Working Conditions Code, 2020.
5. Entrepreneurship & Start-ups
5.1 Define the word Entrepreneur and Entrepreneurship.
5.2 Explain various self - employment schemes
5.3 List the Financial assistance programmes provided by the Governments.
5.4 Explain the concept of TQM and ISO 9000 series and BIS 14000 Series.
5.5 List the Advantages and Drawbacks of ISO 9000 series of standards.
5.6 Explain the Concept of Incubation center’s.
5.7 Explain Startup and its stages.
5.8 Explain Break Even Analysis to make or buy the products.
5.9 State the Importance of Branding.
5.10 State the significance of Business name, logo and tag line.
5.11 Explain the Concepts of Digital Marketing.
5.12 Know the Role of E-commerce and Social Media.

Course Content
1.0 Principles of Management

Introduction: Industry, Commerce and Trade; Definition of management; Functions of

management; Principles of Scientific Management: F.W. Taylor - Principles of Modern
Management: Henry Fayol; Administration organization and management; Levels of
management - Managerial skills - Management Information Systems: Objectives and
Characteristics.

2.0 Organization Structure & Organizational Behaviour

Organization Types: Line, Staff and Line & Staff Organizations – Maslow’s motivational theory;
Leadership Styles – Trait theory of leadership – Behavioural theory of Leadership.

Job Analysis - Responsibility of human resource management - Selection procedure – Training

of Workers: Apprentice Training – On job training.

3. Production Management.
Production, Planning and Control – Types of Production - Routing, Scheduling and Dispatching -
PERT and CPM Network Diagrams – Applications - –Calculate Project Duration and identify the
critical path of the Project – Simple Problems; Functions of Materials Management - ABC
analysis of Inventory. - Economic ordering quantity- Meaning of Supply Chain Management –
Processes of Supply Chain Management - Functions of Purchase Department - Purchasing
Procedure -Functions of Stores Department – Bin Card.

205
4. Engineering Ethics &Safety and Labour Codes

Engineering Ethics: Definition – Classification of Engineering Ethics - Personal and Business

ethics –Value based ethics - Environmental ethics – Meaning of Intellectual Property Rights –
Common types of Intellectual Property Rights - Activities of Corporate Social Responsibility
(CSR).

Human values : Morals – Values –Character- Caring –Courage - Cooperation – Commitments –

Empathy – Honesty- Integrity - Respect for others – Sharing–Service learning.

Industrial Safety: The importance of safety at Workplace -Hazard and accident - Different
hazards in the industry -The causes of accidents and prevention of accidents - Direct and
indirect cost of accidents.

Industrial Labour Codes: Meaning of Employer and Employee - Objectives of Industrial Labour
Codes – Salient features of Code on Wages, 2019 - Salient features of Industrial Relations Code,
2020 - Salient features of Code on Social Security, 2020 - Salient features of Occupational Safety,
Health and Working Conditions Code, 2020.

5. Entrepreneurship & Start-ups

Entrepreneur - Entrepreneurship - Role of Entrepreneur - Qualities of an entrepreneur-
Requirements of an entrepreneur - Expectations of Entrepreneurship - Self-employment
schemes - Institutional support - Concept of TQM –Pillars of TQM- Importance of ISO 9000
certification - Concepts of ISO 9000 Series and BIS 14000 Series- Advantages and Drawbacks of
ISO 9000 series of standards - List the beneficiaries of ISO 9000.

Financial assistance programmes - Concept of Incubation center’s – Start-up and its stages ––
Make or Buy Decision – Break Even Analysis - Branding – Business name, logo and tag line –
Concepts of Digital Marketing - Role of E-commerce and Social Media.

REFERENCEBOOKS

1. Industrial Engineering and Management-by O.PKhanna

2. Production Management-by Buffa.
3. Engineering Economics and Management Science-by Banga& Sharma.
4. Personnel Management by Flippo.
5. Production and Operations Management–S.N.Chary
6. Converging Technologies for Smart Environments and Integrated
Ecosystems IERC Book Open Access 2013 pages-54-76.

206
 Table specifying the scope of syllabus to be covered for Unit Test-I & Unit Test-II
AMG-501 :: Industrial Management & Entrepreneurship

Unit Test Learning Outcomes to be covered

Unit Test – I From 1.1 to 3.12

From 4.1 to 5.12
Unit Test – II

Unit Test - 1

Bloom’s Marks CO
Q.No Question from the Chapter
category allocated addressed
Part - A (16 marks)
Principles of Management, Organization
CO1,CO2,
Structure & Organizational Behaviour and R,U 4
1 CO3
Production Management
2 Principles of Management U 3 CO1
Organization Structure & Organizational
3 U 3 CO2
Behaviour
4,5 Production Management U 6 CO3
Part - B (24 marks)
6 Principles of Management U 8 CO1
Organization Structure & Organizational
7 U 8 CO2
Behaviour
8 Production Management U 8 CO3

Unit Test - 2

Bloom’s Marks CO
Q.No Question from the topic
category allocated addressed
Part - A (16 marks)
Engineering Ethics and Human Values and
1 R,U 4 CO4, CO5
Entrepreneurship & Start-ups
2 Engineering Ethics and Human Values U 1 CO4
3 Entrepreneurship & Start-ups U 3 CO5
Part - B (24 marks)
6 Engineering Ethics and Human Values U 8 CO4
7 Entrepreneurship & Start-ups U 8 CO5
Engineering Ethics and Human Values and CO4, CO5
U 8
8 Entrepreneurship & Start-ups
R-Remembering; U-Understanding; Ap-Applying; An- Analylising

207
 Course No. of Total No. of Marks for Marks for
Course Title
code Periods/Weeks periods FA SA

3D Rendering,
AMG-502 Rigging AND 5 75 20 80
Character animation

TIME SCHEDULE
S.N CHAPTE Chapter/ No. of MAR SHORT ESSAY CO’s Mapped
o. R Unit Title Periods KS QUESTION QUEST
NO S IONS
1. 1 Mental Ray 10 2 1 CO1
Rendering 16
Techniques
2. 2 Rigging Menus 20 26 2 2 CO2
& Editors
Skelton
Setup&
Propsrigging,
Robot Rigging
3. 3 Character 20 26 2 2 CO3
Rigging Work
Flow
Quadruped
Rigging Setup
Advance
Rigging
Techniques
4. 4 Animation 13 26 2 2 CO4
Menus&
Editors
Basic Animation
Techniques
5. 5 Linear 12 16 2 1 CO5
Animation
Techniques
Non-Linear
Animation
Techniques
Total Periods 75 110 10 8

208
 x Understand the 3D graphics animation pipeline and to become
Familiar with Maya software handling
x Able to handle character & mechanical rig and becoming 3-D rigging
artist and creating pre visualization
x Become animation artist to apply character animation techniques
Course
x 3d projects rigging & animation and Handling 3d projects from
Objectives
various media
x Understand the film history, script writing techniques and story
writing techniques
x Able to make documentary films and Short Films
x Able To Handle Production Unit, cameras & apply techniques and to
play role of a director.

CO NO COURSE OUTCOMES
After completion of this course the student will be able to
CO1 AMG-502.1 Apply differentmental ray rendering techniques

CO2 AMG-502.2 Apply Skelton setup & Props Rigging, Robot Rigging Tools and
Controls and menu controls.
CO3 AMG-502.3 Use Human Anatomy, Quadruped Anatomy and Advanced rigging
techniques.
CO4 AMG-502.4 Explain Animation Menus, Editors and Basic Animation Techniques.
CO5 AMG-502.5 Designing Linear and Non-Linear character Animation and Animation
techniques.

CO-PO/PSO MATRIX

CO NO. PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
AMG- 3 3 3 3 2 2 1 3 3 3
502.1
AMG- 3 2 3 2 3 2 1 3 3 3
502.2
AMG- 3 2 3 3 1 1 2 3 3 3
502.3

209
 AMG- 3 1 3 3 1 2 1 3 3 3
502.4
AMG- 3 3 3 3 3 3 1 3 3 3
502.5
Average 3 2.2 3 2.8 2 2 1.2 3 3 3
3=Strongly mapped , 2=moderately mapped, 1=slightly mapped

Learning outcomes:

1.0. MENTAL RAY RENDERING TECHNIQUES

1.1. Explain about Batch Rendering techniques.
1.2. Describe the usage of ‘F’ check in Mental Ray rendering.
1.3. Explain about Render Passes.
1.4. Describe the concept Render Layers.
1.5. State the purpose of HDRI lightings.
1.6. Describe Mental Ray Nodes.
1.7. Describe Mental Ray Shaders.
1.8. Explain Image Based Lighting with examples.
1.9. Mention the steps to simulate Sun & Sky Setup.
1.10. Explain about Physical Sun in mental ray rendering.
1.11. Explain about Physical Sky in mental ray rendering.
1.12. State the need of Mia in mental ray rendering.
1.13. Explain about Mia Exposure with examples.
1.14. Describe Mental Ray Shadow Map with examples.
1.15. Explain about the HDRI Setup.

2.0. RIGGING MENUS & EDITORS, SKELTONSETUP & PROPS RIGGING and ROBOT RIGGING
2.1 Define the terms Rig, Rig Structure, Skelton, Joint
2.2 Explain types of tools for rigging and process of starting rigging
2.3 List various types of joints
2.4 Create joints
2.5 Explain about Joint Tool
2.6 State the significance of joint chain
2.7 Define joint bone
2.8 Explain how to use hierarchy editor tool
2.9 Explain Set Driven
2.10 Give the steps to use connection editor
2.11 Explain the process of controls creation
2.12 Add and edit attribute in connection Editor
2.13 Explain about Outliner
2.14 Explain various types of constraints (Point, Aim, Orient, Parent Normal, Tangent, Pole vector)
2.15 Describe Grouping & Parenting
2.16 Explain the usage of channel box
2.17 Describe usage of pivot point
2.18 Explain Freeze Transformations
2.19 State the purpose of Building Skeletons

210
2.20 Explain human Skelton anatomy
2.21 List and explain character setup tools
2.22 List out types of joints
2.23 Discuss about different types of joints (Ball joint, Insert Joints, Connect Disconnect Joints,
Joint Orients)
2.24 Explain join Limits and Naming Joints
2.25 Explain the procedure of creating joints for leg, hand, spine
2.26 Describe about mirror joints
2.27 Explain about Skeleton Hierarchy
2.28 Describe about Reroot Skeletons
2.29 Explain the procedure of Creating Robotic Skeletons
2.30 Describe about orients
2.31 Explain the process of naming child and parent rig
2.32 Describe applying constraints
2.33 Explain set driven controls
2.34 How to use Inverse Kinematics
2.35 Explain about IK Handles & Attributes
2.36 Explain about IK solvers
2.37 Explain about RP & SC Solvers
2.38 Describe about Spine IK
2.39 Explain various types of Non-Linear Deformers
2.40 Describe about clusters
2.41 Explain about Prop Rigs with Deformer
3.0. CHARCTER RIGGING WORKFLOW, QUARDRPED RIGGING SETUP and ADVANCE RIGGING
TECHNIQUES:
3.1 Explain Skelton Anatomy
3.2 Explain process of manual Skelton creation
3.3 How to use IK Skelton Generator
3.4 Understand the use of Characterization Tool
3.5 Explain about Character Controls
3.6 Explain Leg IK Rigging, Spine Rigging, Hand Rigging
3.7 Explain How to create proper controls
3.8 Describe How to create Stretching & Squash
3.9 State the use of Script Editor
3.10 Create character set using script Editor
3.11 Use of proper grouping and character set
3.12 Creation of bind skin, interactive skin Bind
3.13 List out paint skin weight Tools
3.14 Explain mirror &Copy Skin Weights
3.15 Explain quadruped Anatomy
3.16 Explain manual Skelton creation and naming
3.17 State the use LK handler and LK Spine Handler
3.18 Explain leg Rig with Grouping Method and Reverse Foot method
3.19 Explain Spline Rig with Clusters Method
3.20 Describe Tail and Neck Rigging

211
3.21 Create Proper Controls, character set
3.22 Explain Bind Skin, interactive Skin Bind
3.23 Describe Paint Skin WeightTool
3.24 Use of Explain Mirror & Copy Skin Weights
3.25 Explain Component Editor
3.26 Describe Facial Rigging
3.27 Create Facial Joints
3.28 Applying Constraints
3.29 Procedure to create proper control and user interface
3.30 Explain facial Control Window
3.31 Explain Set Driven
3.32 Explain Eye Grouping, Eye Rigging
3.33 Use of jaw rig, Tongue Rig
3.34 Describe creation of facial Expression
3.35 State the need of Blend Shape
3.36 Discuss Blend shape Editors
3.37 Explain Lip Sync Rigging
3.38 List various Lip Sync Controls
3.39 Explain various Sync Effects (Bind Skin, Smooth Bind)
3.40 Explain paint Skin Effects
3.41 Describe How to add & Remove Influence
3.42 Explain Copy & Mirror Skin Weights – Smooth SkinWeights.
3.43 State the use of Lattice
3.44 State the use of wrap, cluster
3.45 Explain Sculpt Deformers, Jiggle Deforms
3.46 Explain about Wire Tool
3.47 Explain Non-Linear Deforms (Bend, Squash, Sine, Twist, Wave)
3.48 Explain Edit Deforms
3.49 State the purpose of Weight Tools
3.50 Explain the concepts of Export &import ,Deform Weight, Mirror Weight
3.51 Describe the process of Control creation
3.52 Describe attaching Deform to character Set
3.53 Explain Proper Grouping & Hide DeformSource

4.ANIMATION MENUS& EDITORS AND BASIC ANIMATION TECHNIQUES.

4.1 State the need of Maya 3d animation

4.2 Explain various Animation Principles
4.3 Describe about Animation Preferences Time Sliders (Play Back, Time Field, Range Slider)
4.4 Explain Channel Control Editor
4.5 Use of Graph Editor, Trax Editor
4.6 Explain about Dope Sheet (Set Key, Auto Key, Cut, Copy, Paste, Delete Keys)
4.7 Describe Mute Channels
4.8 Make use of DrivenKeys
4.9Explain Breakdowns (In Between)
4.10 Explain Ghost Select
4.11 Explain Animation Snapshot
4.12 Create AnimatedSwapMotionPath
4.13 State the use of Use of Turntable
4.14 Explain SetTimeCode

212
4.15 Discuss about AnimationClip,
4.16 Describe Play Back Speed (Various ObjectAnimation)
4.17 Explain Key Frame Animation
4.18 Explain Set Key Preferences (Set Driven Keys)
4.19 Describe Ball Bouncing Animation
4.20 Explain Break Downs (In Between)
4.21 Explain Graph Editors & Curve Adjustment (Dope Sheet & Timing Adjustment)
4.22 Using Path Animation
4.23 Create Orienting the Path Curve (World, Space, Object Space, And Local Space)
4.24 Describe Character Pose Setting

5.LINEAR AND NON – LINEAR ANIMATION TECHNIQUES

5.1 Describe Linear Character Animation

5.2 Create Pose (Understanding Animation Ctrl, Creating Pose to Walk Cycle)
5.3 Explain Types & Techniques in The Poses (Key, In-Between, Extreme)
5.4 Describe Steeped Motion Flow
5.5 Explain Fine Tune with Tangents
5.6 Adjusting With Principles
5.7 Explain Graph Editor Curve Flow
5.8 Explain Presets of Tangents Snap Keys
5.9 Explain Process of Creating Number of Cycles
5.10 List out Types of Infinity
5.11 Explain Animation Curve Smoothness
5.12 Explain Various Types of Animation (Run, Jump, Dancing)
5.13 Explain Character with PropsAnimation
5.14 Adjust Ctrl Motion Value
5.15 Explain Non -Linear Editors
5.16 Working With Various Tangents (Breaking Tangent, Weighted Tangents)
5.17 Explain Bake Simulation Track Editor Workflow
5.18 Create Character Set
5.19 Creating Animation Clip, Edit Clips
5.20 Define Merging
5.21 Explain Grouping & Managing Clips (Trim Wrap, Blending Clips)
5.22 Explain Dope Sheet Editors
5.23 Explain Timing & Spacing Adjustment
5.24 Describe Camera Sequence
5.25 Explain Working with Animation Shots (Converting Shot into Sequence)
5.26 Explain Working on Multiple Camera (SequenceOutput.)

COURSE CONTENT

1. Mental Ray rendering techniques - Batch Rendering – usage of ‘F’ check - Render Passes –
Render Layers – HDRI lightings – Mental Ray Nodes– Mental Ray Shaders – Image Based
Lighting – Simulate Sun & Sky Setup –Physical Sun –Physical Sky – Mia – Mia Exposure – Mental
Ray Shadow Map–HDRI Setup.

2. RIGGING MENUS & EDITORS: Joint Tool– Create Joints – Joint Chain–Joints Bones– Hierarchy
Editors – Set Driven –Connection Editor – Controls Creating – Add & Edit Attribute – Outliner
–Types Of Constraints, Point, Aim ,Orient, Parent Normal, Tangent, Pole vector – Grouping &
Parenting – Channel Box – Pivot Point – Freeze Transformations.

SKELTONSETUP & PROPS RIGGING: Building Skeletons: Human Skeletons Anatomy –

213
 Character Setup Tools – Create Joints – Ball Joint–Insert Joints – Connect Disconnect Joints –
Joints Orients –Joint’s Limits–Naming Joints – Creating Joints For Leg, Hand ,Spine– Mirror
Joints –Skeleton Hierarchy – Reroot Skeletons

ROBOT RIGGING : Creating Robotic Skeletons – Orients & Naming – Child &Parent Rig –
Applying Constraints – Set Driven Controls – Using Inverse Kinematics – IK Handles &
Attributes –IK Solvers, RP &SC Solvers – Spine IKAttributes – Non Linear Deformers – Clusters
–– Props Rig With DeformersSkeleton Anatomy – Manual Skeleton Creation – Using IK
Skeleton Generator – Characterization Tool – Character Controls – Leg IK Rigging – Spline
Rigging – Hand Rigging – Creating Proper Controls – Stretching & Squash – Using Script Editor
– Create Character Set – Proper Grouping – Character Set – Bind Skin – Interactive Skin Bind
– Paint Skin Weight Tools – Mirror & Copy Skin Weights

3. QUARDRPED RIGGING SETUP: Quadruped Anatomy – Skeleton Anatomy – Manual Skeleton

Creation – Skeleton Naming – Using LK Handler & LK Spline Handler. Leg Rig WithGrouping
Method & Reverse Foot Method – Spline Rig with Clusters Method – Tail Rigging – Neck
Rigging – Stretch & Squash – Create Proper Controls – Create Character Set – Bind Skin –
Interactive Skin Bind – Paint Skin WeightTool– Mirror & Copy Skin Weights – Component
Editor

ADVANCE RIGGING TECHNIQUES: Facial Rigging: Creating Facial Joints – Applying Constrain
– Create Proper Control – Create User Interface – Facial Control Window – Set Driven –
Connection Editor – Eye Grouping – Eye Rigging – Jaw Rig – Tongue Rig – Facial Expression
Creation – Blend Shape – Blend Shape Editors – Lip Sync Rigging – Lip Sync Controls – Various
Sync Effects – Bind Skin – Smooth Bind – Paint Skin Weights – Add & Remove Influence – Copy
& Mirror Skin Weights – Smooth SkinWeights.
Deformers: Lattice – Wrap – Cluster – Sculpt Deformers – Jiggle Deforms – Wire Tool –
Non Linear Deforms – Bend, Squash, Sine, Twist, Wave – Blend Shape – Edit Deforms – Weight
Tools – Export & Import Deform Weight – Mirror Weight – Control Creation – Attach Deform
To Character Set – Proper Grouping & Hide DeformSource

4. ANIMATION MENUS& EDITORS: Intro To Maya 3danaimation – Animation Principles –

Animation Preferences Time Sliders – Play Back – Time Field – Range Slider – Channel Control
Editor – Graph Editor – Trax Editor – Dope Sheet –Set Key- Auto Key – Cut, Copy, Paste ,,Delete
Keys – Mute Channels–Driven Keys, Breakdowns – In Between – Ghost Select – Animation
Snapshot – Create Animated Swap Motion Path–Turntable–Set Time Code–Animation Clip ,
Play Back Speed – Various Object Animation

BASIC ANIMATION TECHNIQUES: Key Frame Animation: Set Key Preferences – Set Driven Keys
– Ball Bouncing Animation – Break Downs – In Between – Graph Editors & Curve Adjustment
– Dope Sheet & Timing Adjustment. – Path Animation – Orienting the Path Curve – World,
Space, Object Space, And Local Space
– Intro Character Pose Setting– Hands on Practice
5. LINEAR ANIMATION TECHNIQUES: Linear Character Animation: Create Pose –
Understanding Animation Ctrl – Creating Pose To Walk Cycle – Types & Techniques In The
Poses – Key, In-Between, Extreme – Steeped Motion Flow – Fine Tune With Tangents –
Adjusting With Principles – Graph Editor Curve Flow – Presets Of Tangents -Adjusting A Ctrl
Motion Value – Snap Keys– Creating Number Of Cycles – Types Of Infinity – Animation Curve
Smoothness – Various Types Of Animation, Run, Jump, Dancing – Character With Props
Animation
6. NON-LINEAR ANIMATION TECHNIQUES
Working With Non- Linear Editors: Graph Editor Work Flow – Working with Various Tangents –
Breaking Tangent – Weighted Tangents – Bake Simulation Track Editor Workflow – Create
Character Set – Creating Animation Clip – Edit Clips – Merging – Grouping & Managing Clips –
214
 Trim Wrap – Blending Clips – Dope Sheet Editors – Timing & Spacing Adjustment –Camera
Sequence – Working with Animation Shots – Converting Shot Into Sequence – Working On
Multiple Camera – Sequence Output.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. The Animation Book, by Kit Laybourne, Three Rivers Press.

2. The Human Figure In Motion, by Eadweard Muybridge, Dover Publication
3. Animals In Motion, by Eadweard Muybridge, Dover Publication
4. Directing Film techniques and Aesthetics, by Michael Rabiger, Big picture media
5. Shot By Shot , by Steven D.Katz, Columbia university press
6. Film Language, by Christian Metz, Chaplin book publishers

Table specifying the scope of syllabus to be covered for unit tests

Unit Test Learning outcomes to be covered

Unit test-1 From 1.1 to 3.27
Unit test-2 From 3.28 to 5.26

215
 Course Course Title No. of Total No. of Marks for Marks for
code Periods/Week periods FA SA
s
AMG-503 Cinematography 4 60 20 80

TIME SCHEDULE
S.N CHAPTE Chapter/ No. of MAR SHORT ESSAY CO’s Mapped
o. R Unit Title Periods KS QUESTION QUEST
NO S IONS
1. 1 Concept &Types 10 2 1 CO1
Of Camera 16

2. 2 Purpose& Type 15 26 2 2 CO2

Of Lighting
3. 3 Lens & 12 26 2 2 CO3
Attributes
4. 4 Cinematograph 13 26 2 2 CO4
y And Styles
5. 5 The role& 10 16 2 1 CO4,CO5
ethics of
cinematograph
er
Total Periods 60 110 10 8

x Describe types of cameras

x Explaining the purpose lighting and types.
Course Objectives x Describe variouslens and attributes
x DescribeCinematography and styles
x Stick to ethics of cinematographer.

CO NO COURSE OUTCOMES
CO1 AMG-503.1 Operate different types of camera and wide screen systems
CO2 AMG-503.2 Apply lighting tools and techniques to suit the selected location.
CO3 AMG-503.3 Explain the usage of lens and filters with proper attributes
CO4 AMG-503.4 Explain cinematographers and their styles
CO5 AMG-503.5 Explain the role of cinematographer in coordinating with all the
departments involved in feature film making and the ethics to be followed

CO-PO/PSO Matrix:

216
 CO NO. PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
AMG-503.1 1 2 3 3 3 2 2 1 3 2
AMG-503.2 2 3 3 3 2 2 3 1 2 3
AMG-503.3 2 3 3 3 2 2 3 1 2 3
AMG-503.4 3 1 1 2 2 3 3 1 3 2
AMG-503.5 3 3 1 1 3 3 3 1 3 2
Average 2.2 2.4 2.2 2.4 2.4 2.4 2.8 1 2.6 2.4
3=strongly mapped, 2=moderately mapped, 1=slightly mapped

Learning Outcomes:

1. Concept &Types Of Camera

1.1 Explain the Concept of camera as a story teller.
1.2 List tools of creative cinematography. (Frame, Lens, Texture, Light and color, movement etc.)
1.3 Explain tools of creative cinematography.
1.4 List different types of camera
1.4.1 Compact Digital Cameras
1.4.2 Digital SLR Cameras
1.4.3 Mirror less Cameras
1.4.4 Action Cameras
1.4.5 360 Cameras
1.4.6 Film Cameras
1.5 List different types of Movie Cameras .( Mitchell, Arriflex, Panavision)
1.6 List Different types of Digital Cameras.
1.7 Explain Different types of digital Cameras.
1.8 List different types of Film Formats.
1.9 Explain different types of film formats
1.10 List different types of Digital Formats
1.11 Explain different types of digital formats.
1.12 Explain types of film strip Widths (8mm, 16mm, 35 mm etc.)
1.13 List and explain Wide Screen Systems
1.14 Discuss about Anamorphic System.
1.15 Describe Film stock.
2. Purpose & Type Of Lighting
2.1 Explain the concept of lighting for cinematography.
2.2 State the aims of lighting in cinematography.
2.3 Discuss about Good lighting and bad lighting.
2.4 Explain how to set position of lights in cinematography.
2.5 Explain the effects if we set position of lights properly.
2.6 List the light sources for photography shooting.
2.7 Explain the selection of time of shooting.
2.8 Explain how to select location for filming.
2.9 Explain hard lighting for effective image reproduction.
2.10 Explain soft lighting for effective image reproduction.

217
2.11 Explain how to set lighting to create mood and atmosphere.
2.12 List special lighting effects.
2.13 Explain Special Lighting Effects.
2.14 Explain the process of controlling the contrast, tone and clarity of photo.
2.15 Explain the play of shadows in photography.
2.16 Explain the role of composition as an effective tool of creative cinematographer.
2.17 Illustrate the type of lighting used to lighting flat surface and lighting on object.
2.18 Explain the role of color and tones with respect to lighting psychology.
2.19 List types of lighting. (High key lighting, Low key Lighting, Cameo lighting etc.)
2.20 Explain types of lighting.
2.21 Explain various styles in large scales lighting in cinematography.
2.21.1 Moon light setup
2.21.2 Day or night effect
2.21.3 Fire sets and mystery
2.21.4 Lighting camp fire scene
2.21.5 Candle flame
2,21,6 Rain, summer moon, etc.
2.22 Explain how to expose a light source.
2.23 Explain how to use lighting for high speed cinematography
2.24 Describe lighting for single frame animation.
2.25 Classify cinematography based on time.
2.26 Explain about Time slice cinematography.
2.27 Explain about Time frame animation.
2.26 Discuss about Cinematography style.
3. Lens & Attributes
3.1 List the Factors responsible for the quality image reproduction of a lens system.
3.2 Explain the Factors responsible for the quality image reproduction of a lens system.
3.2.1 Resolution of a lens systems
3.2.2 Contrast of lens system
3.2.3 Sharpness and definition of lens system
3.2.3 Color reproduction of lens system
3.3 List different types of lenses used in Cinematography.
3.4 Explain different types of lenses used in Cinematography.
3.5 Discuss about study of Normal lens.
3.6 State the importance of wide angle lens and its effects?
3.7 Explain about Focal length and magnification.
3.8 Define Depth of Focus.
3.9 Discuss about focal plane and flange focal distance in camera systems.
3.10 Define hyper focal distance in photography.
3.11 List different types of filters used in lens.
3.12 Illustrate the use of glass filter in lens.
3.13 Illustrate the use of Gelatin filter in lens.
3.14 Illustrate the use of Sand witch filters in lens.
3.15 Explain Filter factor compensation.
3.16 Explain black and white filters in cinematography.
3.17 Explain about filters used for colour cinematography.
3.18 List the filters used for colour correction and conversion in lens.
3.19 List general purpose filters in lens.
3.20 Explain different general purpose filters in lens.
3.20.1 ND filters
3.20.2 Graduated filters

218
 3.20.3 Polarizing filter
3.21 Explain Angle of view Perspective in Photography.
4. Cinematography And Styles
4.1 Explain the cinematography styles.
4.2 Describe about Hollywood Cinematographers and European Cinematographers.
4.3 List Cinematographers of other countries.
4.4 Explain Cinematographers of other countries.
4.5 Explain about Contemporary Indian Cinematographers.
4.6 Explain Wide Screen Cinematography.
4.7 List types of wide screen cinematography.
4.8 Explain Mask frame widescreen cinematography.
4.9 List the advantages and disadvantages of different formats of mask frame
Techniques?
4.10 State the need of Super 35mm format.
4.11 List the advantages and disadvantages of Super 35mm format?
4.12 Discuss about Anamorphic Cinematography.
4.13 List the concepts of Anamorphic Cinematography.
4.14 List the advantages and disadvantages of cinemascope format over
other 35mm wide screen systems?
4.15 Describe techniscope system.
4.16 Discuss about Horizontal frame cinematography.
4.17 Explain Vista vision.
4.18 Explain Technirama.

5. The role& ethics of cinematographer

5.1 Explain the role of DOP in Cinematography.
5.2 Explain the role of lighting director in cinematography.
5.3 Explain the role of rigging in cinematography.
5.4 Explain the role of gaffer in cinematography.
5.5 Explain the role of a focus puller in cinematography.
5.6 Write about roles and techniques of the following personnels in a feature film
5.6.1 Director
5.6.2 Producer
5.6.3 Editor
5.6.4 Audio grapher,
5.6.5 Art director
5.6.6 Choreographer
5.6.7 Action/Stunt director
5.6.8 Make-up and Costume professionals.
5.7 Explain the importance of the departments of the direction, production, editing, audigraphy,
art directing, cinematography, action/stunt direction, Make-up and costume department.
5.8 Explain the need for co-operation of various departments working for feature film.
5.9 Explain the role of camera work as a marvellous vehicle of the imagination of the
Director.
5.10 Explain about the role of a cinematographer.
5.11 List the responsibilities of cinematographer.
5.12 Explain responsibilities of cinematographer.
5.13 List the work ethics followed by the cinematographer?

COURSE CONTENT

219
 1. Concept &Types Of Camera: The concept of camera as a story teller – The tools of creative
cinematography – Different types of camera – Mitchell – Arriflex – Panavision – Different types
of Digital Camera‘s – Advantages and Disadvantages – Film Formats and Digital Formats –
8mm cameras – 16mm cameras – Super 16 cameras – 35mm cameras Anamorphic system –
wide screen system – 70mm cameras – Super 35mm system –Film stocks
2. Purpose& Type Of Lighting: The concept of lighting for cinematography aims of lighting –
Good lighting and bad lighting – Position of lights and its effects – Lighting terms – Creative
approach through lighting – Selection of light sources, time of shooting, locations, hard or soft
lighting for effective image reproduction – Lighting to crate mood and atmosphere – Special
lighting effects – Control of contrast, tone and clarity – Play of shadows – Composition as an
effective tool of creative cinematographer lighting a flat surface – Lighting on object –
Understanding the color and tones in relation lighting psychology .High key lighting – Low key
lighting – Cameo lighting – Limbo lighting – Rembrandt lighting – Chroma key lighting Large
scale lighting – Moon light setup – Day for night effect – Set lighting modern methodology in
lighting – Cinematography style Large scale lighting – Fire sets and mystery – Lighting for
lighting camp fire scene – Candle flame – Lighting on rain – summer moon light – Dream
lighting Tents – Transparency lighting – Exposing a light source – Ring lighting – Lighting for
high speed cinematography – lighting for single frame animation – Time slice cinematography
time lapse cinematography Cinematography style

3. Lens& Attributes: Factors responsible for the quality image reproduction of a lens system –
Resolution of a lens system – Contrast of a lens system – Sharpness and Definition of lens
system – Color reproduction of lens system – Different types of lenses used in Cinematography
– Study of normal lens – Wide angle lens and its effects – Study of a telephoto lens – Depth of
field in relation with these lenses - Focal length and magnification – Depth of focus – Focal
plane and flange focal distance – Hyper focal distance –Filters – Glass filters – Gelatin filters –
Sand witch filters –Filter factor compensation – Black and White filters – Filters for color
cinematography – Color correction and conversion filters – General purpose filters – ND filters
– Graduated filters – Polarizing filter - Angle of view Perspective

4. CINEMATOGRAPHY AND STYLES: Study of cinematographers and their styles – Hollywood,

European cinematographers – Cinematographers of other countries - contemporary Indian
cinematographers Wide Screen Cinematography – Types of wide screen cinematography –
Mask frame widescreen cinematography – The advantages and disadvantages of different
formats of mask frame techniques – Super 35mm format – Advantages and Disadvantages –
Anamorphic cinematography – The concepts – advantages and disadvantages of cinemascope
format over other 35mm wide screen systems – Techniscope system – Horizontal frame
cinematography – Vista vision – Technirama

5. THE ROLE& ETHICS OF CINEMATOGRAPHER: The role of DOP – The role of a lighting director
– The role of rigging – The role of gaffer – The role of a focus puller – Technique of working in
a feature film with the Director – Producer – Editor –Audiographer – Art Director –
Choreographer – Action/Stunt director – Make-up and Costume professionals – The
importance of each department and the reasons for the need for co-operation – The role of
Camera work as a marvelous vehicle of the imagination of the Director The role and
responsibilities of a cinematographer – Work ethics .

REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Contemporary Cinematographers on Their Art Pauline B Rogers The McGraw-Hill Companies
2000- second Edition
2. The Professional Cameraman‘s Hand Book Sylvia Carlson Harvard University Press 2009 –
Fourth Edition
3. Practical Cinematography Paul Wheeler Harvard University Press, 1997- First Edition

220
Table specifying the scope of syllabus to be covered for unit tests

Unit Test Learning outcomes to be covered

Unit test-1 1.1 to 3.10
Unit test-2 3.11 to 5.13

221
 Course code Course Title No. of Total No. of Marks for FA Marks for SA
Periods/Weeks periods
AMG-504 Advanced 3d 4 60 20 80
Dynamics

TIME SCHEDULE
S.N CHAPTE Chapter/ No. of MAR SHORT ESSAY CO’s Mapped
o. R Unit Title Periods KS QUESTION QUEST
NO S IONS
1. 1 Maya Dynamics 15 2 1 CO1
16

2. 2 Maya Hair And 15 26 2 2 CO2

Fur
3. 3 Maya Fluids 10 26 2 2 CO3
And N-Cloth
4. 4 Intro To Real 08 16 2 1 CO4
Flow
5. 5 Real Flow 12 26 2 2 CO5
Emitter Work
Flow
Total Periods 60 110 10 8

x To know Maya Dynamics

x To knowMaya Hair And Fur
x To familiarize Maya Fluids And N-Cloth
Course Objectives
x To familiarizeReal Flow
x To follow Real Flow Emitter Work Flow.

CO NO COURSE OUTCOMES
CO1 AMG-504.1 Explain Maya Dynamics
CO2 AMG-504.2 Apply techniques to create different hair and Fur models with Maya
CO3 AMG-504.3 Develop various effects of Maya Fluids And N-Cloth
CO4 AMG-504.4 Use various Real flow tools
CO5 AMG-504.5 Apply Real Flow Emitter Work Flow concepts

Learning outcomes

1.0 Maya Dynamics

1.1 Explain Maya Particles

1.2 State the purpose of Particles
1.3 Explain Emitters
1.4 Explain the Goals of Maya dynamics

222
1.5 Explain Particle Collision
1.6 Describe the Texture to The Color Emission
1.7 Explain Animating Particles
1.8 Describe Rendering Particles
1.9 State the purpose of Fields
1.10 Use of Volume Fields
1.11 List Types of Fields
1.12 Explain Advanced in Soft and Rig Body
1.13 Describe Working with Rigid Body Constrain
1.14 Explain how to Troubleshoot Dynamics

2.0 Maya Hair and Fur:

2.1 State the use of Maya Hair

2.2 Explain Basic Workflow of Hair
2.3 List out Passive Hair Curves
2.4 Explain Hair Menus
2.5 Describe Hair Presets
2.6 Explain Simulation of Hair
2.7 Describe Modifying of Hair
2.8 Explain Setup Hair Shading
2.9 Explain Render Scene with Air
2.10 List out various types of Hair Nodes
2.11 State the purpose of Maya Fur
2.12 Explain Modifying Fur
2.13 State the purpose of Fur Tool
2.14 Explain Fur Menus
2.15 Describe Fur Editors
2.16 State the purpose of Fur Nodes
2.17 Explain Fur Shading Effects
2.18 Explain Fur Samples and Techniques
2.19 Describe Render Scene with Fur

3. MAYA FLUIDSAND N-CLOTH

3.1 Introduction to Maya Fluids concept

3.2 Give the steps to create Fluid Effects
3.3 Explain the steps to modify Fluids
3.4 Write the steps how to open water effects fluids constrain
3.5 Explain aboutFluids Texture and ShadingWith examples
3.6 State the purpose ofFluids Effects Node
3.7 Describe about Rendering Fluids
3.8 Explain the N-Cloth concept
3.9 Explain the concept of N-Cloth Collision with examples
3.10 Give the steps to Constraining N Cloth
3.11 Describe N-Cloth Attribute Presets
3.12 Mention the steps how to handle N-Cloth Troubleshooting
3.13 State the purpose of Dynamic Plug-In
3.14 State the purpose of Physic Plug-in

4. INTRODUCTION TO REAL FLOW

223
4.1 Explain the concept of Real Flow User Interface
4.2 Mention Menu bars in Real flow user interface
4.3 State the purpose of Timeline
4.4 Explain Timeline Control with examples
4.5 Describe Layer Window
4.6 Explain about Visibility Panel
4.7 Explain about Simulation Panel
4.8 Describe Real Flow Presets with various examples
4.9 Explain various using Real Flow Tools
4.10 Explain Real Flow Nodes with examples
4.11 Describe the concept Particular System
4.12 Explain the steps in Simulation Control
4.13 Explain about Dynamic & Animation

5. REAL FLOW EMITTER WORK FLOW

5.1 Explain the general Structure of real flow emitter

5.2 Describe Particles Emitter with examples
5.3 Describe about Grid Emitter Real Wave Nodes
5.4 Explain the following splashes in real flow emitter
5.4.1 Object Splash
5.4.2 Crest Splash
5.5 Explain about Control Points real flow emitter work flow
5.6 State the purpose of Fractional concept
5.7 State the purpose of Spectrum concept
5.8 Explain about Real Flow Mesh with examples
5.9 Explain about Real Flow Hybrid with examples
5.10 Explain about Fluid Panel
5.11 Explain about Surface Panel
5.12 Explain about Displacement Panel
5.13 Describe thetypes of Particle Emitter
5.14 Explain about Camera Panel
5.15 Explain basic Animation Expressions with examples
5.16 Describe the concept of Rendering Work Flow

COURSE CONTENT

1. Maya Dynamics: Maya Particles – Overview Of Particles – Emitters – Goals – Particle

Collision – Texture To The Color Emission – Animating Particles - Rendering Particles – Fields
– Volume Fields – Types Of Fields – Advanced In Soft And Rig Body – Working With Rigid
Body Constrain – Troubleshoot Dynamics

2. Maya Hair And Fur: Introduction To Maya Hair – Basic Workflow Of Hair – Passive Hair
Curves – Hair Menus – Hair Presets – Simulation Of Hair – Modifying Of Hair – Setup Hair
Shading – Render Scene With Air – Hair Nodes – Introduction To Maya Fur – Modifying Fur –
For Tool – Fur Menus – Fur Editors – Fur Nodes – Fur Shading Effects – Fur Samples And
Techniques – Render Scene With Fur

3. Maya Fluids And N-Cloth: Intro To Maya Fluids – Creating Fluid Effects – Modifying Fluids –
Open Water Effects Fluids Constrain – Fluids Texture And Shading – Fluids Effects Node –
Rendering Fluids – Intro To N Cloth – N-Cloth Collision – Constraining N Cloth – N-Cloth

224
 Attribute Presets – N-Cloth Troubleshooting – Dynamic Plug-In. – Physic Plug-in

4. Intro To Real Flow: Real Flow User Interface – Menu Bars – Timeline – Timeline Control –
Layer Window – Visibility Panel – Simulation Panel – Real Flow Presets – Real Flow Tools
Menu – Real Flow Nodes – Particular System – Simulation Control – Dynamic & Animation

5. Real Flow Emitter Work Flow: General Structure – Particles Emitter – Grid Emitter Real
Wave Nodes – Object Splash – Crest Splash – Control Points – Fractional – Spectrum –Real
Flow Mesh – Real Flow HYBRID – The Fluid Panel – Surface Panel & Displacement Panels –
Types Of Particle Emitter – The Camera Panel – Basic Animation Expressions – Rendering
Work Flow.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Mastering in Maya- Eric Keller, Wiley Publisher 2006 - First Edition
2. Autodesk the art of Maya- Lee Lanier, Autodesk Media Entertainment 2007- 4thEdition
3. Dyanamics -Tood Palmer, Wiley Publisher 2010- First Edition

CO-PO/PSO Matrix:

CO NO. PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
AMG-504.1 3 2 2 3 1 3 3 1 1
AMG-504.2 2 1 1 1 3 2 3 1 3 2
AMG-504.3 3 1 1 1 1 1 3
AMG-504.4 1 2 2 1 3 2 2 3
AMG-504.5 2 2 3 1 2 2 2 1 3
Average 2.2 1.5 1.75 2 1.6 1.8 2.2 2 1.5 2.4
3=Strongly mapped , 2=moderately mapped, 1=slightly mapped

Table specifying the scope of syllabus to be covered for unit tests

Unit Test Learning outcomes to be covered

Unit test-1 From 1.1 to 2.19
Unit test-2 From 3.1 to 5.16

225
 No. of Total No. of Marks for Marks for
Course code Course Title
Periods/Weeks periods FA SA
Visual EFX and
Composting
AMG-505 5 75 20 80
Techniques

TIME SCHEDULE
S.N CHAPTE Chapter/ No. of MAR SHORT ESSAY CO’s Mapped
o. R Unit Title Periods KS QUESTION QUEST
NO S IONS
1. 1 Evolution of 15 2 1 CO1
Visual Effects 16

2. 2 Basic Of Roto 15 26 2 2 CO2

scopic &
Composting
Techniques
3. 3 Keying 15 26 2 2 CO3
Techniques
4. 4 Match Moving 15 26 2 2 CO4
Tracking
Techniques
5. 5 Stereoscopic 15 16 2 1 CO5
Techniques
Total Periods 75 110 10 8

x Understand the work flow of visual effects and various level visual effects
techniques
x Handling various visual effects oftware’s
Course
x Expert in ro to scopic technique and keying & tracking
Objectives
x Understanding match move and tracking technique
x Handling live projects

CO NO COURSE OUTCOMES
CO1 AMG-505.1 Describe basics of Visual Effects and Special Effects.

CO2 AMG-505.2 Apply Rotoscopic and Compositing techniques w.r.t. Mocha.

CO3 AMG-505.3 Use Keying techniques and techniques for fine details
CO4 AMG-505.4 Apply tools like Transformation, tracking, editors

226
 CO5 AMG-505.5 Apply Stereoscopic techniques , cameras and conversion mechanisms.

CO-PO/PSO MATRIX

CO NO. PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
AMG-505.1 3 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 1
AMG-505.2 1 3 3 3 1 3 1 3 3 1
AMG-505.3 1 2 3 2 1 3 1 3 3 1
AMG-505.4 3 3 3 3 1 3 1 2 3 1
AMG-505.5 3 3 3 3 1 3 1 2 3 1
Average 2.2 2.4 2.8 2.4 1.2 3 1 2.8 2.6 1

3=Strongly mapped , 2=moderately mapped, 1=slightly mapped

Learning Outcomes

1.0 Evolution of Visual Effects

1.1 What is VFX?
1.2 State the need of VFX.
1.3 Give the history of VFX.
1.4 Write the applications of VFX.
1.5 List and Explainvarious techniques used in VFX in olden days.
1.6 List and Explain Hollywood techniques of visual effects.
1.7 Write about various Indian techniquesof visual effects.
1.8 Explain Land marking visual studios.
1.9 Explain screening of various movies
1.10 Explain VFX Professional Development with an example.
1.11 What is VFX pipeline?
1.12 Explain VFX pipe line.
1.13 List and Explain Pre- production methods used in VFX shooting
1.14 Explain VFX Artist movie making.
1.15 Explain VFX screening in Artist movie making?
1.16 Explain applying special effects in VFX Movie making.

2.0 Basic Of Radioscopic & Composting Techniques:

2.1 Define Compositing.
2.2 Define Rot scoping.
2.3 State the applications of Compositing.
2.4 What is Mocha?
2.5 Explain Mocha interface.
2.6 List Mocha preferences.
2.7 List and Explain various Mocha tools.
2.8 List and Explain The Viewer Controls of Mocha.
2.9 State the purpose of various viewer controls in mocha.
2.10 State purpose of timeline controls in mocha.
2.11 List various timeline controls in mocha.
2.12 Explain the purpose of various timeline controls in mocha.
2.13 What is trackingthe spline?
2.14 List layer properties in Mocha.
2.15 List types of compositing.

227
 2.16 Explain 2D Compositing.
2.17 List and explain ethics of compositing.
2.18 List and Explain Blending techniques
2.19 Explain transforming in 2D.
2.20 Explain Color correction.
2.21 Explain the process of making Tonal adjustment compositing workflow?
2.22 List and Explain quality checking techniques

3.0 Keying Techniques

3.1 What is Keying ?
3.2 State the uses of keying.
3.3 State the purpose of Nuke Keys.
3.4 List and explain Nuke Keys?
3.5 Demonstrate the usage of Primate with an example?
3.6 State the need of key light.
3.7 Explain the process of keying with key light.
3.8 Explain the keying workflow.
3.9 List and explain Various keying techniques.
3.10 Describe the key light with ultimate
3.11 Explain keying plug .
3.12 Explain keying in multiple softwares.
3.13 List and Explain various keying techniques for fine details.

4.0 Match Move &Tracking Techniques

4.1 What is the purpose of match move?
4.2 What is the purpose of Boujou interface?
4.3 List components of Boujou interface.
4.4 Explain the components of Boujou interface?
4.5 Explain different menus in BoujouMenubar.
4.6 List and Explain tools in tool bar in Boujou
4.7 Explain 2D mode tracking.
4.8 Explain 3D mode tracking.
4.9 Differentiate 2d and 3d tracking.
4.10 List and Explain track features.
4.11 List and Explain import sequences.
4.12 What is camera solve and state its need.
4.13 List and explain solve tools.
4.14 List and explain transformation tools.
4.15 Explain target tracks in detail.
4.16 List and Explain Graph Editors.
4.17 Explain export camera Solve.
4.18 List Trackers
4.19 Define Nuke
4.20 Explain Features Of Trackers.
4.21 Explain how to use trackers in Nuke
4.22 Define Point tracking
4.23 Define Planar Tracking.
4.24 Explain Point tracking.
4.25 Explain Planar tracking
4.26 Explain the process of importing tracking data from other softwares.
4.27 Explain Advanced Tracking workflow.
4.28 List and Explain Advanced Tracking Techniques

228
5.0 Stereoscopic Techniques
5.1 What is stereoscopy?
5.2 Mention types of stereoscope.
5.3 List and Explain types of dimensional Stereoscopy techniques.
5.4 List and explain category in stereoscopy with all subcategories.
5.5 What is stereo photography?
5.6 List and explain various olden stereo scope viewers.
5.7 Define stereographic projection.
5.8 Explain process of stereographic projection.
5.9 List and explain various types of stereo cameras.
5.10 Distinguish between types of stereo cameras.
5.11 List types of stereo display.
5.12 Explain types of stereo display.
5.13 List and Auto Stereoscopy Stereo Tools In Nuke
5.14 Explain Stereo Compositing Workflow
5.15 Define Stereo Conversion?
5.16 Explain process of Stereo Conversion.
5.17 Define Deep Composting.
5.18 Explain process of deep Compositing.
5.19 Explain Quality Control of Stereo Conversion.
5.20 Explain Debugging of Stereo Conversion.

COURSE CONTENT

1. Evolution of Visual Effects:

History of VFX – Techniques used in VFX oldendays – Hollywood techniques of visual effects –
Indian techniques visual effects – Land marking Visual studios – Screening of various movies–VFX
Professional Development– VFX growth Introduction to VFX pipeline – Pre production – Methods
used in VFX shooting – Famous visual VFX Artist Movie making screening –Special Effects–

2. Basic Of Rotosopic & Composting Techniques:

Introduction To Mocha – Mocha Interface – Mocha Preferences – Mocha Tools – The Viewer
Controls – The Timeline Controls – Layer Properties – Tracking The Spline – What Is 2d
Compositing – Ethics Of Compositing – Blending Techniques – Transforming In 2d – Color
Correction – Making Tonal Adjustments Compositing Workflow – Quality Checking Techniques

3. Keying Techniques
Introduction To Nuke Keys – Usage Of Primate– Keying With Key Light – Keying Workflow –
Various Keying– Key Light With Ultimate – Keying Plug- in Advanced– Keying in multiple software
–Techniques For Fine Details

4. Match Move &Tracking Techniques

Boujou Interface – Menu Bar – Tool Bar – 2D& 3dtracking – View – Track Features – Import
Sequences – Camera Solve – Solve Tools – Transformation Tools – Target Tracks – Graph Editors
– Export Camera Solve – Features Of Trackers – – Trackers In Nuke – Point And Planar Tracking
– Importing Tracking Data From Other Software’s – Advanced Tracking Workflow – Advanced
Tracking Techniques

5. Stereoscopic Techniques
What Is Stereoscopy – Types Of Dimensional – Category In Stereoscopy – Stereo Photography –

229
 Olden Stereoscope Viewers –Stereographic Projection – Types Of Stereo Camera – Type Of
Stereo Display –Auto Stereoscopy Stereo Tools In Nuke – Stereo Compositing Workflow – Stereo
Conversion –Deep Composting – Quality Control And Debugging Of Stereo Conversion

REFERENCE BOOKS

1. The Art & Science Of Digital Compositing, by Ron Brinkman, Morgan Kaufmann Publishers
2. Match Moving, by TIM DOBBERT, SYBEX Publisher
3. Digital Compositing, by Ron Brinkman, Academic Press
4. https://borisfx.com/support/documentation/mocha/6.0.0/#_the_timeline_controls

Table specifying the scope of syllabus to be covered for unit tests

Unit Test Learning outcomes to be covered

Unit test-1 From 1.1 to 3.7
Unit test-2 From 3.8 to 5.20

230
 Course Course Title No. of Total No. of Marks for Marks for
code Periods/Weeks periods FA SA
AMG-506 3D rendering ,rigging
and Character 4 60 40 60
animation lab

S No Chapter/ Unit Title No. of COs Mapped

Periods

1. Mental Ray Rendering Techniques 12 CO1

Rigging Menus & Editors C02

2. Skelton Setup& Props rigging 12
Robot Rigging

Character Rigging Work Flow CO3

3. Quadruped Rigging Setup 12
Advance Rigging Techniques

4. Animation Menus& Editors 12 C04

Basic Animation Techniques

5 Linear Animation Techniques 12 C05

Non-Linear Animation Techniques

Total 60

GUIDE LINES:
All the exercises provided in the list of practicals should be
completed and submitted during the semester examination.
In order to develop skill in mastering creativity, every student should
be made to practice thoroughly.
The external examiners are requested to ensure that a single
practical oriented question should not be given to more than three
students while admitting a batch of 30 students during Board
Examination.

231
Required Infrastructure(Software, Hardware and other Equipment) to be procured as per C-23:

SNO Hardware / Equipment Needed Software Needed

1 Desktop Systems: 1. Operating System:
Microsoft Windows 10
Configuration: professional-64 bit (Minimum)
33. Processor :: AMD Ryzen 9 3900X Or any
other equivalent intel/Motorola etc.. 2.Animation and Graphics
processor or Above Software
34. Mother Board: AMD 400/500 or its m. Adobe master collection cs6
equivalent or above (or Above)
35. RAM: 8GB(or above) dual channel DDR4 n. Autodesk MAYA
36. HDD: 500GM (SSD)/1TB(or above) o. Autodesk 3DS MAX.
37. Graphics Card: Aorus GeForce RTX 2080 Ti
Xtreme (or equivalent )
38. Monitor: 17” or above
39. Multimedia Devices like Mic, Head Phones /
Speakers , USB Web camera or USB Digital
Video Camera
40. Color Photo Scanner and Printer

CO No COURSE OUTCOMES

After completion of this course student will be able to

CO 1 AMG-506.1 Practice different mental ray rendering Techniques

CO 2 AMG-506.2 Create various Joints for Leg, spine, hand, robotic Skelton, rigging
controls ,Controls, usage of Hierarchy Editor, Connection Editor, prop
rigging
CO 3 AMG-506.3 Create Human Skelton, Usage of IK Skelton Generator, usage of stretch
and squash, script Editor, practice on quadruped rigging setup
CO 4 AMG-506.4 Developing Ball Bouncing animations using graph Editor and Trax editor
etc..
CO 5 AMG-506.5 Apply poses, animations motion flow, working with animation shots,
Tangents, creating Animation Clip, edit Clips

CO-PO/PSO MATRIX

CO NO. PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
AMG-506.1 1 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2
AMG-506.2 2 3 1 2 1 2 1 1 2 2
AMG-506.3 1 2 2 2 2 1 1 2 2 3
AMG-506.4 2 3 3 2 3 3 2 2 3 2
AMG-506.5 2 2 2 2 3 3 2 1 3 1
Average 1.8 2.6 2.2 2 2.2 2.2 1.6 1.6 2.4 2
3=Strongly mapped, 2=moderately mapped, 1=slightly mapped

232
Learning outcomes

1. Render The Interior Set In Layer Render Techniques Using Mental Ray Render CO1
2. Exercise on Exponent Photon Counts & Radius. CO1
3. Practice Mental Ray Nodes and Mental Ray Shaders for any object. CO1
4. Simulating both Sun Setup & Sky Setup by using mental ray rendering techniques. CO1
5. Practice on Mental Ray Shadow Map with examples. CO1
6. Create the human rig with proper control & skinning for given model CO2.
7. Create Joints for Leg, Hand and Spine- CO2
8. Create the facial rig for given 3d character with GUI controls. CO2
9. Create the vehicle rig with dynamic controls for given auto mobile models. CO3
10. Crete a character using various Deformers . CO3
11. Rig the given quadruped character with the proper control with skinning. – CO3
12. Create the thread mill walk cycle for 5sec with the given rigged character- CO3
13. Create Ball bouncing animation CO4
14. Develop a scene with Graph Editor CO4
15. Match the footage of video sequence with given rigged character. CO5
16. Create a audio track with grouping & merging Clips CO5
17. Create facial expression animation for given rigged character for6sec CO5
18. Create a simple walk cycle using 9 poses CO5

The competencies and key competencies to be achieved by the student

Name of the
S.No. Key Competencies
experiment Objectives

1 Create the ™ Identify controls to ™ Use various controls to rig characters

rig characters ™ Use different controls for skinning
human rig with
character
proper control ™ Apply different set drivens
& skinning for
given model

2 Create Joints for ™ Identify mechanisms ™ Use about various mechanisms to

to create joints create joints
Leg, Hand and
™ Use different Joints for legs, hands,
Spine spine
3 Create the facial ™ Identify GUI controls ™ Use various mechanism to do facial
rig for given 3d for facial rigging rigging for 3d character
character with ™ Use different controls for rigging 3d
characters
GUI controls.

4 Create the ™ Identify dynamic ™ Use different dynamic controls to rig a

vehicle rig with controls to rig a vehicle
dynamic controls vehicle or motor ™ Use various controls to rig mobile device
for given auto
mobile models.

233
5 Crete a character ™ Identify different ™ Use different deformers (lattice, Wrap,
using various deformers (lattice, Cluster, Sculpt) to create a character
Deformers Wrap, Cluster, ™ Use Non-Linear Deformers (Bend,
Sculpt) & Non-Linear Squash, sine, Twist, Wave, Blend Shape)
Deformers (Bend,
Squash, sine, Twist,
Wave, Blend Shape)
to create a character
6 Rig the given ™ Identify controls for ™ Use about controls for rigging
quadruped rigging quadruped quadruped character like Dog
character with character like Dog, ™ Use different controls to rig quadruped
car vehicle like, car
the proper
control
withskinning.

7 Create the ™ Identify controls for ™ Use controls for rigging moving
thread mill walk rigging moving character like thread mill
cycle for 5sec character thread ™ Use different positions and speeds
mill
with the given
riggedcharacter

8 Create Ball ™ Identify animation ™ Use various animation techniques to

bouncing techniques to bounce ball
animation bounce a ball ™ Practice on various directions
™ Identify angles , motions, height
9 Develop a scene ™ Identify controls in ™ Use mechanisms in Graph editor to
with Graph Graph editor to make different curves in a scene
Editor make different ™ Practice different curves
curves in a scene ™ Practice keys
10 Match the ™ Identify mechanism ™ Use control mechanism to match
footage of video to match footage of footage of video sequence with given
sequence with video sequence with character
given character ™ Practice on different videos
given
riggedcharacter.

11 Create audio ™ Identify controls to ™ Use of controls to merge and group

track with merge and group different audio tracks as one audio track
grouping & different audio ™ Practice on merging and grouping video
tracks as one audio clips
merging Clips
track
12 Create facial ™ Identify controls to ™ Use different controls for facial
expression merge and group expression animation for rigged
animation for different audio character
tracks as one audio ™ Practice different expressions
given rigged
track
character
for6sec

234
13 Create a simple ™ Identify controls for ™ Use poses and create walk cycles
walk cycle using walk cycle using ™ Practice using 9 poses
9 poses different poses

14 Practice Mental Know the concept of ™ Identify various Mental Ray Nodes and
Ray Nodes and Mental Ray Nodes and Mental Ray Shaders
Mental Ray Mental Ray Shaders ™ Exercise Mental Ray Nodes and Mental
Ray Shaders on any image
Shaders for any
object.

15 Simulating both Identify Sun Setup & Sky ™ Identify different Setups in mental ray
Sun Setup & Sky Setup rendering techniques
Setup by using ™ Exercise Sun Setup & Sky Setup by using
mental ray rendering techniques
mental ray
rendering
techniques.

16 Practice on Identify Mental Ray ™ Know about shadow map technique

Mental Ray Shadow Map technique ™ Practice on Mental Ray Shadow Map
Shadow Map with different example images.
with examples.

235
Course code Course Title No. of Total No. of Marks for FA Marks for SA
Periods/Weeks periods
COMPOSITING
AMG-507 03 45 40 60
Lab

S No Chapter/ Unit Title No. of COs Mapped

Periods

1. Evolution of Visual Effects 3 CO1

2. Basic Of Radioscopic & Composting 15 CO2

Techniques

3. Keying Techniques 6 CO3

4. Match Moving Tracking Techniques 12 CO4

5. Stereoscopic Techniques 9 CO5

Total 45

Upon completion of the course the student shall be able to

14. Install VFX software and configure it

COURSE
15. Enhance VFX applications using tools and techniques in Mocha interface
OBJECTIVES 16. Implement Keying techniques and Nuke Keys
17. Enhance VFX applications by applying concepts in Boujou interface
18. Implement stereoscopic projections using stereoscopic techniques
19. Implement projection mapping using MAYA.

CO No COURSE OUTCOMES

CO 1 AMG-507.1 Understand the evolution of Visual Effects

CO 2 AMG-507.2 Develop VFX effects using Rotoscoping and Compositing

Techniques
CO 3 AMG-507.3 Develop VFX effects using Keying Techniques

CO 4 AMG-507.4 Develop VFX effects using Match Moving Tracking

Techniques
CO 5 AMG-507.5 Develop VFX effects using Stereoscopic Techniques

236
 CO-PO/PSO MATRIX

CO NO. PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
AMG-507.1 3 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1
AMG-507.2 1 3 3 3 1 3 1 3 3 1
AMG-507.3 1 2 3 2 1 3 1 3 3 1
AMG-507.4 3 3 3 3 1 3 1 2 3 1
AMG-507.5 3 3 3 3 1 3 1 2 3 1
Average 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.4 1.2 3 1 2.8 2.6 1

3=Strongly mapped , 2=moderately mapped, 1=slightly mapped

GUIDE LINES:

All the exercises provided in the list of practical's should be completed and submitted during
the semester examination.
In order to develop skill in mastering creativity, every student should be made to practice
thoroughly.
The external examiners are requested to ensure that a single practical oriented question
should not be given to more than three students while admitting a batch of 30 students
during Board Examination.

Required Infrastructure(Software, Hardware and other Equipment) to be procured as per C-20:

SNO Hardware / Equipment Needed Software Needed

1 Desktop Systems: 1. Operating System:
Microsoft Windows 10
Configuration: professional-64 bit
41. Processor :: AMD Ryzen 9 3900X Or any other (Minimum)
equivalent intel/Motorola etc.. processor or Above
42. Mother Board: AMD 400/500 or its equivalent or 2.Animation and Graphics
above Software
43. RAM: 8GB(or above) dual channel DDR4 p. Adobe master
44. HDD: 500GM (SSD)/1TB(or above) collection cs6 (or
45. Graphics Card: Aorus GeForce RTX 2080 Ti Xtreme (or Above)
equivalent ) q. Autodesk MAYA
46. Monitor: 17” or above r. Autodesk 3DS MAX.
47. Multimedia Devices like Mic, Head Phones / Speakers
, USB Web camera or USB Digital Video Camera
48. Color Photo Scanner and Printer

Learning Outcomes

1. Install the VFX related software and Configure it.

2. Demonstrate tracked spline tool in Mocha to speed up shape creation .
3. Demonstrate Mocha tools with real time scenarios
4. Demonstrate Blending Techniques in Mocha
5. Create the rotoscopic for character to changing the dress color.
6. Create Track, keying &composite given footages using mocha nuke.
7. Composite the green matte footage with given main footages using nuke.
8. Demonstrate Keying techniques for fine details

237
9. Demonstrate tools in Boujou toolbar
10. Demonstrate menus in Boujoumenubar
11. Create Match move using boujo& composite with Maya.
12. Import tracking data from other softwares
13. Create the title effect & logo animation in after effects.
14. Create the 3d composite Using Nuke for layer renders.
15. Create 3d camera movement to footage using projection mapping using Maya&
nuke.
16. Create dual role effects on a character and use deep compositing..
17. Create an application demonstrating stereographic projection
18. Demonstrate Debugging of stereo conversion

The competencies and key competencies to be achieved by the student

S.No. Name of the experiment Objectives Key Competencies

1 Install the VFX related software Understand VFX ™ Identify VFX related software
and Configure it. and Identify ™ Install the latest version
various VFX ™ Configure the latest version
™ Test the software
related software

2 Demonstrate tracked spline tool Practice the ™ Implement the tracked spline
in Mocha to speed up shape usage of tracked tool for speed up of shape
creation and reduce manual key spline tool in creations
™ Implement the tracked spline
frames Mocha interface
tool for reducing manual delays.

3 Demonstrate Mocha tools with Use various tools ™ Apply various Mocha tools to
real time scenarios used in Mocha enhance VFX applications

4 Demonstrate Blending Understand ™ Apply blending tools in Mocha to

Techniques in Mocha various blending enhance VFX applications
techniques

5 Create the radioscopic for Use ™ Implement radioscopic

character to changing the dress rotoscopiccolor mechanism
color. change ™ Apply color schemes
mechanism

6 Create Track, keying &composite Demonstrate ™ Implement Tracking

given footages using mocha Tracking, Keying ™ Implement Keying
nuke. and Composite ™ Implement Compositing
Using Mocha interface
mechanisms

238
 7 Composite the green matte Composting mat ™ Apply compositing on main
footage with given main footages. footages with green matte
footages using nuke. footage.
™ Using Nkue.

8 Demonstrate Keying techniques Practice d Keying ™ Apply Keying techniques for

for fine details techniques making fine details

9 Demonstrate tools in Boujou Use various tools ™ Use Boujou toolbar for creating
toolbar in Boujou toolbar VFX applications

10 Demonstrate menus in Identify various ™ Use Boujoumenubar for creating

Boujoumenubar menus in VFX applications
Boujoumenubar

11 Create Match move using Apply Match ™ Implement Match Move

boujo& composite with Maya. Move concept ™ Implement Composite
Using Maya
12 Import tracking data from other Working with ™ Import tracking data from
software importing of various software’s
Tracking data.

13 Create the title effect &logo Creating after ™ Create title effect
animation in after effects. effects ™ Create logo
™ Animate the effect.

14 Create the 3d composite Using Understand 3D ™ Implement 3D Composition

Nuke for layer renders. Composite using ™ Using Nuke
Nuke ™ Creating for layer renders

15 Create 3d Camera Demonstrate ™ Using Maya and Nuke

movement to Footage projection ™ Applying projection mapping.
using projection mapping mapping ™ Using 3D camera movement
using Maya& nuke. ™ Working with footages using
cameras.
16 Create dual role effects on a Work with dual ™ Using radioscopic effect.
character roles. ™ Create dual roles of a
character.
™ Apply deep compositing.
17 Create an application Understand ™ Implement Stereographic
demonstrating stereographic stereographic projection
projection projection

18 Demonstrate Debugging of Understand ™ Use debugging mechanisms of

stereo conversion Debugging in stereo conversion
stereo
conversion

239
 AMG -508 Life Skills

Marks
Course Course No. of Total No. of Marks for
for
Code Title Periods/Week Periods SA
FA
AMG-508 Life Skills 3 45 40 60

Course Objectives: The students shall

- understand the relevance of life skills in both personal and professional lives

- practise life skills complementarily in life-management to lead a happy and successful life

Course Outcomes: The students shall

CO1: exhibit right attitude and be adaptable in adverse and diverse situations.

CO2: set appropriate goals and achieve them through proper planning, time management and self-
motivation

CO3: solve diverse real-life and professional problems with critical thinking and creativity for a stress-
free life.

CO4: be an ideal team player and manifest as a leader.

Course Delivery:

Text book: “Life Skills”–by State Board of Technical Education and Training, AP

Sl no Unit Teaching
Hours
1 Attitude 4
2 Adaptability 4
3 Goal Setting 4
4 Motivation 4
5 Time Management 4
6 Critical thinking 4
7 Creativity 4
8 Problem Solving 5
9 Team work 4
10 Leadership 4
11 Stress Management 4
Total 45

240
Course Content:

UNIT I:Attitude matters!

Preparatory activity-Role play; Generating word bank; Types of attitude. Read the passage and
answer the related questions, read the story and discuss issues raised; Express opinions on the given
topic and fill the grid with relevant words.

UNIT 2: Adaptability…makes life easy!

Pair work-Study the given pictures and understand adaptability -read the anecdote and discuss, read
the story and answer the questions, role play

UNIT 3: Goal Setting…life without a goal is a rudderless boat!

Short term goals and long term goals-SMART features, observe the pictures and answer questions-
matching-read the passage and answer questions-filling the grid.

UNIT 4: Motivation…triggers success!

Types of motivation-difference between motivation and inspiration- matching different
personalities with traits - dialogue followed by questions - writing a paragraph based on the passage.

UNIT 5: Time Management… the need of the hour!

Effective Time Management- Time quadrant-Group task on management of time- Time wasters-fill in
the grid, read the story and answer the questions- prioritising tasks.
UNIT 6: Critical Thinking…Logic is the key!
Preparatory activity-read the passage and answer the questions- differentiate between facts and
assumptions-components of critical thinking- complete the sets of analogies- choose the odd one
out-true or false statements- decide which of the conclusions are logical.

UNIT 7: Creativity….The essential YOU!!

Definition- Pre-activity-read the anecdote and answer the questions- matching celebrities with their
fields of specialization- think of creative uses of objects- think creatively in the given situations.

UNIT 8: Problem Solving…there is always a way out!

Preparatory activity-read the story and answer the questions- discuss the given problem and come
out with three alternative solutions- group activity to select the best solution among available
alternatives- discuss the problem and plan to analyze it.

UNIT 9: Team Work… Together we are better!

Advantages of team work- Characteristics of a team player- Activity-Observe the pictures and classify
them into two groups-team game - read the story and answer the questions- fill in the grid.

UNIT 10 : Leadership… the making of a leader!

Characteristics of effective leadership- styles of leadership- Activity-read the dialogue and answer
the questions- identify the people in the picture and describe them- discuss leadership qualities of
the given leaders- filling the grid- read the quotes and write the name of the leader.

UNIT 11: Stress Management … live life to the full !!

Types of stress- Strategies for Stress Management- Activity-read the passage and answer the
questions, read the situation and write a paragraph about how to manage stress.

241
 Mapping Course Outcomes with Program Outcomes

P 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
O
C POs 1 to 5 are applications of Engineering Principles, can’t 1,2,3,4 1,2,3,4
O directly be mapped to Life Skills

Cos- Pos Mapping :

Cognitive levels as per

Bloom’s Taxonomy
R/U/Ap/An/Ev/Cr
CO Unit
CO Course Outcome PO mapped ( Remembering /
Mapped
Understanding/
Applying/Analysing/
Evaluating/ Creating )
CO 1 To exhibit right attitude and All Lessons 6,7 U/Ap/ An
be adaptable to adverse and ( 1 to 11)
diverse situations
CO2 To set appropriate goals and 3,4,5 6,7 U/Ap/An
achieve them through
proper planning, time
management and self-
motivation
CO3 To solve diverse real-life and 6,7,8,11 6,7 U/Ap/An/ Ev/ Cr.
professional problems with
critical thinking and
creativity for a stress-free
life
CO4 To be an ideal team player 9,10 6,7 U/Ap/An/ Ev
and manifest as a leader

ASSESSMENT

C23-Common-508: Life Skills

x The assessment for C23-Common 508 is on par with all other practical subjects comprising
40 marks for Internal Assessment and 60 marks for External examination attaining the final
total of 100 Marks.
x The Internal Assessment can be conducted in the form of Assignments in all the 11 Units
together, taking the average for 40 marks as suggested below.
x The Assessment sheet provided after each lesson in the workbook can be evaluated as an
assignment (A) for 10 marks. In addition to that, another assignment (B) can be conducted
for 10 marks in each Unit, awarding total average of 10 marks for each Lesson. Finally the
grand total can be averaged for 40 marks as Internal marks.

242
 x The students can present these assignments (B) to the teacher orally and they should also
write down their assignments (B) in a separate note book for practice as they are going to
speak/present in the external examination and submit the same to the teacher.
x The questions for Assignment styles vary from Lesson to Lesson as different skills are
assessed in each Lesson with specific parameters. We can also consider the questions of
assignments given after each lesson in the workbook.
x The assignment questions can also be given based on case studies, personal experiences,
observations, making inferences/ analysis/ forming opinions, solving puzzles, questions on
logical thinking, reasoning, evaluating and writing reviews..etc.

Calculating Internal marks through Assignments

Name of the student: PIN: Branch: Academic Year:
S. Title of the Unit / Lesson Assignment A: Assignment B: Total Marks in
No. 10Marks 10 Marks each Unit/ Lesson
( assessment sheets ( Average for
after each lesson) 10 Marks)
1 Attitude
2 Adaptability
3 Goal setting
4 Motivation
5 Time Management
6 Critical Thinking
7 Creativity
8 Problem Solving
9 Team work
10 Leadership
11 Stress Management
Marks scored Example: : 90
Total Number of 11
Assignments
Internal Assessment: Example: (90/11) X4=32.7 33
Average for 40 Marks

243
 End Exam Model paper:

C23-Common-508 : Life Skills Lab

Guidelines to prepare the question paper of the Lab End exam for 60 marks:

I. Define any three of the following terms of Life skills: ( Oral ) – 10 Marks

( From Lessons 1 to 11)

II. Recollect and narrate an incident either from your personal experience or observation where you
have exhibited/ learned about any one of the following life skills. (oral) – 15 Marks.

( From Lessons 1 to 4: Attitude/ Adaptability/Motivation/Goal setting/

III. Recollect and narrate an incident either from your personal experience or observation where
you have exhibited/ learned about any one of the following life skills. (oral) – 15Marks.

( From Lessons 5, 9,10,11 : Time Management, Team Work, Leadership, Stress Management )

IV. A question on problem solving skill, using creativity and critical thinking.

( A case study/a problematic situation should be provided by the examiner and the students
should answer it in writing.)

Ex: Analyse the following problematic situation and write down the possible solutions and choose
the best among them using your creativity and critical thinking / How do you solve the following
problem?– ( written ) 20 Marks

( From Lessons 6,7,8: Creativity/ Critical Thinking/ Problem Solving )

Note: The questions I to III can be evaluated through Viva Voce and Q.No. IV should be answered
by the students in writing. The examiner can adapt the blended mode of evaluation ( oral&
written) in view of the more number of students and time constraint.

244
 AMG-509 EDITING LAB

No. of Total No. of

Course code Course Title Marks for FA Marks for SA
Periods/Weeks periods

AMG-509 EDITING Lab 3 45 40 60

GUIDELINES:

x All the exercises provided in the list of practicals should be completed and submitted
during the semester examination.
x In order to develop skill in mastering creativity, every student should be made to practice
thoroughly.
x The external examiners are requested to ensure that a single practical oriented question
should not be given to more than three students while admitting a batch of 30 students
during Board Examination.
x
Laboratory requirements:

S.No Item Configuration Quantity

1 Computer Processor :: 2.66GHZ Core 2 Quad (or above)
8GB DDR3 RAM
1TB HDD SATA
Monitors – 17”
Graphic Accelerator Cards 2 GB RAM, GPU
Support
2 Audio Dubbing HDV - VIDEO CAMERA -1No
For batch of
Acoustic Studio Stereo Mic- 1No
5 to 10
Sound Mixer-1No students at
a time
Amplifier-1No
Speakers-1Pair/1 set of home theatre
Stereo Head Phones-1set/student
3 Operating Sys Windows-XP(64-Bit)- (or above)
5 Adobe Master a) PHOTOSHOP
Collection CS6 b) Premier
c) Sony Sound forge

245
 No. of
S No Chapter/ Unit Title COs Mapped
Periods

1. Audio capturing 9 CO1,CO5

2. Audio Editing 9 CO1,CO3

3. Video Capturing 9 CO2,CO4

4. Video Editing 9 CO1,CO2

Video Production (Post Production, Pre

5. 9 CO5
production, production)

Total 45

1. To develop process of making movies.

2. To practice basic storyboarding to prepare for a movie using editing
COURSE software
OBJECTIVES 3. To practice the categories in compositing process
4. To apply editing techniques in various stages of production

CO No COURSE OUTCOMES

CO 1
AMG-509.1 Practice on the latest techniques in editing

CO 2 Develop the method to visualize and create their own video logs and short-
AMG-509.2
films.
CO 3
AMG-509.3 Apply the concepts of Non-Linear editing
CO5 Apply the basics of camera technology, sound, microphones, shooting
AMG-509.4
techniques in editing process
CO5
AMG-509.5 Apply editing techniques at Pre-production, Production and Post-Production

CO-PO/PSO MATRIX

CO NO. PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
AMG-509.1 2 1 1 3 3 2 3 3 3 2
AMG-509.2 1 3 3 2 2 3 2 3 2
AMG-509.3 1 2 3 2 1
AMG-509.4 1 2 3 3 3 2
AMG-509.5 1 2 2 2 3 2 3 3 3
Average 1.5 1 2 2.2 2.5 2.2 2.8 2.8 2.8 2

3=strongly mapped, 2=moderately mapped, 1=slightly mapped

246
LEARNING OUTCOMES:

1. Record audio for 10 min edit it for 5 min.

2. Develop concept for audio recording and mix it with appropriate effects.
3. Experiment on audio mixing using some effects.
4. Remove vocals from a song using audio editing software.
5. Convert the raw video file & edit the video sequence for 5min
6. Create the title for the movie IN 2 min with the given word document
7. Edit the given HD video file and make the final out put in vob (DVD)format
8. Edit the 3D rendering sequence &make the video file as demo reel
9. Make the single video file of the interview taken in multicameras
10. Edit the short film for 5 min video sequence in given 20 min video
sequence
11. Make the teaser(1min) for the given movie
12. Edit the given video with cine quality video effects with warm color tone.

The competencies and key competencies to be achieved by the student

Name of the
S.No. Objectives Key Competencies
experiment
1 Record audio for Identify various tools Identity the options for audio recording
10 min edit it for 5 for recording audio Edit audio for 5mnts

min and editing the audio.

2 Develop concept Identify mixing tools Identify tools for audio mixing
for audio Apply suitable effects

recording and mix

it with
appropriate
effects.
3 Experiment on Identify the tools to Identify how we can change the audio by
audio mixing using set some audio effects setting some effects.

some effects.
4 Remove vocals Practice in separating Identify the tools in separation of elements
from a song using various elements in from audio.

audio editing audio.

software.
5 Convert the raw Identify the tools to Identify various options used for video
video file & edit edit video editing

the video
sequence for 5min

247
6 Create the title for Demonstrate title Identify various tools to edit titles of a video
the movie IN 2 editing
min with the given
word document
7 Edit the given HD Demonstrate the Identify various tools in HD video editing
video file and editing of HD video file Save it in vob9DVD) format.

make the final out and changing format

put in vob of video.
(DVD)format
8 Edit the 3D Demonstrate how 3D Identify various tools in rendering
rendering rendering can be done Make demo real

sequence &make on given video and

the video file as practice making video
demo reel file as reel
9 Make the single Demonstrate how to Identify tools to edit video captured from
video file of the take video using different angles.

interview taken in different cameras

multicameras
10 Edit the short film Demonstrate how to Identify tools for editing a short film.
for 5 min video edit a short film.
sequence in given
20 min video
sequence
11 Make the Demonstrate how to Identify tools to make a teaser.
teaser(1min) for make a teaser from a
the given movie big video.
12 Edit the given Demonstrate the edit Identify the tools for increasing the quality
video with cine the video to get quality of video.

quality video video with various

effects with warm effects.
colortone.

248
 Course code Course Title No. of Total No. of Marks for FA Marks for SA
Periods/Weeks periods
AMG-510 Project 4 60 40 60

Guidelines:

9. Students have to be divided into groups consisting of 3 to 4 members.

10. Each group has to develop a project by applying the knowledge acquired during entire
diploma course.
11. They have to approach TV studios, Film Industries, Photo and Video Studios , Multimedia
centers , DTP centres, Printing presses to collect the information and the long term Projects
related to Photography, Animation, Film making ,Print Media and Visual media.
12. They have to be in a position to develop short films , cartoon movies , TV Shows by applying
Pre Shooting , Production Design , Shooting , Post Production , Rigging , Rendering, Lighting,
Shading , Editing, Compositing techniques wherever necessary.
13. They have to Produce the Project report at the end of the project.
14. They should conduct minimum three seminars/Workshops to explain the progressive
development of their project with co project members and the staff.
15. Some of the examples of the projects may be:
a. Create a short film on farming.
b. Short film on Education.
c. Short film on Cartoon characters.
d. Short film on Political roles.
e. Short film on Fishing.
f. Short film on Airport activities.
g. Short film on Cooking.
h. Short film on Sports and Games.
i. Short film on Social and Ethical responsibilities.
j. Short film on Cardiac operation in Hospital.
k. Short film on Moon , Sun and other Planets…etc.
In producing all the short films the student should apply all activities mentioned in the Point No. 4
and make them available on social media websites like YouTube, Facebook, Twitter, Instagram
and your Institute website.

249
 DIPLOMAIN3DANIMATIONANDGRA
PHICSENGINEERINGSCHEME OF
INSTRUCTIONSAND EXAMINATION
CURRICULUM-2023

(VI Semester)

No of Marks Marks
Course Code Course title Duration
periods/week for FA for SA
INDUSTRIAL TRAINING
AMG-601 (Online Certificate 42 6 months 240 60
courses /Industry)

LEARNING OUTCOMES (In Industry): The student shall be able to display the following skill sets

1. Apply knowledge and skill already learnt in the institution.

2. Acquire the required skills of analysis, design and development, testing, verification and
validation.
3. Acquire skills of deployment and distribution of the product.
4. Involve in product design, development, quality testing and maintenance production by
exhibiting the strength, teamwork spirit and self-confidence
5. Prepare product documents like user manual and installation guide and operational
manuals.
6. Perform the activities of deploying product at customer site and training the end user.
7. Maintaining the system at user site (Post product services)

S No Unit Title Duration COs Mapped

1 Application of Knowledge acquired. 1 month CO1

2 Skill Acquirement. 2 months CO2

3 Participate in product development. 2 months CO3

4 Preform onsite service. 1 month CO4

Total 6 months

1.Expose to real time working environment

2. Enhance knowledge and skill already learnt in the institution
Course Objectives 3. Acquire the required skills in SDLC phases .
4. Instil the good qualities of integrity, responsibility and self
confidence.

250
 At the end of course student able to:

CO1 AMG-601.1 Apply knowledge and skill already learnt in the institution.

Acquire the required skills of analysis, design and development,

CO2 AMG-601.2 testing, verification and validation, deployment and distribution
of the product.
Course
Involve in product design, development, quality testing and
Outcomes
CO3 AMG-601.3 maintenance production by exhibiting the strength, teamwork
spirit and self-confidence

Prepare product document, gain the skills in deploying product

CO4 AMG-601.4
at customer site , training the end user, maintaining the system.

CO-PO/PSO MATRIX

CO No PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3

CBD-601.1 3 3 3 3

CBD-601.2 3 2 3 3 3 3 3

CBD-601.3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

CBD-601.4 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Average 3 3 3 2.7 3 3 3 3 3 3

3=strongly mapped 2=moderately mapped 1=slightly mapped

251
 LEARNING OUTCOMES – SCHEM OF EVALUATION (Two Online Certificate courses):

TRAINING LEARNING
MODULE TOPIC OUTCOMES (In- MARKS
NO. house training)

First 3 1) Registration at i)Learning 120

Months/12 Nptel/ Swayam/ Moocs/course
weeks- First era/lectera/caltech/oxford/hckerrank/udemy… ii)Mini Application
development
certificate etc.,
iii)Report -1
preparation for First
certificate

iv)1st Assessment

Next 3 1) Registration at i)Learning 120

Months/12 Nptel/Swayam/Moocs/course
Weeks- era/lectera/caltech/oxford/hckerrank/udemy… ii)Mini Application
Second etc., development
Certificate iii)Report
preparation

iv)2 nd Assessment

External Seminar on two reports/viva Evaluation by 60

Evaluation GUIDE/Co -
Examiner,HOD and
External Examiner

TOTAL 300

Online Certificate courses –

1. First 3 Months/12 weeks- Registration at either of Nptel/ Swayam/ Moocs/course era /

lectera / caltech / oxford / hckerrank / udemy for First Certificate Cource

2. Next 3 Months/12 Weeks- Registration at either of Nptel/ Swayam/ Moocs/course era /

lectera / caltech / oxford / hckerrank / udemy for Second Certificate Cource.

252
 Scheme of evaluation(Training at Industry)

SI. Subject Duration Scheme of evaluation

No. Max.
Item Nature
Marks
Assessment of
learning
1.First outcomes by
Assessment at both the
120
Industry (After faculty and
12 Weeks) training
mentor of the
industry
Assessment of
learning
2.Second
outcomes by
Assessment at
both the
the Industry 120
faculty and
(After 20
Industrial training
1 6 months weeks))
Training mentor of the
industry
Final Training
20
Summative Report
assessment at Demonstration
institution level of any one of
30
the skills listed
in learning
outcomes

Viva Voce 10

TOTAL MARKS 300

The industrial training shall carry 300 marks and pass marks are
50%.A candidate failing to secure the minimum marks should
complete it at his own expenses.

During Industrial training the candidate shall put in a minimum of 75%attendance.

253
 Weightage of marks for Assessment of Learning Outcomes during first and second
assessment (at industry)

Max Marks Allotted Max Marks Allotted

Sl.No Learning Outcome
For first assessment For second assessment
Apply knowledge and skill already learnt in
1 50 10
the institution.
Acquire the required skills of analysis,
design and development , testing,
2 70 30
verification and validation , deployment
and distribution of the product.
Involve in product design, development,
quality testing and maintenance
3 - 40
production by exhibiting the strength,
teamwork spirit and self-confidence
Prepare product document, gain the skills
in deploying product at customer site ,
4 - 40
training the end user, maintaining the
system.
Total 120 120

During assessment the performance of the students shall be assessed in those skills in which
the student has been trained and be awarded the marks as per the weightage assigned as above. In
case the student has undergone training in a few skill sets then the total marks obtained shall be
raised to 120 marks for the given assessment i.e. either assessment 1 or 2. However the
performance of the student shall be assessed at the most skill sets listed above but not less than
three skill sets.
Illustration for First assessment.
If the student has undergone training in only in 2 skill sets ( namely 1 Æfor 50 marks, and
2Æfor 40 marks ) out of 3 ( namely 1 Æfor 50 marks, 2Æfor 40 marks and 3 Æfor 30
marks) in First assessment and marks awarded during assessment is 60 out of 90 marks, then the
marks of 60 shall be enhanced to 120 proportionately as (60/90)*120=80.
Illustration for second assessment .
If the student has undergone training in only in 5 skill sets ( namely 1 Æfor 10 marks, 2Æ
for 20 marks , 3 - for 10 marks, 4Æfor 25 marks, 5ÆFor 15 marks ) out of 7 ( namely 1 Æfor
10
marks, 2Æfor 20 marks , 3 ÆFor 10 marks, 4Æfor 25 marks, 5ÆFor 15 marks, 6 Æfor
25 marks
and 7Æfor 15 marks ) in Second assessment and marks awarded during assessment is 65 out of
80 marks, then the marks of 65 shall be enhanced to 120 proportionately as (65/80)*120=97.5 =
rounded to 98.

254
GUIDELINES FOR INDUSTRIAL TRAINING OF DIPLOMA IN COMPUTER ENGINEERING PROGRAMME

1. Duration of the training: 6 months.

2. Eligibility: The As per SBTET norms
3. Training Area: Students can be trained in either in In-house/Industry/ TWO Online Certificate
courses

i. First 3 Months/12 weeks- Registration at either of Nptel/ Swayam/ Moocs/course era /

lectera / caltech / oxford / hckerrank / udemy for First Certificate Course

ii. Next 3 Months/12 Weeks- Registration at either of Nptel/ Swayam/ Moocs/course era /
lectera / caltech / oxford / hckerrank / udemy for Second Certificate Course.
in the areas of
4. Application Software Development / system software Development / firmware development
/ Mobile application development/ Database applications / Web development/ IoT
application development / smart technologies / Hardware interfacing/ Networking .
5. The candidate shall put a minimum of 90% attendance during Industrial Training.
6. If the student fails to secure 90% attendance during industrial training, the student shall
reappear for 6 months industrial training.
7. Formative assessment at industry level shall be carried out by the Mentor from of the
industry, where the student is undergoing training and the faculty in charge (Guide) from the
concerned section in the institution.
8. The Industrial training shall carry 300 marks and pass marks is 50% in assessments at
industry (first and second assessment) and final summative assessment at institution level
put together i.e. 150 marks out of 300 marks.
9. If the student fails to secure 50% marks in final summative assessment at institution level,
the student should reappear for final summative assessment in the subsequent board
examination.
10. Final summative assessment at institution level is done by a committee including1. Head of
the section ( of concerned discipline ONLY), 2.External examiner from an industry and 3.
Faculty member who assessed the student during Industrial Training as members.

Guidelines and responsibilities of the faculty members who are assessing the students
performance during industrial training

***

255